Home

Korg PA50sd Electronic Keyboard User Manual

1. 1 AC power supply connector Connect the included power supply cable here After connecting the power supply cable to the TRITON STUDIO connect the other end to an AC outlet p 11 2 PO W ER switch This switch turns the power on off p 19 3 AUDIO OUTPUT Connect these outputs to the input jacks of your amp or mixer In addition to the L MONO and R main stereo audio outputs the TRITON STUDIO provides four indi vidual audio outputs The sound from each oscillator drum timbre track or insert effect can be freely routed to any output p 139 MAIN L MONO R These are unbalanced phone jacks These are the main audio output jacks By setting Bus Select to L R the output from an oscillator an insert effect an individual drum part or the metronome can be output to the MAIN L MONO and R jacks When making connections in stereo use L MONO and R When making connections in mono use the L MONO jack INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 These are unbalanced phone jacks These are individual independent audio output jacks By setting the Bus Select to 1 2 3 4 1 2 or 3 4 an oscilla THRU OUT wN So a Lij 0 tor an insert effect an individual drum part or the metro nome etc can be assigned to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 jacks The output from the 1 2 3 4 jacks is not affected by the VOLUME slider 4
2. 106 Creating multisample indexes and sampling 106 Applying an insert effect to a sample and resample ireonsi an An pinata wineries 107 RNPP oon a a AN a 108 Loop SENE Sirrin a 110 Sample waveform data editing 111 Mu ltsample Odie cicusssetisasccsieamnaniiaes 111 Converting a multisample to a program 112 Using Time Slice to divide a sample and playing it im Sequencer Modei oioi aaa ities ral enemas 112 Sampling in Program Combination or Sequencer TA OAC i E NONS 115 Record an external audio input source while a song plays and create event data at the same time In Track Sampling function ee 115 Resampling the song playback to create a WAVE file on the hard Grive assis ssh eaeesavi ciel iets 116 Creating an audio CD from WAVE files sampled to hard GUS KD estonia cere uaa tetas uaa t mutates 118 SMF Standard MIDI File playback 5 120 The structure of Song Play mode eee 120 Playing SMF dataserie aas 121 Playback using the Jukebox function s s s 122 Saving a Jukebox SE ssiri 122 Playing along with SMF data cece 123 Settings for the entire TRITON STUDIO Global SOU NOS oarra E 124 Tuning to another instrument Transposing 124 Adjusting the way in which velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone s s ssseseseeseeessese 124 Bypassing the effects s sssssesessssesesseseressrersesesesesese 124 Recalling the last selected mode and page at
3. t For examples of sampling in Program and Combina tion modes refer to p 45 The sampling procedure in Combination mode is the same as in Program mode Record an external audio input source while a song plays and create event data at the same time In Track Sampling function As an example here s how the sound of a guitar con nected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack can be added to a song you created 5 In this example we will send the external audio input source to INDIVIDUAL 1 so if you want to monitor the sound being sampled connect AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R and INDIVIDUAL 1 to your mixer and use headphones etc to monitor the output of the mixer Q In Sequencer mode select the song to which you want to add the guitar sound You can either create a song or use Disk mode to load a previously created song 2 Connect your guitar to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob near the center position amp If you connect a passive type guitar without an internal preamp the impedance mismatch will make it difficult to sample at an appropriate level This type of guitar should be sent through a preamp or effect processor 3 Access the Sequencer P0 Play REC Sampling page 4 Set the various Input parameters so that the signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack will be sent to INDI VIDUAL 1 Make the following settings I
4. Basic functions Arpeggiator settings Synchronizing the arpeggiator The note timing of the arpeggiator will differ depending on the state of the arpeggiator Key Sync check box If this is checked the arpeggiator will operate at the tim ing of the first note on you play from a state in which all keys are released If this is unchecked the arpeggiator will operate in syn chronization with the internal or external MIDI clock The paragraphs below explain how synchronization occurs when the Key Sync check box is unchecked However synchronization with Song Start and with the MIDI realtime command Start message are exceptions to this Synchronization between arpeggiators A and B In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes two arpeggiators can operate simultaneously In this case if you start an arpeggiator whose Key Sync is unchecked while the other arpeggiator is already run ning the arpeggiator you started will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the timing of the already running arpeggiator RA If Key Sync is checked A and B will each operate on their own timing Synchronization between the arpeggiators and sequencer in Sequencer or Song Play mode When song playback is stopped e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the timing of the internal MIDI clock e In Sequencer mode when an RPPR pattern is playing the arpeggiator will s
5. PCG Contents bank I C To bank E B EXB PCMO3 PCG Contents bank I C To bank E C Load C_BANK SNG too On checked SNG Allocation Clear EXB PCMO4 PCG Contents bank I C To bank E D Load C_BANK SNG too On checked SNG Allocation Append EXB PCMO05 PCG Contents bank I C To bank E E EXB PCM06 07 C_BANK PCG PCG Contents bank I C To bank E F EXB PCM06 07 D BANK PCG PCG Contents bank I D To bank E F ff Because you checked Load C_BANK SNG too for EXB PCM03 and 04 the RPPR settings and patterns will be loaded into Sequencer mode Because you set SNG Allocation to Append for EXB PCM04 the C BANK SNG song data that you had loaded for EXB PCM03 will be preserved i e not overwritten 5 Press the OK button to load the data amp If you execute with PCG Contents set to All the bank INT A INT B and INT C or INT D programs and combinations all drum kits all user arpeggio patterns and global settings will be overwritten amp If you want to keep the data that is currently in the internal memory you must execute Save All or Save PCG to save the current data before you per form the procedure described here EXB MOSS If you want to load the floppy disk included with the EXB MOSS into the TRITON STUDIO load program bank I F and combination bank I B 000
6. UP amp If a user arpeggio pattern is selected the Octave Motion setting Global P6 Arpeggio Pattern Setup page will affect the way in which the arpeggio is played Resolution Specifies the timing value of the arpeg gio notes over a range of A d Gate Specifies the length gate time of each note in the arpeggio If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Gate setting for each step Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Edit page will be used amp This value will be in effect when the ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob is in the center position 12 o clock Be sure that the knob is in the center position when you make this setting Velocity Specifies the velocity of the notes in the arpeggio If this is set to Key the velocity with which you actually played each note will be used If a user arpeggio pattern is selected you can set this to Step In this case the value of the Vel setting for each step Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Edit page will be used amp This value will be in effect when the ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob is in the center position 12 o clock Be sure that the knob is in the center position when you make this setting When a preload user arpeggio pattern is selected set ting the Gate or Velocity to Step will add a sense of groove to the arpeggio pattern Swing This adjus
7. Combination Basic functions settings 80 Producing songs TRITON STUDIO contains a 16 multi track MIDI sequencer The sequencer acts as a hub integrating TRI TON STUDIO s numerous functions allowing it to be used in a variety of situations including music production and live performance i Sampling or resampling can be performed in Sequencer mode p 115 You can also apply the TRITON STUDIO s effects to an external audio input source for a wide range of possibilities p 143 amp When you turn off the power the settings made in Sequencer mode and the song data cue list data and any user pattern data that you recorded will not be backed up If you wish to keep this data you must save it on media Floppy disk hard drive etc before turning off the power or perform a MIDI data dump to save the data on an external data filer etc If you wish to save the programs track parameters effects and arpeggiator function settings etc selected for a song as a template song use the page menu command Save Template Song Immediately after the power is turned on TRITON STUDIO will not contain any cue list data or song data so if you wish to playback a song on the sequencer you must first load data from media or receive a MIDI data dump from a MIDI filer p 63 PG p 145 161 Features of the sequencer The sequencer lets you record a maximum of 200 000 events note data etc up to 200 songs
8. amp In Combination Song and Song Play mode depend ing on the arpeggiator A B settings the arpeggio may not start when you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on p 31 Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo Rotate the ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob to adjust the tempo The J display in the upper right of the LCD will change The tempo can be adjusted over a range of 40 240 You can also set the tempo by selecting J using numeric keys 0 9 to enter a tempo and pressing the ENTER key The tempo can also be set by the VALUE slider VALUE dial or A V keys The LED will blink in time with the specified tempo WA The knob setting is saved when you write each pro gram 29 Using controllers Arpeggiator Quick Start 30 WA The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the Reso setting Program P0 Play Arpeggio page or Resolution P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page amp If MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI is set to External MIDI or External mLAN the display will indicate j EXT The tempo will be synchronized to an external MIDI device and it will not be possible to adjust the tempo on the TRITON STUDIO Adjusting the length of the arpeggiated notes Rotate the ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob to adjust the length of the arpeggiated notes Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the duration of the notes and rotating it toward the right
9. 147 ices roubleshooting 1 _ Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound will be produced when you play PG p 11 42 66 Notes do not stop In Program P1 Edit Basic select the Program Basic page make sure that the Hold check box is unchecked PG p 7 L In Global P2 Controller make sure that Damper Polarity or Foot Switch Polarity is set correctly PG p 146 Can t input sound Are the appropriate sources connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks the S P DIF IN jack or the mLAN connector if the EXB mLAN option is installed p 102 _ If there is no sound in Sampling mode check that Input Level and BUS IFX Indiv Select are set correctly in the Sampling PO Recording Input Setup page p 102 _ If there is no sound in Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Disk modes check that Input Level and BUS IFX Indiv Select are set correctly in Global P0 Basic Setup Input Sampling page or in the P0 Sampling pages of Program Combination or Sequencer modes or in the Disk mode Play Audio CD page p 102 L If you are inputting sound to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks make sure that the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob is raised p 103 L If you are inputting sound to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks is the MIC LINE switch set appropriately p 102 _ Is an unsupported format being input from the S P DIF IN jack
10. Copy Arpeg giator to copy arpeggiator settings from another program or combination PG p 27 6 In the Scan Zone page specify the range in which the arpeggiator will operate PROGRAM P Edit Arpeggiator Scan Zone MLUALADALOLALELLOLLLOLLOLLLELLOLLLOLLELLLELLOLLLOLLELLLOLLOLLLOLLOLLLOLLILI tL Scan Zone Top Key Bottom key Top elocity Bottom Yelocity Bottom Key Top Key The arpeggiator will oper ate when you play keys within the specified range Keys outside of this range can be played in the normal manner and will not be affected by the arpeggiator on off For example if you set Pattern to P000 UP check Latch set Top Key to B3 and Bottom Key to C 1 playing a note B3 or lower will trigger the arpeg giator Since Latch is on the arpeggio will continue even after you release the keys You can use the C4 and higher keys to play conventionally along with the arpeggio sounded by the B3 and lower keys To change the arpeggio play keys in the range of B3 and below Bottom Velocity Top Velocity The arpeggiator will operate when you play notes with a velocity playing strength that is within the specified range Notes played with a velocity outside this range will be sounded nor mally without regard to the arpeggiator on off 6 If you wish to save the edited program settings to internal memory turn off memory protect in Global mode and wri
11. Disk Make Audio CD so that the disc will be finalized p 119 PG p 173 If you only want to finalize the disc select the page menu command Finalize Audio CD Disk Make Audio CD and press the OK button to finalize the disc PG p 173 C Are you using CD R media Since some CD players are unable to play CD RW media we recommend that you use CD R media _ Have you tried using a different type of media Some CD R RW media cannot be played by some CD players You may be able to play back success fully by using a different type brand of CD R RW media WAVE files Playback level of the WAVE file is too high Set WAVE File Play Level to Normal You should usually set WAVE file Play Level at Normal and set it to High 12 dB only if the S P DIF output is too low With the High 12 dB setting the output from AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO R and HEADPHONES willl be louder PG p 138 WAVE file playback level is louder softer than the RAM samples Adjust the WAVE File Play Level You should usually set WAVE File Play Level to Normal and use the High 12 dB setting only if the WAVE file playback volume is lower than the playback of the RAM samples You should also use the High 12 dB setting if the S P DIF output is not loud enough Can t preview C Is the WAVE file format supported Select a WAVE file of a supported format PG p 156 172 283
12. If the High MS Bank is ROM you can select preset multisamples High Multisample can be selected from a range of 000 424 VNL If High MS Bank is RAM you can select multisam ples that were sampled on the TRITON STUDIO or loaded in from media Select from 000 999 for High multisample If High MS Bank is Piano you can select one of the large preset piano multisamples Select from 000 003 for High Multisample WA If High MS Bank is set to ROM pressing the High Multisample popup button will display all internal ROM multisamples organized into 15 cate gories Use the tabs located at the left and right to select the desired category and select a multisample from within that category High Multisample and Low Multisample If you specify a High and Low multisample for an oscilla tor either the High or the Low multisample will sound depending on the velocity of the note i e the strength at which you play the keyboard This function is called velocity multisample switching 4 Specify different multisamples for High Multisam ple and Low Multisample 2 Specify a velocity value for Velocity M Sample SW Lo Hi Notes played on the keyboard at a velocity less than the value you specify will sound the Low multisample velocities at or above this velocity value will sound the High multisample For example if you set Velocity M Sample SW Lo Hi to 100 pl
13. OSC1 in Velocity M Sample SW Lo Hi to 32 and OSC2 to 096 The settings are shown as vertical lines in the velocity zone display In this example the multisamples will sound over four levels Velocity values 001 031 sounds only the OSC1 Low multisample sounds only the OSC1 High multisample sounds the OSC1 High multi sample and the OSC2 Low multisample sounds the OSC1 High multi sample and the OSC2 High multisample Velocity values 032 063 Velocity values 064 095 Velocity values 096 127 Controller Setup page For each program this tab lets you make settings for the SW1 and SW2 key and for the B mode of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 p 145 PG p 12 249 250 Pitch settings P2 Edit Pitch Here you can specify how the pitch of the multisample assigned to each oscillator will change Pitch EG and LFO settings allow the pitch to varied over time The OSC1 P Mod page is valid when Oscillator Mode is set to Sin gle or Drums OSC1 Pitch Mod page PROGRAM P2 Edit Pitch Pitch Pitch Slope JS xX 02 Ribbon OSC1 Pitch Mod All 5 gt Off 00 JS X 2 Intensity 00 00 AMS Off Intensity 08 00 LFO1 Intensity 00 00 AMS D After Touch JS Int 61 66 Intensity 00 25 LFOZIntensity 80 AMS Off J5 Y Int 00 00 Intensity 00 00 osci Oste k_P Mod Jl P Mod EG Pitch The JS X and JS X set
14. PCG Contents gt EE helget GAD A lecalion 0 tgnens os ster LSD Alineation 00 Rnt SiNtes NAS miT AEU lO j Rpt wee i The contents and settings of the dialog box will differ depending on the type of file that you are loading D In PCG Contents specify the data that you want to load If you want to load all data from the PCG file select All Since in this example we want to restore all settings to the factory set condition we will select All If you load PRELOAD PCG from the included floppy disk with All selected all data of the PCG file will be loaded as follows Programs e Bank I A file loaded into bank INT A Bank I B file loaded into bank INT B Bank I C file loaded into bank INT C Bank I D file loaded into bank INT D Bank I E file loaded into bank INT E Combinations e Bank I A file loaded into bank INT A e Bank I B file loaded into bank INT B e Bank I C file loaded into bank INT C e Bank I D file loaded into bank INT D Drum Kits e 000 015 I A B file loaded into bank I A B e 128 143 User file loaded into bank User Arpeggio Patterns e 000 199 I A B file loaded into bank I A B e 312 506 User file loaded into bank User Press the OK button to load the data amp Never remove the media while data is being loaded Loading individual banks from a PCG file In the dialog box for step of Loading data Restoring the factory settings it is als
15. Sample digital data rip directly from an audio CD You can also play back audio CDs Global mode Make settings that affect the entire TRITON STUDIO such as master tune and global MIDI channel Create user drum kits 144 kits user arpeggio patterns 507 patterns and user scales 16 one octave scales and 1 all note scale Create drum kits using the 417 internal drumsamples ROM You can also use drumsamples from an optional EXB PCM series board if installed or samples RAM that you created in Sampling mode Rename program and combination categories Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable switches Transmit data dumps of MIDI exclusive data Disk mode Data of each mode can be saved and loaded using the floppy disk drive the internal hard drive the CDRW 1 option or an external SCSI device Format the above types of media You can also manage data by copying it etc Korg AKAI AIFF and WAVE format sample data can be loaded Sample data can also be saved in Korg format or exported in AIFF or WAVE formats Songs that you created in Sequencer mode can be saved in SMF format SMF files can be loaded as Sequencer mode songs You can use the Data Filer function to save load MIDI exclusive data WAVE files can be edited arranged in the desired song order to create an audio CD Audio CDs can also be played About polyphony Tone generators and oscillators The oscillators
16. Song 53 Saving the song Remember to save the song you created W Begining on page 88 is a description of how you can perform further editing on the song you created here in Quick Start and how you can assign it to a cue list so we recommend that you save the song you cre ated here for further use amp On the TRITON STUDIO this data will be lost when the power is turned off Perform steps of Saving sample data p 41 2 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Save SEQ The Save Songs and Cue Lists Data dialog box will appear Save Songs and Cue Lists Data T NEWFILE 3 When the dialog box appears press the text edit but ton to access the text dialog box input a name for your song Assign a filename of SEQ_DM1 to the song you created in this Quick Start section and press the OK button 4 Press the OK button to save the data If you have assigned the name described above a file named SEQ _DM1 SNG will be created Saving data Types of data that can be saved On the TRITON STUDIO there are three ways to save data writing to internal memory saving on media floppy disk internal hard drive CD R RW hard disk and other removable media etc and MIDI data dump Writing to internal memory The following types of edited can be written into the inter nal memory e Program Programs 0 127 in banks INT A INT F
17. The arrow will indicate the currently playing step indicates the currently selected Step If you set Current Step while stopped the display will change e M Indicates the starting measure of that step e Meter Indicates the currently playing time signature This cannot be changed e The name of a cue list can be specified by the Rename Cue List page menu command e When you play the keyboard the program of the track selected by Track Select will sound If a different program is selected for each song the program specified for the currently playing song will sound What to do when playing back a cue list and the songs do not transition smoothly Depending on the effect settings a certain amount of time may be required for the effects to be switched If this occurs the playback will not be smoothly connected from song to song To ensure a smooth transition from song to song check FX for Step 01 Do not check FX for the remaining steps This way the effect settings will be made before playback begins and there will be no time lag when cue list playback is started or when switching from song to song Although it will not be possible to change effect types within the cue list you can use dynamic modulation or MIDI control changes such as Effect Control to control the effects within the cue list for example applying reverb more deeply on certain songs or ra
18. These renaming operations can be performed in the fol lowing pages Program PO 9 page menu command Write Progaram Combination PO 9 page menu command Write Combination Sequencer PO 2 4 7 page menu command Rename Song Sequencer P1 page menu command Rename Cue List Sequencer P5 Track Name Sequencer P6 Pattern Name Progaram Combination Song Cue List Track Pattern Sample Sampling PO 4 page menu command Rename Sample Global P5 page menu command Rename Drum Kit User arpeggio Global P6 page menu command Rename pattern Arpeggio Pattern Program cate Global P4 Program Cat gory Global P4 Combination Cat Drum Kit Combination category Multisample Sampling PO 4 page menu command Rename MS File Disk Save Save All Save Audio CD Track List Utility page menu command Rename mLAN Nick Global PO Nick Name if the EXB mLAN is Name installed Press the text edit button to access the text edit dialog box For an example of how to input a name refer to p 40 Text Cursor L x ped TETTAEAQHH VHHOOHHOHH _ Character Set Selects the type of character Character buttons Shift button Switches between uppercase and lowercase LILI LI LILI GIDE HE LILI Delete button Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Cancel button OK button If you are satisfied with the text that you input press the OK button If you wish to discard your input and e
19. command which saves program combination drum kit user arpeggio pattern and global setting data a Save SEQ command which saves only the sequencer song and cue list data and a Save Sam pling Data command which saves only the multisamples and samples PG p 167 Select the page menu com mand that is appropriate for the data you want to save to external media Saving data P R Basic functions WA When using Save All Save PCG amp SNG and Save PCG to save combinations you should also remember to save the programs used by each timbre and the drum kits used by the programs and user arpeggio patterns at the same time Similarly when saving programs you should also remember to save the drum kits and user arpeggio patterns used by the programs es If your programs or drum kits use multisamples and samples that were created in on TRITON STUDIO we recommend that you use Save All to save the data When you use Save PCG or Save Sampling Data to individually save a program or drum kit or a mul tisample or sample that you created we recommend that you save them under the same filename in the same directory When you use Load PCG to load a PCG file the identically named KSC file will also be loaded so that the correct multisamples samples will correspond automatically 61 62 Cautions when handling floppy disks When handling floppy disks please observ
20. e Program mode PROGRAM P8 Play Sampling ail z Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK a inputi Level 127_ BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Pan LOBB Send1 MFX1 G88 Send2 MFX2 900 Input2 Level 127_ BUSCIFX Indiv Select L R Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 0 Send2 MFX2 000 Sampling Setup a Source BUS L R P Recording Level dB 1 Use Save to to specify the location into which the data will be sampled RAM The sample will be written into sample memory RAM If you select RAM you can also specify the writing destination RAM bank In Sampling mode this is specified by Bank In other modes this is specified by the page menu command Select Bank amp Smpl No When you select Select Bank amp Smpl No the fol lowing dialog box will appear Select RAM Bank amp Sample No Bank gt GEG Auto 12dB On Sample No L 0090 R P 901 v Program gt 1 E100 InitialProg E100 MS gt aaa New MS aAA Orig Key C3 Specify the Bank in this dialog box Sample No specifies the writing destination sample number If Sample Mode is set to Stereo specify L and R If you check Program in the Convert to area the sample will automatically be converted to a program immediately after the sample has been written into RAM This is convenient when you want to hear the sampled sound immediately At the right use Program and
21. p 26 amp 1f CC 70 79 are assigned to REALTIME CONTROLS A mode or B mode the sound edited by knobs 1 4 can be saved by the Program Write operation Writing a program amp The edited content will be lost if you select another program or turn off the power before saving O If you want to save the modified sound select the page menu command Write Program and write the program p 56 It is best to write your own edited programs into an ini tial initialized program of bank INT E or EXB A EXB G You should also give a new name to the pro gram you are writing WA If you want to overwrite the program using the same program number press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the OK button Simple combination editing A combination is a set of multiple up to eight programs and allows you to create complex sounds that could not be produced by a single program Combination editing refers to the process of modifying the sound of a combination by changing the program selected for each timbre or by adjusting each timbre s key board range and velocity range or by modifying the con troller and effect settings You can edit a combination in Combination P1 Edit Pro gram Mixer P9 Edit Master FX but can also make set tings for Program Select Pan and Volume in Combination P0 Play as well An example of editing As an example here s how to do some simple editing
22. Connect the included power cable to the AC power supply inlet of the TRITON STUDIO and then con nect the other end of the cable to an AC outlet 2 Analog audio output connec tions Connect a set of amplified monitor speakers or your audio system to the TRITON STUDIO amp If you play back the TRITON STUDIO through your stereo audio system be aware that high volumes may damage your speakers Be careful not to raise the vol ume excessively Connecting the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 jacks to the INPUT jacks of your mixer or powered monitor system L MONO and R are the main outputs If you are out putting in stereo make your connections using the MAIN L MONO jack and the R jack If you are out putting in mono make your connection to the MAIN L MONO jack The INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 jacks are used to out put specific sounds independently For example you can use these to apply an external effect to the snare sound of a drum kit When you are sampling and want to hear the sounds played by the TRITON STUDIO s sequencer while you sample only the external audio source send the source to INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 If you want to monitor this sound you can connect INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks to your mixer and monitor the sound via your mixer For details on routing methods refer to p 140 Headphones O If you are using headphones connect them to the headphone jack of the T
23. DOM and lets you program and store 507 user arpeggio patterns With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preloaded user arpeggio patterns VNL An arpeggio pattern that you create can also be stored as a user arpeggio pattern p 134 Using the arpeggiator in Program mode 1 Press the PROG key to enter Program mode and select a program Selecting and playing a program t p 22 As you select various programs you will notice that the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED will light for some programs Linking the arpeggiator to program combinations p 32 When you press the keyboard the arpeggiator will start For other programs you can press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key the LED will light to turn on the arpeggiator Arpeggios will begin sounding when you play the keyboard 2 As described in the following sections Settings using controllers and Settings in the LCD screen move the controllers or modify the parameters to change the way in which the arpeggios are played Settings using controllers Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on off When the arpeggiator is turned on the LED will light and the selected arpeggio pattern will begin sounding when you play the keyboard Ny S O ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE VELOCITY 120 sus sus 40 240 RO The on off status is saved when you write each pro gram
24. Dual arpeggiator 137 Dynamic modulation 144 E Edit Buffer 58 Edit cell 8 17 Effect 1 124 139 EG 27 34 71 72 73 Event Edit 86 EXB DI 7 11 19 EXB mLAN 7 11 19 102 143 EXB MOSS 19 22 24 67 Load 66 EXB PCM 15 19 69 128 Load 65 EXB PCM sample memory RAM slot cover 5 Exclusive Group 129 EXIT key 4 EXL file 55 External sequencer 85 138 F Filter 1 26 34 68 71 Filter EG 72 Filter LFO Mod 72 Filter Mod 72 Keyboard Track 72 Floppy disk 6 59 62 Foot Pedal 28 125 Foot pedal 11 Foot Switch 28 125 Cue List Switch the Step 91 Manual punch in 84 Program Combination will change 125 Foot switch 11 Format 12 59 60 G Global 14 16 58 124 127 134 GM 2 22 121 127 GM GS XG 149 Grid 110 H Headphone 6 11 HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system 1 Index 38 106 111 112 INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 6 11 48 103 104 115 129 140 147 Insert Effect IFX 34 39 74 79 103 107 129 139 140 141 142 Internal hard drive iii 20 59 63 151 In Track Sampling 2 115 J Joystick 3 25 53 72 Lock function 26 Pitch bend 70 Jukebox 122 Jukebox list 122 K Key Zone 77 Keyboard amp Index 106 110 111 Keyboard crossfade 76 Keyboard input 18 Keyboard Track 72 73 Keyboard Arpeggiator 31 131 KMP 41 55 61 63 KSC 21 42 55 61 63 KSF 41 55 61 63 L L MONO R jacks 6 11 38 140 Layer 76 78 LCD screen 4 8 Contrast 7 145
25. Load PRELOAD SNG Load PRELOAD PCG too Load PRELOAD KSC too PCG Contents gt EE Select SNG Allocation C Append Clear Select KSC Allocation O Append Clear e Check Load PRELOAD PCG too If this is checked the PCG file will be loaded along with the SNG file when you execute the Load opera tion e Check Load PRELOAD KSC too If this is checked the KSC file will be loaded along with the SNG file when you execute the Load opera tion The Select SNG Allocation radio buttons specify how the song data will be loaded into internal memory For this example select Clear The Select KSC Allocation radio buttons specify how the sample data will be loaded into sample mem ory RAM For this example select Clear If you load with Select KSC Allocation set to Clear the sample data will be loaded from the beginning of the sample memory RAM area If you load with Select KSC Allocation set to Append the sample data will be loaded into the unused portion of the sample memory RAM amp If sample memory RAM already contains sample data that you do not wish to lose either select Append or save the sample data to a internal hard disk p 59 9 Press the OK button The data will be loaded in the order of PRE LOAD PCG PRELOAD SNG and PRELOAD KSC 2 Selecting and playing a dem onstration song in Sequencer mode 1 Press the SEQ key the LED
26. Loading data Types of data that can be loaded The types of data that can be loaded from media floppy disk etc are shown in the diagram below For details on each type of data refer to PG p 155 Loading data Restoring the factory settings When you want to use programs combinations samples or songs that you saved you will have to load them from media You will also load data when you want to restore all programs combinations and other settings to the fac tory set condition In this case you will load the PRE LOAD PCG file contained in the included floppy disk and on the internal hard drive Files that can be loaded m DOS files DOS directory z E 2 ke O 3 Ka Q fed 3 n Undefined DOS file ag aF All combinations Ef ant z 3 Q rt pn All user arpeggio Global settings 1 combination bank I A I E E A E G gt m Q 1 user arpeggio patterns pattern group A B E A E G User amp When loading programs combinations songs user drum kits or user arpeggio patterns you must make sure that the Global mode memory protect setting is unchecked p 57 The procedure for restoring the factory settings is described below Here we will explain how to load the PRELOAD PCG file from the included floppy disk A PCG file contains programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings amp When you load a PCG file the data in
27. MS to specify the program number and multisample number of the pro eram that will be created by the conversion Use Orig Key to specify the key that will play the sample at its original pitch Orig Key will increment by one after you sample so that the next sample you record will be assigned to the next higher note Press the OK button to finalize the settings WA Set the Auto 12 dB On parameter If you check Auto 12 dB On the sample playback level will automatically be increased by 12 dB after sampling The recording level and Auto 12 dB On In Sampling mode you can set this parameter in the PO Recording Preference page SAMPLING P Recording Create Zone Preference Position gt Right t Preference EEk i zone Range 12 Keys Original Key Position gt Bottom REC Sample Preference Auto Loop On __ Auto 12dB On Metronome Setup BUS Output Select L R Level Aid In Program Combination and Sequencer modes you can set this parameter using the Sampling page menu command Select Bank amp Smpl No p 104 DISK The sample will be written to the internal hard drive or a SCSI connected hard disk drive etc If you select DISK you can also select the writing des tination drive In all modes this is specified by the page menu com mand Select Directory Select Directory Name T TAKENOGG Take No 00 WAVES Drive s
28. Mode Stereo 116 3 Select the page menu command Select Directory and specify the destination to which the WAVE file will be written Select Directory Name T STUDIOGG A Take No 00 gt 1D3 Unformatted Use drive select and the Open and Up buttons to select the directory in which the WAVE file will be saved If you want to create a new directory access the Disk mode Utility page and execute the page menu com mand Create Directory Press the text edit button to access the text edit dialog box and input a filename up to six characters Leave Take No checked The number at the right of Take No will be input as the last two characters of the filename This number will increment each time you sample ensuring that the filename will not be the same even if you sample repeatedly After you have made the settings press the Done but ton to close the dialog box 4 Set Sample Time to the length that you want to sample Set this to a length slightly greater than the length of the song 6 Set the recording level Press the SAMPLING REC key amp It will take between several seconds to nearly a minute from the moment you press the SAMPLING REC key until the TRITON STUDIO enters standby mode i e until the SAMPLING REC key LED changes from blinking to lit This time is required in order to allocate sufficient space on the hard disk Press the SEQUENCER
29. O ther Saved files or sampled WAVE files have an incorrect date time Use the page menu command Set Date Time Disk Utility page to set the current date and time p 146 PG p 170 Specifications and options Specifications HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system Modes si Combination Program Sequencer Sampling Song Play Global Disk Tone generator HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system Polyphony 60 voices 60 oscillators Maximum 120 voices 120 oscillators in single mode p 15 30 voices 60 oscillators Maximum 60 voices 120 oscillators in double mode p 15 24 dB oct LPF with resonance 12 dB oct LPF HPF Alternate modulation function Filters Waveform memory 48 Mbytes PCM ROM 429 multisamples 417 drumsamples PCM ROM options allow expansion of up to 112 Mbytes EXB PCM series is supported 16 Mbytes user sampling RAM SIMM expandable to a maximum of 96 Mbytes 48 kHz 16 bit linear Maximum sample data memory capacity 96 Mbytes with SIMM expansion 4 000 samples 1 000 multisamples 128 indexes for each multisample Record playback rip CD DA audio CD Able to load AIFF WAVE AKAI S1000 3000 Korg format sample data can be loaded Sample data can be exported in AIFF or WAVE formats Effect section 5 insert effects stereo in out 2 master effects mono in stereo out 1 master EQ 3 band stereo all usable simultaneously 102 effect types available f
30. P00 Pop amp Balad 1 Std C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync gt Measure U00 R amp B Suffle1 Pattern User gt UGG R amp B Suffle1 Preset Pattern P00 P149 Track P Track 1 Drums RPPR playback Let s use the RPPR you created to perform in the Sequencer PO Play REC page 1 Select Sequencer P0 Play REC 2 Check the RPPR check box The RPPR function will be turned on Set the on off for each song SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J a90 Pb Manu S004 Hip Hop Rap iV gt Track 1 Drums gt 61 Organ Sank Proceam D easa D el E PiFunkin GDark JaziArco StriHipHo 3 Play the keyboard and patterns will begin playing according to the RPPR settings e Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of Beat or Measure will sync to the playback of the first pattern PG p 80 Sync e If you are playing the pattern in synchronization when Sync is Beat Measure or SEQ the pattern will start accurately if you play the note slightly earlier than the timing of the beat or measure Even if you play the note slightly later than the beat or measure but no later than a 32nd note it will be considered to have started at the beat or measure and the beginning of the pattern will be compressed so that the remainder of the playback will be correct M r you wish to trigger the RPPR function from an external MIDI device
31. START STOP key Resampling Manual In REC Sampling Setup make settings for the sample that will be recorded Save to RAM if you want to write the sample into sample memory RAM Save to DISK if you want to write the sample to hard disk Sample Mode Stereo Sample Time maximum Adjust the recording level Press the SAMPLING REC key When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the audio CD the level meter will indicate the volume that will be sampled If the display indi cates ADC OVERLOAD adjust the Volume in the P5 Audio CD Ripping page amp If you are using an external SCSI drive you can also make adjustments using the volume control of the drive or the rear panel LEVEL knob If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE con trollers to lower the Recording Level slider below 0 0 until an appropriate level is reached When you finish making adjustments press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback of the audio CD Press the LOCATE key to return the location to the beginning of the track Press the SAMPLING REC key once again 9 Execute sampling Press the SAMPLING REC key Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback of the audio CD track At a point slightly earlier than where you want to sam ple press the SAMPLING START STOP key to begin sampling At the point where you want to stop sampling pres
32. Selecting combinations from a MIDI device MIDI program change messages can be transmitted from an external MIDI device and received by TRITON STU DIO to select combinations PG p 260 Using controllers to modify the sound The TRITON STUDIO provides various controllers a joystick the ribbon controller the SW1 and SW2 switches and the REALTIME CONTROL 1 2 3 4 knobs that let you modify the tone pitch volume or effects in realtime while you play Each time you select a program or combination try out these controllers to hear how they affect the sound Tonal changes etc produced by these controllers can be recorded on the internal sequencer or on an exter nal MIDI sequencer Joystick JS X Move the joystick toward the right to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend up Move the joystick toward the left to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the pitch bend down Move the joystick away from yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control the oscillator LFO vibrato Move the joystick toward yourself to apply an effect Normally this is used to control filter LFO wah JS X JS Y JSC Y note You can use the Lock function of SW1 or SW2 keys to hold the effect in the current position of the joy stick For the procedure refer to The lock function on the following page WA You can use the joystic
33. The hard disk lets you record up to 80 minutes as a sin gle sample file in either mono or stereo monaural approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 879 Mbytes This will create a WAVE file If a sample WAVE file that was sampled to the hard disk is loaded into sample memory RAM it can be used as a tone generator waveform A sample WAVE file of up to 16 Mbytes mono or 32 Mbytes stereo if sample memory has been expanded to 32 Mbytes or greater can be loaded into sample memory RAM WAVE files can also be written to the CDRW 1 option or toa CD R RW connected to the SCSI connector to create an audio CD e A maximum of 1 000 multisamples and 4 000 samples can be created e In Disk mode you can load multisample sample data from various types of media e Korg format or Akai S1000 3000 samples mapped multisamples only format sample data and AIFF or WAVE format sample data can be loaded Once data has been loaded into the TRITON STUDIO it will all be treated as Korg format sample data Sample data created on the TRITON STUDIO can be exported output as an AIFF or WAVE format sample file e The external audio source that you are sampling can be processed by the five insertion effect to apply effects such as a compressor or EQ The LFO frequency or delay time of the effect can be specified as a BPM value which is highly effective when sampling phrase loops etc In Sampling mode only the insert effects can be u
34. Top Velocity of 63 and a Bottom Velocity of 1 You can also enter these values by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard COMBINATION P4 Edit Zone Ctr Yel Zone EEk e a TNC TTT Dak EXB A G8 Initial CombE AGG 127 127 i Top Slope 666 i BBG i Velocity Zone Slope Here you can specify the range of values over which the original volume will be reached starting from the top velocity and bottom velocity In the case of the above example you could set the veloc ity zones of the two timbres so that they partially overlap and set Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually instead of changing suddenly between velocity values of 63 and 64 Control page Controller settings For each combination you can specify the functions of the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 and the SW1 and SW2 p 145 PG p 43 249 250 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arp Indicates settings for the arpeggiator p 132 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert FX Indicates the insert effects and allows you to adjust their settings Specifies the routing for each timbre i e how it is sent to the insert effect master effects and individual outputs p 141 Master Effect settings P9 Edit Master FX Indicates the naster effects and allows you to adjust their settings Here you can also make master EQ settings p 142 79
35. Top Yelocity Top Velocity Bottom velocity Bottom Velocity I r S A B Zone O ther settings for the arpeggiator You can also set Gate Velocity Swing and Scan Zone These parameters are set in Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup Page Combination P7 Edit Arp Arpeggiator A B page p 131 Linking the arpeggiator to program combinations You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings written in a program or combination will also be selected when you switch programs or combinations or whether the arpeggiator status will not change when you switch pro grams or combinations With the factory settings the former is selected Use the latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern running and change only the program sound This setting is made in Auto Arpeggiator Global PO Basic Setup Basic page Creating a user arpeggio pattern Arpeggio patterns that you create can be written to U000 I A B U506 User These can be created in Global P6 User Arpeggio p 134 Playing with the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function TRITON STUDIO s Sequencer mode provides an RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function Using the RPPR function each note of the keyboard can be assigned to a preset pattern or user pattern and a track that will play the assigned pattern You can then playback the assigned pattern in realtime and record it i
36. amp A combination does not contain the actual program data for each timbre but simply remembers the num ber of the program used by each timbre If you edit a program that is used by a combination or exchange it with a different program number the sound of the combination will also change Using a page menu command to write 1 Select the page menu command Write Program or Write Combination The Write Program Write Combination dialog box will appear WA You can also access the same dialog box by holding down the ENTER key and pressing the 0 key The screen shown is for Program mode Write Program Aggo Noisy Stabber Category gt 16 FastSynth To Program gt E 2 Check the program combination name displayed in the upper line the writing source 3 If you wish to change the name of the program com bination press the text edit button The text dialog box will appear Input the name of the program combination 1 gt Assigning a name Rename After you have input the name press the OK button to return to the Write Program Write Combination dialog box 4 In Category specify the category of the program combination In the case of a program the category you specify here will be used when you select a program by category in Program P0 Play Category Category Program Select Program categories can also be used when selecting programs in Combination P0
37. amp Data that you edit in Sequencer Song Play or Sam pling cannot be saved in internal memory by the Write operation Saving to various types of media The following data can be saved to various types of media e PCG file Programs combinations global settings user drum kits user arpeggio patterns The data that was checked in the check boxes of the Save dialog box will be saved e SNG file Song and cue list data e KSC KMP KSF files Lists of sample and multisamples KSC file multi samples KMP file samples KSF file e MID file Saves a Sequencer mode song in Standard MIDI File SMF format e EXL file System exclusive data from an external device that was saved on the TRITON STUDIO This allows the TRI TON STUDIO to be used as a data filer e JKB file Jukebox lists are saved in Song Play mode 1 p 122 All other types of file are saved in Disk mode e WAV and AIF files A sample you recorded can be exported written as a WAVE file or AIFF file e KCD file Audio track list MIDI data dump The following types of data can be transmitted as a MIDI data dump and saved on an external data filer or other device Saving data d A Basic functions e Programs combinations global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns e Songs cue lists 95 56 About preloaded data and preset data Preloaded data refers to the data that is loaded in the TRITON STU
38. of each step will be converted into playback data and will be reproduced but if the MIDI channel settings from song to song do not match it may not be possi ble to convert the playback state of the cue list into a song Using a foot switch to switch the Step You can use a foot switch to switch the Step If you set Repeat to FS a foot switch connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack will control the timing at which the song stops repeating Set Foot Switch Assign Global P2 Controller page to Cue Repeat Control 91 Basic functions Producing songs 92 Converting a song Although it is not possible to record additional material onto tracks in a cue list you can convert a cue list to a song and then record solos etc on vacant tracks You will also need to convert a cue list to a song if you wish to save it on a floppy disk etc as SMF data 4 Select the page menu command Convert to Song A dialog box will appear 2 In To Song specify the destination song number for the converted data The cue list name will automatically be assigned as the song name of the converted data For details and cau tions regarding Convert to Song refer to PG p 61 If you select a new song as the conversion destination it is not necessary to specify Set Length in the dialog box that appears The number of measures in the con verted song will be used Press the OK button and th
39. to select the scale for the entire currently selected song 126 Drum kit settings This section explains how to edit a drum kit amp When you play the keyboard in Global mode the TRITON STUDIO will sound as in the previous mode in which you were previously Be aware that if you moved from Sampling mode to Global mode in a state where the sample memory RAM contained no data such as immediately after the power is turned on playing the keyboard will not produce sound amp When you move from Sequencer to Global mode playing the keyboard will sound the program or arpeggiator that corresponds to the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 amp The settings that you edit in Global mode are pre served as long as the power remains on but will be lost if not written to memory before the power is turned off The data handled in Global mode can be classified into three types user drum kit settings Global P5 user arpeggio pattern settings Global P6 and all other global settings Global PO P4 Each of these three types of data can be written into the memory area This data can also be saved to various types of media in Disk mode p 58 59 B Global mode does not provide a Compare function that lets you make before and after comparisons of your editing Before editing user drum kits or user arpeggio patterns you may wish to use Copy Drum Kit or Copy Arpeggio Pattern to copy the user drum kit or use
40. 147 Level Amp Level 34 AUDIO INPUT 6 102 Drum Kit 128 Multisample 69 OSC Balance 34 Recording level 105 WAVE file 116 152 LFO 70 72 74 144 Load EXB MOSS series 66 EXB PCM series 65 Jukebox List 122 Restoring the factory settings 63 Template Son 49 Types of data 63 LOCATE _ 5 83 146 Lock function 26 Loop Sample 38 42 43 110 Track Play Loop Sequencer 50 Loop All Track 85 Low Pass amp High Pass 71 Low pass filter 26 71 Low Pass Resonance 71 LPF CUTOFF 26 M Manual punch in 84 Master Effect MFX 74 79 Master EQ MEQ 141 142 Media 55 59 60 Memory protect 57 MENU key 4 16 Metronome 48 51 84 MIC LINE switch 6 37 42 46 102 MID 55 120 MIDI 7 12 62 85 98 120 151 MIDI Channel 67 77 82 MIDI clock 138 MIDI filter 78 Minus one play 123 mLAN 7 Mode 3 13 16 Monitor 6 11 48 82 107 115 150 Monophonic 68 77 Multi multitrack recording 85 Multisample 1 38 40 41 68 101 106 112 127 Mute 82 121 N Note Number 27 0 OK button 9 Open Sampling System 2 Option 12 154 Oscillator 15 68 Oscillator Mode 15 68 69 Overdub 84 Overwrite 83 p Page 8 16 Page jump menu 9 16 Page menu button 9 Page menu command 9 Pan AUDIO INPUT 143 Combination 36 76 Program 71 73 74 140 Sampling 37 Sequencer 82 Parameter 17 Pattern Arpeggio pattern 30 32 Pattern Sequencer 81 83 86 90 92 112 PCG 21 55 61 63 Performance Edit 34 Pin 8 P
41. 24 Selecting aA COM DINAH ON ense a a 24 Using controllers to modify the sound 06 25 FOV SUCK assis erecta E 25 RAD DOMACOMTLO WER merin intent O ede 25 DVN TEON AA T 25 REALTIME CONTROLS 1 2 3 4 eeaeee 26 VV ATU SGC enea R EEEN 27 GV DORIC na ehh ema anceerenerates 27 Foot pedals OW NEN aneminin enina E N 28 ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob GATE knob VELOCITY KNOb sessennnnnesnnneneesssseeeessssnssseeesssso 28 Using the arpeggiator while you play 006 29 Using the arpeggiator in Program mode 29 Settings using controllers e sesessesesessesesessesese 29 Settingsin the LED Screen rnn 30 Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode 31 Settings in the LCD Screen cece ec eeeee sete 31 Playing with the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording fUNCtION ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 33 Simple program Cditing cccseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 Perlormance E diksina Rach aaee tire sae 34 Realtime contiol Ser nN 34 Simple combination editing scsesesseseeeeeens 35 An example OF editing soicdnenannoa e 35 Sampling recording a sample 37 Sampling a vocal from a mic and playing it as a oneshot samplesirrreriene ERI 37 Applying an insert effect to the audio input and Sampling he result iioc n 39 Assigning a name to the sample or multisample 40 Saving sample dala vin ianstmiieiaranuiens 41 Converting a multisample into a program
42. 41 Sampling and looping a drum phrase 0 42 Resampling an arpeggiated phrase in Program RLO C PE EE A 45 Sample an arpeggiated drum phrase together with an externally input guitar cece 46 PFOCUCING a SONJ v sosro uiaei 49 Creatine Me DasiG SONG arae a 49 Naming the song and tracks sesesesseeseerseserrersesee 53 DAVIN 2G SONS soanar N anon unans 54 vi Basic functions sscese008s 55 SAVING dalasa ai a 55 Types of data that can be saved ou eee 55 Writing to internal MEMOTY cece eee eee 56 Writing a program or combination 00 56 Writing global settings user drum kits and user ALPES S10 PAtlerNS ssn cssacssctussieaiselssareavesteddoitaceetivaies 58 DAV INS OM medido rea E 59 Types of media that can be used 59 Formatting me did secessione n 60 How LO SAV CICA CA vets estcnteiochipe wissen ine nio 60 MID datr duni Dice tices a TA 62 Loading data and restoring the factory settings 63 Loading dala eoreea a tn tree rae enn re srererrr rrr 63 Types of data that can be loaded ee 63 Loading data Restoring the factory settings 63 Loading PCG files and SNG files from the floppy disks included with the EXB PCM series and EXB MO SS ODUOUS sideri 65 Program SCUINGS iisceciacccdumvedeluswuntaectwanesemebe 67 How a program is OrganiZed cee eeeeeeees 67 Basicproeram editing cxicscssasentasonreriaienes 67 Oscillator settings P1 Edit Basic 68
43. EL es AUDIO INPUT ll amp If you are using a guitar with passive pickups ie without an internal pre amp the mismatch of impedance levels will make it difficult to sample at an appropriate level You should route the signal from the guitar through a pre amp or effect unit 2 Press the Sampling tab to access the Sampling page PROGRAM P Play e Input p Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK 3 Input1 i Level 127 BUS 1FX Indiv Select gt E Pan LOGA Sendi MFX1 BAG Send2 MFX2 00A Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select off Pan R127 Send 1 MFX1 GGG Send2 MFX2 606 Sampling Setup Source BUS L R P recording Level d6 Save to P RAM_Mode Stereo Sample Time A min 16 923 sec 3 Set the parameters so that the signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack will be sent to the L channel Make the following settings Input Analog Input 1 Level 127 Pan as desired BUS Select L R 3 Set the recording level Recording Level dB Play your guitar at the volume that you will be recording If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload turn the rear panel LEVEL knob toward MIN to adjust the level appropriately WA The best audio quality will be obtained at the highest possible level that does not cause an overload i e a level that is slightly below the point where ADC OVERLOAD is displayed 2 Press the
44. Keyboar Kepoin Status N E O Dee Dave DE XT D INT Dy ivr Per Pe eer S a Use Program s Scale i ssrisssss N P Sin P Synchronization with external devices In Song Play mode the TRITON STUDIO will be the mas ter the controlling device regardless of the MIDI Clock setting Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock PG p 266 Insert effects Master effects The TRITON STUDIO s effects can be used in the same way as in Sequencer mode p 141 PG p 131 Controller Setup P2 Arpeggiator P7 Track 4 Setup parameters Musical data Track 5 Setup parameters Musical data Track 6 Setup parameters Musical data Track 7 Setup parameters Musical data Insert Effect Master Effect ividual Track 8 Setup parameters Musical data Individual Outputs Track 16 Setup parameters Musical data 120 l AUDIO OUTPUT Insert Effect 1 5 P8 MasterEQ P9 L MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 Playing SMF data Direct playback from external media such as a floppy disk amp When you wish to playback SMF data that is compat ible with the GM GS XG standards set Bank Map Global PO Basic Setup System Preference page to GM 2 Press the S PLAY key to enter Song Play mode 2 Press the EXIT key to display the P0 Prog Mix page 3 Make sure that the media containing the SMF data can be detected If you want to play back d
45. L R Trigger Sampling START SW Metronome Precount Off J 126 Resample gt Manual fecording Level dB Seedsin i O 4 Set Input to Analog In the Input1 area set BUS to L R specifying the bus to which the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack will be input Make sure that the Input level Level is 127 and the Pan is L000 amp Be aware that when BUS is changed from Off to L R or IFX1 5 the volume level to the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks or to the headphones may rise abruptly 2 Set the recording level Recording Level dB 1 Speak into the mic at the volume that you will use for recording If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload turn the rear panel LEVEL knob toward MIN to adjust the level appropriately WA The best audio quality will be obtained at the highest possible level that does not cause an overload i e a level that is slightly below the point where ADC OVERLOAD is displayed 2 Press the SAMPLING REC key Speak into the mic at the volume that you will use for recording SAMPLING P Recording Input P Analog SAMPLING Input 1 Level Tee BUSCIFX Indiv Select L R Pan L ga Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 ve BUS Setup Tita gest recording Level CdBI Trigger ae Sampling START SW Metronome Precount gt Off J 126 rence gists The level meter
46. Pitch settings P2 Edit Pite i avescensscs airs nuk 70 Filter settings F3 Edit Filter occ eee 71 Amplifier settings P4 Edit Amp c eee 72 LFO settings P5 Edit Common LFO 74 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arpeggiator 74 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert Effect 74 Master Effect settings P9 Edit Master Effect 74 More about Alternate Modulation cee 74 Combination SettingS sssscsesseeeeesseereeeeeess 75 How a combination is organized ccs 75 Basic combination editing erisera 75 Timbre 1 8 program pan and volume Pie Edit Program Mixers jcss tei ilvetessesarsamarcenenes 76 Settings for status MIDI channel and pitch parameters P2 Edit Trk Param eee 77 MIDI filter settings P3 Edit MIDI Filter 78 Layer split and velocity switch settings Controller settings P4 Edit Zone Ctrl 78 Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arp c 79 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert FX 79 Master Effect settings P9 Edit Master FX 79 Producing SONGS cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeenenees 80 Features of the sequencer ou cece eee cece ete eeeees 80 The structure of Sequencer mode n se 81 COMO SEa E EE A ENAN 81 Pattern Smas aR 81 Cue ESTen EN NTT 81 Preparations for recording seesesessseesesererersrerseses 82 Recording mMmethodSriseaan a 83 Realtime recording on a track ssssessesesessesesesese 83
47. Please connect an instrument or digital audio device that is compatible with CP 1201 or S P DIF L Is the correct sampling frequency being input from the S P DIF IN jack Sampling frequencies of 48 kHz and 96 kHz can be input If you input an unsupported sampling fre quency noise will occur or a message of S P DIF Clock Error will be displayed Set S P DIF Sample Rate to match the sampling frequency that is being input either 48 kHz or 96 kHz The default setting for S P DIF Sample Rate is 96 kHz Normal PG p 138 amp if System Clock is set to S P DIF and S P DIF Sample Rate is set to 48 kHz and you want to change the sampling frequency that is being input to the S P DIF IN jack from 96 kHz to 48 kHz or from 48 kHz to 96 kHz you must make sure that the TRITON STUDIO is not accessing data when you make the change Also do not touch the TRI TON STUDIO at this time In particular you must not change the sampling frequency being input to the S P DIF IN jack when data access is occurring e g load save read write or sampling opera tions involving the internal hard disk floppy disk CD R RW external SCSI media sample memory or internal memory 148 Digital audio input is sometimes not heard for two or three seconds When you change the sampling frequency in S P DIF Sample Rate e g from 48 kHz to 96 kHz two or three seconds will be required in order to lock to the new
48. RPPR does not start Is the Sequencer PO Play REC RPPR setting checked p 33 93 Are Assign Pattern Select and Track set correctly p 92 PG p 79 CI If the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI parameter set to Internal PG p 143 In Song Play mode a GM GS XG compatible SMF is not played correctly C Execute GM Initialize to initialize the settings PG p 124 Is Bank Map set to GM 2 PG p 137 Is Status set to INT PG p 126 Sampling Can t sample Is sample memory RAM installed 1 p 19 If you are sampling to external SCSI storage media have you selected a hard disk PG p 5 90 Are the audio input settings correct Refer to Audio input and output Can t input sound p 148 Is there free space in memory PG p 99 175 If you are sampling to sample memory RAM select a different memory bank PG p 6 37 57 90 149 ices roubleshooting If you are sampling to hard disk select a different hard disk PG p 7 37 57 96 Delete unneeded samples PG p 92 Save samples you want to keep and then delete them PG p 167 92 L Is the Trigger setting correct PG p 4 37 56 97 _ In Sampling mode if you are resampling with Resample set to Auto has the sample to be resampled been assigned to the keyboard and selected for Key p 107 PG p 98 LI Is the Source
49. Range Start 0026697 Front amp End Front C End End 0108983 Save to No L B CR a003 O Overwrite Select the Front amp End radio button In this example we will not change the settings of the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes so press the OK button to execute When you execute the oper ation the truncated samples 0002 LOOP1 140B0002 L and 0003 LOOP1 140B0002 R will be automatically assigned to Index 1 WA Please refer to A note on saving samples p 111 for a cautionary note regarding the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes Resampling an arpeggiated phrase in Program mode You can play a program or combination using the arpeg giator if desired and resample your performance as audio data sound As an example this section explains how to sample an arpeggiated phrase in Program mode Sampling can be performed in the same way in Combination or Sequencer modes as well WA The procedure here assumes that the TRITON STU DIO is in the default state immediately after turning on the power 1 Select the program that you want to res ample Press the PROG key to enter Program mode and select program INT A028 Rezbo PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit MERA Cat Bank INT A potas P3028 Rezbo iSW1 SW1 Mod CC 88 1FX1001 St Amp Simulation 2knob1B Attack iSW2 Ribbon Lock IFX2 G22 St Env Flanger Knob2B KMod2 HIFK 818 Multitap Cho Delay
50. The parameter value of the edit cell can be modified using the VALUE controllers p 17 or by using a popup but ton in the LCD screen For parameters that accept a note number or a velocity value you can also hold down the ENTER key and play a note on the keyboard to enter the note number or velocity value c Popup button 1 P When this button is pressed a popup menu will appear showing the parameter values that are available for selec tion To input the parameter value press the desired value in the popup menu When a popup menu is displayed operating a VALUE controller p 17 will close the popup menu If the popup menu is unlocked Pin it will close if you touch a location outside the popup menu Popup menu Pin Scroll bar Pin This switches the popup menu display between locked and unlocked When locked the pin will be shown closed and the popup menu will remain displayed even after you press a parameter value When unlocked the pin will be shown opened and the popup menu will close immediately when you press a parameter value Scroll bar Use this when you wish to see parameter values that extend beyond what can be displayed in the screen at one time Press here to scroll to left or right Press here to scroll to the corresponding location Press here and slide to left or right to scroll to the desired location d Popup button 2 Dl When you press this button a tabbed popup m
51. You can also sample while applying an insert effect to the samples assigned to a multisample Insert Effect 1 5 Sule Recording AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R i mLAN AUDIO IN 1 2 CD sort Efect 1 5 Resampling The external input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN or mLAN if the EXB mLAN option is installed jacks is also valid in modes other than Sampling mode In Pro gram Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes you can use the insert effects master effects and master EQ Settings for external signal input via the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN and mLAN if the EXB mLAN option is installed can be made in Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK Global P0 0 3a In these modes the external input sound from each jack can be processed by the TRITON STUDIO s effects and sampled or the TRITON STUDIO can be used as a 6 in 6 out effect processor The TRITON STUDIO can also be used as a vocoder effect 093 Vocoder that uses external mic input to control internal sounds Send Return Oscillator J Filter Amplifier J Insert Effect 1 5 mane Master EQ J Pare L MONO R AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R mLAN AUDIO IN 1 2 amp When effects are applied to the external input sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN and mLAN if the EXB mLAN option is installed jacks certain effect types or parameter settings may cause oscilla tion to occur If this occurs adjust the input level
52. a beep will sound when you press an object in the LCD screen Uncheck this if you do not want a beep to be sounded Using the TRITON STUDIO asa data filer MIDI exclusive data transmitted from an external device can be received by the TRITON STUDIO and saved ona floppy disk or other media the Data Filer function This is done using the Disk mode Save page Save Exclusive page menu command PG p 168 Setting the calendar function Here s how to set the date and time for the TRITON Stu dio s internal calendar The date and time are recorded when you save data Use the page menu command Set Date Time Disk Utility page to make these settings 38 You will need make these settings after you purchase the TRITON Studio and after you replace the calen dar backup battery Press the DISK key to enter Disk mode 2 Press the Utility tab 3 Select the page menu command Set Date Time The following dialog box will appear Set Date Time Year 2602 Month 2 Day H6 Hour 12 Minute oa Second Ba 4 Use the VALUE controllers to set Year Month Day Hour Minute and Second to the correct year month day hour minute and second 5 Press the OK button amp If the calendar backup battery runs low a message of Battery voltage for calendar IC will appear in the LCD screen If the calendar backup battery runs down completely the cale
53. and as many as 999 measures per song Up to 20 cue lists can be created A cue list is an arrangement of up to 99 songs that will be played as a chain You can specify the number of times that each song will repeat A cue list can also be converted into a single song The arpeggiator function can be used during playback or recording The RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function can be used during playback or recording Sixteen different template songs are built in and contain program and effect settings suitable for various musical styles Up to sixteen original templates that you create can be saved as user template songs Five stereo insert effects two master effects and a stereo master EQ can be used for each song Timing resolution is a maximum of 1 192 Sixteen tracks are provided for musical data and a master track contains time signature and tempo data that controls the playback A track play loop function lets you loop specified measures independently for each track 150 preset patterns ideal for drum tracks are built in In addition you can create up to 100 user patterns for each song These patterns can be used as musical data within a song or can be played by the RPPR function Various methods of recording are supported including realtime recording in which your performance on the keyboard and controllers including MIDI control events is recorded just as you play and step recording in which the timing l
54. ate T ie a T Sji ane nF n Standare Fretless Pro Tsunami repress H A H yi E 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the preset pattern that you copied Play the key board while you listen to the drum pattern 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop 2 Repeatedly playing specific measures of a track Track Play Loop Here s how to use Track Play Loop to repeatedly play back a drum phrase 1 Press the PlyLoop tab to access the P0 Play REC PlayLoop T01 08 page SEQUENCER P Play REC PlayLoop 161 68 EEk A 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 108 P Manu 15000 Acid Jazz P Tracka1 Drums LLL I Bas dice Kit 2 2 4 Reso gt Hi g RPPR Drums iBass Keyboar iGuitar P Strings Organ SlowSynt LeadSun 3 Track Play Loop EEE ee 2 Check track 1 Track Play Loop leave Loop Start Measure as it is and set Loop End Measure to 008 3 When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key the drum phrase will be played back repeatedly When the playback has repeated for the number of measures in the song as specified by Length the power on default is 64 measures it will stop automati cally i By using Play Intro you can begin the loop after adding an introduction amp PG p 55 Track Play Loop will continue repeating for the num ber of measures specified by Length If you want to limit the number of repetitions or place other perfor mance da
55. fe If you want to adjust the loop point or other settings of the sample edit these parameters in Sampling mode p 43 Sample an arpeggiated drum phrase together with an exter nally input guitar Here s how you can resample an arpeggiated perfor mance together with an external audio input source In this example we will explain how a guitar connected to the AUDIO INPUT jack can be played along to a drum pattern played by the TRITON STUDIO and how both can be sampled together WA Sampling can be performed in a similar way in Com bination and Sequencer modes as well as in Program mode WA The procedure given here assumes that you are start ing from the default state immediately after power on 1 Select the program that you want to sam ple Press the PROG key to enter Program mode and select the INT B020 Processed Kit program 2 Turn on the arpeggiator ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED is lit and play the keyboard to make sure that a drum phrase is sounded Press the Arpeggio tab and make sure that Latch is checked Also adjust the arpeggiator tempo J as desired 3 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn off the arpeggiator 2 Connect your guitar and make input set tings M Connect your guitar to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob to approximately the center position Na MAX MIN
56. key 153 Troubleshooting Specifications ices amp options User interface TouchView graphical user interface 320 x 240 pixel LCD display VOLUME slider Mode keys COMBI PROG SEQ SAMPLING S PLAY GLOBAL DISK VALUE slider VALUE dial A 7 keys numeric keys 0 9 4 10 s HOLD Value controllers ENTER MENU key EXIT key COMPARE key BANK keys INT A INT B INT C INT D INT E INT F INT G EXB A EXB B EXB C EXB D EXB E EXB F EXB G SEQUENCER keys PAUSE REW FF LOCATE REC WRITE START STOP SAMPLING keys REC START STOP Audio outputs AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R Output impedance 1 1 kQ L MONO is 550 Q for mono AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 Maximum output level 13 5 dBu Load impedance 100 kQ or greater AUDIO OUTPUT HEADPHONE Output impedance 33 9 Maximum output level 25 mW Load impedance 33 Q S P DIF Connector optical Format 24 bit S P DIF IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 Sample rate 48 kHz 96 kHz selectable Audio inputs AUDIO INPUT 1 2 Input impedance 10 kQ LEVEL MIC LINE switch LEVEL knob Nominal level LINE 4 dBu LEVEL knob min 30 dBu LEVEL knob max MIC 17 dBu LEVEL knob min 52 dBu LEVEL knob max Maximum level LINE 14 dBu LEVEL knob min 20 dBu LEVEL knob max MIC 7 dBu LEVEL
57. key is pressed and Momentary when the function will be on only while you continue holding the SW1 or SW2 key These settings are made by Panel Switch Assign in the fol lowing pages An example of settings in a program PROGRAM P1 Edit Basi Panel Switch Assign Swit gt Sw Mod CC 8 gt Toggle gt Toggle Realtime Control Knobs B Assign Knob 1 B P FA Attack gt Knob Mod 2 gt Knob Mod 3 gt Knob Mod 4 CC 73 CC 19 CC 28 CC 21 Knob 2 B Knob 3 B Knob 4 B k Basic Jl Basic Jl Zone Il RA When you write a program or combination the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 keys is memorized ZS You can use these keys as alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation sources and control pro gram parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select SW1 Mod CC 80 and SW2 Mod CC 81 For an example in which the SW1 key is specified as an effect dynamic modulation source for a program and used to control an effect refer to p 144 EA if you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them p 56 However the settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 You can specify the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 PG p 250 The B mode functions can be specified independently for each program each combination and each song These functio
58. press 10 s HOLD to erase the display Using a connected switch to select programs An optional on off type switch such as the Korg PS 1 can be connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack and assigned a program select function p 125 Selecting programs from a MIDI device MIDI program change messages can be transmitted from an external MIDI device and received by TRITON STU DIO to select programs PG p 260 23 Quick Start Playing programs 24 Selecting and playing a combination In Combination mode you can select and play a combina tion from banks INT A EXB G Try selecting various combinations and hear how they sound Selecting a combination Press the COMBI key the LED will light You will enter Combination mode Make sure that the upper line of the LCD screen indicates COMBINA TION PO Play If this is not selected press the EXIT key Category COMBINATION P Play Program Select opup button Tat Paine Bank INT A J B64 er m0000 Stereo Piano CBAC Grand Fiano Popup button l a i 4 E Lesesseeeeasereaaes re ce dese Category gt ia ira FastSurpiF astSungelF Bank Program i IHT IHT IHT IHT IHT IHT IHT IHT D ceo Deena gt eee gt Agee D Radel gt aaco D Agee D aage iC Grand jJazz BruistandarciNoisy StiMoisy StiMoisy StiMoisy StiNoisy Sti Hectic pee hcg tere Aa eee Status anaana oan nnu i OG
59. recording will begin when you press the SAMPLING START key or Note On so that recording will begin when you play the keyboard p 43 45 4 Settings for the sample that will be recorded REC Sample Setup 1 Press the Recording tab to access the PO Recording Recording page SAMPLING P Recording Recording Aa Save to gt Bank gt Rami Sample Time A min 21 646 sec Sample Mode gt L Mono king Setup M rence M Status 2 Set Save to to RAM The sample you record will be written into sample memory RAM For details on the DISK setting refer to p 105 3 Set Sampling Mode to L Mono With this setting the internal L channel will be sam pled in mono 5 Create a multisample and indexes In the upper left of the P0 Recording Recording page make sure that 000 is selected for MS multi sample SAMPLING P Recording Ms gt GGG NewMS___ aa Recording aa Index 001 661 pz Save to P RAM Bank P Sample Time min 21 846 sec ing Setup M rence M Status WA When you want to create a new multisample press the MS Multisample Select popup button press a Multisample No or use the numeric keys to input a number for which there is no name in the list and then press the ENTER key p 106 2 Set OrigKey Original Key and TopKey to C2 When you play the key designated by OrigKey the sample will sound at the same
60. will lengthen the duration of the notes At the center position 12 o clock the note length will be as speci fied by the program parameter Gate Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page RA The knob setting is saved when you write each pro gram RA Itis effective to control this function in conjunction with the REALTIME CONTROLS A mode knob 4 EG RELEASE Adjusting the strength of the arpeggio notes O Rotate the ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob to adjust the strength of the arpeggio notes Rotating the knob toward the left will make the notes softer and rotating the knob toward the right will make the notes stronger At the center position 12 o clock the velocity will be as specified by the pro gram parameter Velocity Program P7 Edit Arpeg giator Arpeg Setup page WA The knob setting is saved when you write each pro gram RA Itis effective to control this function in conjunction with the REALTIME CONTROLS A mode knobs 1 LPF CUTOFF 2 RESONANCE HPF and 3 EG INTENSITY Settings in the LCD screen In Program P0 Play press the Arpeggio tab PROGRAM P8 Play Arpeggio Aa Bank INT A J 128 b 000 Noisy Stabber _ Key Sune Keyboard Sort Octave O2 O4 2 Latch Selecting an arpeggio pattern An arpeggio pattern can be selected from preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 I A B U506 User With the factory settings UO00
61. 063 from the MOSS PCG file and load the MOSS SNG file As described for the EXB PCM series you will not normally load bank I A and I B Program bank I F should be loaded into bank INT F which is the program bank for the MOSS tone generator We recommend that you select INT E as the loading desti nation for combination bank I B amp The optional EXB MOSS board must be installed PG p 286 If you have modified the program settings or the order of the programs in banks INT A or INT B load banks I A and I B from the internal hard disk or the included floppy disk The EXB MOSS combinations are created using the EXB MOSS programs and the bank INT A and INT B preloaded programs This means that you must load banks I A and I B of the preloaded programs Load ing data Restoring the factory settings p 63 2 Insert the included floppy disk and select the pro gram bank I F and combination bank I B file Selecting program bank I F Select MOSS PCG as described in steps of Loading data Restoring the factory settings Press the Open button to select the Programs folder and press the Open button once again to select the bank I F folder Selecting combination bank I B Select MOSS PCG as described in steps of Loading data Restoring the factory settings Press the Open button to select the Combinations folder and press the Open button once again to select the bank I B folder 3 Select t
62. 12 o clock the gate time will be the same as the Gate parameter of the arpeggiator Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the gate time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the gate time VELO CITY knob This adjusts the velocity playing strength of the arpeggi ated notes At the center position 12 o clock the velocity will be the same as the Velocity parameter of the arpeg giator Rotating the knob toward the left will decrease the velocity and rotating it toward the right will increase the velocity ON OFF key This switches the Arpeggiator function on off When on the LED will light 15 SAMPLING SAMPLING REC START STOP SAMPLING REC key In Sampling Program Combination and Sequencer modes pressing this key will make the LED light and when you continue by pressing the SAMPLING START STOP key sampling will either begin or you will enter the sample ready mode p 37 SAMPLING START STO P key In Sampling Program Combination and Sequencer modes pressing this key after pressing the SAMPLING REC key will either cause sampling to begin or it will access the sample ready mode In the Sampling P1 Sample Edit page pressing this key will sound the selected sample This key is also used to play back a WAVE file from the internal hard disk This function can be used in the direc tory window of various Disk mode pages in the Disk mode Make Audio CD p
63. 85 These settings are made in Sequencer PO Play REC Preference page Recording Setup e Overwrite With this method the musical data previously recorded on a track is overwritten by the newly recorded data When you perform overwrite recording on a previously recorded track its musical data will be deleted and replaced by the newly recorded data Normally you will use this method to record and then modify the results by using other types of realtime recording or event editing Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 83 Basic functions Producing songs 2 Set the Recording Mode to Over Write SEQUENCER P Play REC Preference i 001 01 000 Meter 44 J 120 P Maw S000 NEW SONG P Tracka1 TRACK a1 PPR T61 AGGEE Noisy Stab Recording Setup Over Write O Auto Punch In O Over Dub C Loop All Tracks igi Magi C Manual Punch In fel Fug Metronome Setup Sound Only REC Level 127 k 1 3 3 16 1 3 3 16 1 3 3 16 rence J Precount Measure 2_ 3 In Location specify the location at which you wish to begin recording 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If the Metronome Setup is still set to the default set tings the metronome will sound for a two measure pre count and then recording will begin Play the keyboard and move controllers such as the joystick to reco
64. AUDIO INPUT These two audio inputs are used when recording a mono stereo sample from a mic or external audio source p 37 or when applying the TRITON STUDIO s inter nal effects to an external audio source p 143 The MIC LINE level select switch MIC LINE switch and the level adjustment knob LEVEL knob allow you to use a wide range of external audio sources ranging from mic level to line level AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks These are unbalanced phone jacks LEVEL knob This adjusts the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks MIC LIN E switch This switches the input level of the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks 5 S P DIF OUT MAIN jack This is an optical type S P DIF format IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 digital output jack It outputs a digital version of the same audio signal as the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks at sam pling rates of 48 kHz or 96 kHz PG p 138 Use an optical cable to connect this to the optical digital input jack of a DAT or MD etc The VOLUME slider does not adjust the output level of this jack IN jack This is an optical S P DIF format IEC 60958 EIAJ CP 1201 digital input jack Digital audio at a sample rate of 48 kHz or 96 kHz can be input here 96 kHz audio will be converted to 48 kHz PG p 138 Use an optical cable to connect this jack to the optical digi tal output jack of a DAT or other device 6 SCSI connector This is a D sub half pitch 50 pin SCSI co
65. BUS setting correct If you want to listen to the performance of the inter nal tone generator while sampling only the external input sound i e when using the In Track Sampling function you will normally set this to Indiv 1 2 For other types of sampling or resampling set this to L R p 104 PG p 4 37 56 97 _ If a message of Buffer underrun error occurred is displayed frequently when you are sampling to hard disk execute the page menu command Check Medium Disk Utility page to find and correct any errors on the selected MS DOS format media PG p 171 A stereo sample can t be played in stereo C Is the multisample stereo Execute the page menu command MS Mono To Stereo to convert the multisample to stereo PG p 94 L Is the sample name assigned correctly PG p 90 Volume of a recorded sample is too low too high A sample that you resampled with Recording Level set at approximately 12 0 dB plays back at a lower volume than the volume at which you resampled it Did you turn on the Auto 12 dB On setting when you resampled p 105 If you resampled with Auto 12 dB On turned off turn on 12 dB Sampling mode Loop Edit page for that sample The playback volume of a sample is different than the volume at which it was resampled or sampled If the sample playback is louder did you set Recording Level above 0 0 If it is lower
66. By setting a velocity zone you can set up a timbre which will be sounded only by notes played within a certain range of velocities and not by notes played outside this Velocity Zone By combining timbres that have differing velocity zone settings you can create velocity switched combinations The upper and lower limits of the velocity zone of each timbre are determined by the Top Velocity and Bot tom Velocity respectively The following diagram shows an example of a velocity switched combination in velocity will switch between timbres 1 and 2 to play different programs Such combina tions are created by setting the velocity zone f 127 As an example we will explain how to create a combina tion like the one shown above 1 In the PO Play Program Select page or the P1 Edit Program Mixer Prog page use the Program Select area to select the program that will be used for each timbre 1 and 2 Select a brass program for timbre 1 Select a strings program for timbre 2 2 In the MIDI Ch page of P2 Edit Trk Param set Sta tus to INT for all the timbres that you wish to use and set MIDI Channel to either Gch or to match the global MIDI channel a G will be displayed after the channel number 3 In P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Vel Zone page set the Top Velocity and Bottom Velocity Set timbre 1 to a Top Velocity of 127 and a Bottom Velocity of 64 Set timbre 2 to a
67. Checked The notes you play on the keyboard and the notes played by the arpeggiator will both sound Unchecked Only the arpeggiated notes will sound Using the arpeggiator in Combi nation mode In Combination mode the TRITON STUDIO provides dual arpeggiators allowing you to run two arpeggio pat terns simultaneously Press the COMBI key to enter Combination mode and select a combination Selecting and playing a combination p 24 As you select various combinations you will notice that the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED will light for some combinations Linking the arpeggiator to program combinations p 32 When you press the keyboard the arpeggiator will start For other combinations you can press the ARPEGGIA TOR ON OFF key the LED will light to turn on the arpeggiator 2 As described in the preceding section Settings using controllers and the following section Settings in the LCD screen move the controllers or modify the parameters to change the way in which the arpeggios are played amp The ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob ARPEGGIATOR GATE knob and ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob will apply to both arpeggiators A and B Their state is saved when the combination is written Settings in the LCD screen In Combination P0 Play press the Arpegg A tab COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play A Aa Category z D G0 Keyboard J 064 Bank INT Djo00 Ste
68. CombE AGG LEL l c 0 1 L Grand Piano E Other EM 4 Keyboar stings Brass FastSyn iFastSyn i FastSyn Fastsun Fastur i belag ms l ocr Random CE Delay ms Specifies the amount of time before the program assigned to each timbre will sound Specifies the time from when you play the keyboard until the program will sound If you select KeyOff for this parameter the timbre will sound when the note is released Use Program s Scale Scale Specifies the scale for each timbre If you check Use Pro gram s Scale the scale specified by the program will be used Timbres for which this is not checked will use the Scale setting MIDI filter settings P3 Edit MIDI Filter For each MIDI Filter item you can specify whether or not the corresponding MIDI message will be transmitted and received The checked items will be transmitted and received nabl l ampe amp MIDI filter does not turn the function itself on off but specifies whether or not that MIDI message will be transmitted and received For example if porta mento is on portamento will be applied to the sound of TRITON STUDIO even if Portamento SW CC 65 is unchecked For example if you selected a bass program for timbre 1 and a piano program for timbre 2 to create a split type combination you could make the following settings so that pressing the connected damper pedal would apply the damper effect only to the piano program
69. DEEP TECOUCIN O aoia 86 Event Edit and Create Control Data 000 86 Realtime recording to a pattern c cece 86 SONS editing Method siara a seers 88 Te Copying ASONO miira er satecrearicnmbeeanainiess 88 2 NAMING a SONP nns a ureters 88 3 Setting the number of measures in the song 88 4 Changing the key transposing Modulating cccceee cece 89 Creating and playing a Cue List eee 90 Converting A SONG ysiseisteiesatiticrareartvnsdaceromeaiortertes 92 Creating and recording RPPR Realtime Pattern Plav Record horror rne R OA 92 Creatine REER Caters ccscivesceivescncninaraimoneseni 92 RE PR play ACK onarena N 93 Realtime recording an RPPR performance 94 Recording the sounds of a combination 95 Caution and other functions in Sequencer mode 97 Sampling settings nicticcitiieevertcoversiniieeuveeks 99 Features of sampling on the TRITON STUDIO 99 How Sampling mode is organized eee 100 Samples and Multisamples cc cece 101 Preparations for sampling cece eee 102 1 Connecting an input device and making Input SENES oir erran Erea EER EEEE A 102 2 Setting the recording level Recording Level OND DA E E one ote Maat 103 3 Specifying the recording method Recording Selup Sampling Setup i ciscseessisastasseeetienee 104 4 Making settings for the sample to be recorded REC Sample Setup Sampling Setup 104 Sampling and editing in Sampling mode
70. Fer Fer Porr Dp ore For Dorr Dorr Select A B Bank Program Program Select Selecting a combination number 2 Make sure that Combination Select is selected If this is not selected press Combination Select to highlight it 3 Use the VALUE controllers to select the combination that you wish to play Selecting a program p 22 4 Audition the sound Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound you selected Try operating the various controllers and listen to how the sound changes amp p 25 Selecting the combination bank In Combination mode you can switch banks to select combinations from another bank With the factory settings banks INT A INT D contain combinations table below Press a COMBI BANK INT A EXB G key to select a bank The LED will light and the selected bank will be dis played in the left of the LCD screen For example to select bank INT C press the BANK INT C key The INT C key will light and the upper left of the LCD screen will indicate Bank INT C Bank Prog No xlanation INT A INT D I A 1 D 000 127 Preloaded combinations INT E l E 000 127 User combinations EXB MOSS combinations EXB A EXB G 000 127 User combinations EXB PCM series combinations IN T A IN T D With the factory settings these banks contain a wide variety of preloaded combinations that use multiple programs effects and arpeggio patterns IN
71. Glo bal PO P4 press the page menu command Write Global Setting in Global P0 P4 The Write Global Setting dialog box will appear Write Global Setting To write user drum kits press the page menu com mand Write Drum Kits in Global P5 The Write Drum Kits dialog box will appear Write Drum Kits To write user arpeggio patterns press the page menu command Write Arpeggio Patterns in Global P6 The Write Arpeggio Patterns dialog box will appear Write Arpeggio Patterns WA The same dialog box will also appear if in each of the above pages you hold down the ENTER key and press the 0 key 2 To execute the Write operation press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure Press the OK button once again to write the data Using the SEQUENCER REC W RITE key to write In the following pages press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key A dialog box will appear Global settings Global P0 P4 User drum kits Global P5 User arpeggio patterns Global P6 The example shown is for Update Arpeggio Patterns Update Arpeggio Patterns Are you sure 2 To execute the Write operation press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button Memory in Global mode When the power is turned on the Global mode data is called from internal memory into the Global mode mem ory area Then w
72. IFX3 or IFX4 Effects in each mode In Program mode insert effects can be used as part of the sound creating process in the same way that the output sound of the oscillator OSC is processed by the filter and amp to create the final sound Then the master effects can be used to apply spatial type effects such as reverb The stereo 3 band master EQ is located immediately before the OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R outputs and is used to make final adjustments in tone These settings can be made independently for each program Send Return Oscillator _ Filter Amplifier Insert Effect 1 5 Master EQ ong R In Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode insert effects can be used to help create the sound of each timbre track The master effects are used to apply overall spatial processing and the master EQ is used to make overall adjustments in tone These settings are made in Combination mode indepen dently for each combination in Sequencer mode for each song and in Song Play mode for the entire mode Return Master Effect 1 2 L MONO R Timbre 1 Track 1 Timbre 2 Track 2 Timbre 8 Track 16 In Sampling mode you can sample while applying insert effects to the audio coming in via AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN or mLAN if the EXB mLAN is installed jacks Settings in Sampling mode are made in Input SAM PLING Sampling P0 Input Setup These settings are valid only for Sampling mode
73. Knob3B KMod3 i iMFX1G17 St HarmonicChorus IFXd 88 No Effect _KnobdB KModd iMFX2 O56 Reverb Room IFS 888 No Effect Performance Editor Octave iar mp Attack Decay tretch bile p Time Time Balance lc SC ee os 2 Turn the arpeggiator on ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED is lit and play the keyboard to verify that a phrase is produced Make sure that the arpeggio tempo is set to 120 2 Adjust the recording level Recording Level dB 1 Press the Sampling tab to access the P0 Play Sam pling page 2 Press the SAMPLING REC key The level meter will indicate the volume of the phrase to be sampled PROGRAM P8 Play Sampling Aa z Input nao he COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK 3 Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select P off Pan L B Send1 MFX1 00A GGG Send2 MFX2 000 Input2 i Level 127 _ _BUS IFX Indiv Select gt Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 00A Send2 MFX2 600 metas Setup vecording Level CdBI Adjust the ne level as necessary using the Recording Level slider located at the right of the dis play WA The power on default setting is 12 dB With a setting of 12 dB CLIP will not be displayed even if the pro gram is played at the maximum level 3 When you have finished adjusting the level press the SAMPLING REC key Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn off the arpeggiator 3 Specify the recording method Sampling Setup In the P0 Play Sampling pag
74. L R Save to gt RAM Mode gt Stereo Sample Time A min 14 923 sec With these settings if you press the SAMPLING REC key to enter recording standby mode and then press the SAMPLING START STOP key recording will begin after a four beat count 5 Specify the sample that will be recorded Make settings as described in 4 Make settings for the sample that will be recorded p 45 If you omit making settings at this point and simply con tinue with the settings of p 45 the sample will be assigned to the next higher key of the same program number 6 Record the sample Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on 2 Press the SAMPLING REC key to enter record ready mode When you press the SAMPLING START STOP key a count down will begin Play the keyboard during the count down After a four beat count down recording will start Play your guitar The arpeggiator will also start after the count down 3 Press the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop recording WA Sampling will also end automatically when the speci fied Sample Time is reached 4 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it off 7 Listen to the sample Now you can listen to the sample that was recorded 6 Listen to the sample and edit it p 46 Sampling aa 47 Quick Start Sampling 48 Examples of sampling settings Resampling only the sound of the TRITON STUDIO e g arpeggi
75. Off _ MF x2 off System Input mLAN mLAN Pref Sampling Output JL Input When you play the TRITON STUDIO together with other instruments or along with music on a CD or tape you may need to adjust the tuning so that the pitch matches To adjust the tuning use Global PO Basic Setup Basic page Master Tune The tuning can be adjusted in a range of 50 50 cents one semitone is 100 cents Auto Arpeggiator Program Combination You can also transpose by changing the pitch in semitone steps To transpose the pitch of the entire TRITON STU DIO use Global P0 Basic Setup Basic page Key Trans pose The pitch can be transposed over a range of 1 octave Here we will explain how to adjust the tuning and trans position of the entire TRITON STUDIO Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode 2 Press the EXIT key 3 Select the Basic tab 4 To adjust the tuning select Master Tune to adjust the transposition select Key Transpose 6 Use the VALUE controllers to adjust the setting 124 You can use numeric keys 0 9 to enter a value and press the ENTER key Alternatively you can use the VALUE dial the VALUE slider or the A V keys Adjusting the way in which veloc ity or after touch will affect the volume or tone You can adjust the way in which changes in velocity or after touch will affect the volume or tone By changing this you can for exampl
76. P RAM Sample Time G min 07 052 sec Sample Mode gt Stereo SAMPLING P86 Insert Effect insert FX i Insert Effect PantCC 8 gt IF xs G6G No Effect CAGA ki TD ds 8 Ed Press the C2 key and verify that reverb is applied 6 Press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAM PLING START STOP key The sample that is assigned to C2 will play back and Start PAAAAAA Y Loop _ Rev LJ 1206 e Loop S 8660066 U Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 200M gt cng ine em KG 8 D End 0092438 _ Use Zero By making the following settings you will be able to resample at the optimal level resampling will start When the sample finishes playing resampling will end The sample that was created by resampling will auto matically be assigned to Sample Select Basic functions Sampling settings If 12 dB is not checked Recording Level 0 0 dB PO Recording Recording page Auto 12 dB On Off unchecked P0 Recording Preference page If 12 dB is checked Recording Level 12 dB dB P0 Recording Recording page Auto 12 dB On Off checked P0 Recording Preference page T Press the C2 key and verify that reverb is applied amp In Sampling mode the P8 Insert Effect Routing page BUS IFX Select parameter will automatically be set to L R when resampling ends This prevents an insert effect from being applied in duplicat
77. Preparations for recording set the track to the program that will be used by the pattern p 82 2 Access the Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit 61 gt 5096 R amp B P Trackaz Bass Pattern gt User P gt Only REC Reso P 2 USED IN SONG TRACK I 4118 E Bass Finger USED IN RPPR Pattern RPPR Edi Name Jl Setup 3 Use Track Select to select the track that you will use to record the pattern The pattern will sound with the program and other set tings of the selected track 4 Set Pattern Pattern Bank to User and set Pattern Select to U00 User patterns U00 U99 can be created for each song 6 Select the page menu command Pattern Parameter A dialog box will appear F Set Pattern Parameter of UBA Length EEF Meter 4 4 6 Set the number of measures in the pattern to a Length of 04 four measures and set Meter to a time signature of 4 4 Press the OK button D As necessary set Resolution to apply realtime quantization Begin realtime recording You can record in the same way as you did when recording tracks with Loop All Tracks p 85 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key After the pre count pattern recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate the joystick and other con trollers to record your performance
78. Program mode Single Drum mode Normally 60 voices can be used However a maximum of 120 voices will be available if for example ROM or RAM is used for the High MS and Piano or EXB PCM is used for the Low MS and you use velocity switching to play the two tone generators Double mode Normally 30 voices can be used However if OSC1 is sounded by one tone generator and OSC2 is sounded by the other tone generator e g OSC1 ROM OSC2 Piano a maximum of 60 voices can be used If OSC1 and OSC2 use one tone generator e g OSC1 ROM OSC2 ROM then a maximum of 30 voices can be used This can also be increased by velocity switch and velocity zone settings Basics Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes Depending on the oscillator mode of the programs you are using the maximum number will vary between 60 voices and 120 voices Example For single mode programs that use ROM or RAM a total maximum of 60 voices For single mode programs that use Piano or EXB PCM a total maximum of 60 voices Total 120 voices For double mode programs that use ROM or RAM a total maximum of 30 voices For double mode programs that use Piano or EXB PCM a total maximum of 30 voices Total 60 voices Sampling mode Tone generator 1 is always used in Sampling mode Mono samples multisamples 60 voices Stereo samples multisamples 30 voices 15 16 Basic operation 1 Selecting modes O In order to use a partic
79. REC key to enter record ready mode 2 At the moment that you wish to start sampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key Sampling will start W9 It is a good idea to allow a bit of extra time before you start and after you stop sampling 3 At the moment that you wish to stop sampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key Sampling will stop A 140 BPM drum phrase has now been sampled The sample will automatically be assigned to Sample Sample select WA Sampling will stop automatically if the remaining amount of memory reaches zero 4 Listen to the sampled sound and assign a name to the sample You can play the OrigKey note to hear the sound that was sampled After you have verified the sound assign a name to the sample p 40 e g LOOP1 140 BPM Up to 14 char acters can be input as the name of a stereo sample the two characters L and R at the end are fixed When you assign a name to either the L or R channel the other sample will be named automatically 6 Make loop settings Next we will delete unwanted portions from the sample and adjust the settings so that the sample will be looped smoothly i By default when the power is turned on sampled sounds will be looped automatically PO Recording Preference page Auto Loop On On Quick Start Sampling 43 44 Press the MENU key to access the page menu and press P2 Loop Edit The P2 Loop Edit page will app
80. SAMPLING REC key Play your guitar and the level meter will indicate the volume at which the guitar will be sampled Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on play the keyboard to start the arpeggio and play your guitar while adjusting the final volume Adjust the recording level as necessary using the Recording Level slider located at the right of the dis play i The power on default is 12 dB With a setting of 12 dB CLIP will not be displayed even if the program drum pattern and the guitar are played at the maxi mum level is If the balance between instruments is not to your lik ing use the LEVEL knob or the performance editor Amp Level to adjust the balance 3 When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC key Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn off the arpeggiator Sampling E 4 Specify the recording method Sampling Setup 1 In the Sampling page set the following Sampling Setup parameters Source BUS L R Trigger Sampling START SW Metronome Precount 4 Save to RAM Mode Stereo Sample Time as desired PROGRAM P Play z Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK g Input 1 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select pb Ler Pan LOGO Send1 MFX1 GG Send2 MFX2 900 Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 000 Send2 MFX2 ppa Sampling Setup Source Bus gt
81. START STOP key to play back the song and adjust the resampling volume while you watch the level meters Set Recording Level to 12 0 dB If the level meter indication is too low use the VALUE controller to raise the level from 12 0 as far as possible without causing the CLIP indicator to appear The output volume will not change at this time but your adjustment will affect the data that will be sampled p 105 fi The power on default setting is 12 dB At the 12 dB setting CLIP will not appear even if the song is played back at the maximum level When you finish making adjustments press the SAM PLING REC key Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop the song playback Then press the LOCATE key 6 Start sampling Press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAM PLING START STOP key to enter recording standby mode Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the song Sampling will begin at the same time D When the song finishes playing back press the SAM PLING START STOP key to stop sampling Use the page menu command Select Directory to verify that the WAVE file was created Select the file and press the SAMPLING START STOP key to listen to the sound that was sampled WA The pickup level of a WAVE file is specified by the WAVE File Play Level PG p 138 117 Basic functions Sampling Settings Creating an audio CD from WAVE files sampled to h
82. START Sw Metronome Precount Off J 120 Resample Manual Pre Trigger REC 686 ms Input Prefe Memory Setup Jl rence Jl Status ZS The Input settings allow you to input simultaneously from each input source Recording Level dB The bus the insert effect to which the samples assigned to the multisample will be sent is specified by the Sampling P8 Insert Effect Routing page BUS Select Indiv Out Assign parameter p 107 SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect Routing Aa Off IF Ke Off IFK3 Off IFmd Off IFRS Off Chain BUS Select IF X Indiv Out Assign BUSCIFX Select gt IFX1 Insert IF IF IF IF IF Fx 1 2 3 d a 142 Insert effects Select an effect for IFX1 IFX5 and set Pan CC 8 for the signal that has passed through each insertion effect If effects are chained the settings after the last IFX in the chain will be used Master effects Master EQ The master effects and master EQ cannot be used in Sam pling mode Effect settings for AUDIO INPUT In Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Disk modes external audio sources can be input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN and mLAN if the EXB mLAN option is installed jacks or from an audio CD inserted in the CDRW 1 option if installed and pro cessed by the TRITON STUDIO s effects In these modes the insert effects master effects and master EO can be used Settings for the external audio inp
83. Sample 68686 Range Start 6662605 Fronts amp End C Front End End 0045475 Save to No 6661 O Overwrite Set the parameters and press the OK button to exe cute the operation PG p 101 amp For cautions on the Save to No and Overwrite check boxes refer to About Overwrite PG p 101 The grid display The page menu command Grid overlays the waveform display with a grid based on the BPM tempo value This makes it easy to make loop settings that are synchronized to the tempo ZS In the same way the grid display can also be used in P1 Sample Edit page The grid can help you to edit the waveform in sync with the tempo 4 Select the page menu command Grid The following dialog box will appear On O Off Resolution gt I Turn Grid On set the desired Resolution and press the OK button Dotted grid lines will appear SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit Start Baga008 Y Loop _ Rev 1208 LoopS 989940 Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 4 zoom mp End 046470 Use zero cri BEN lt 2 A 2 Set Grid to the desired BPM tempo value 3 Set the end address so that it coincides with a dotted line of the grid This will cause the loop interval to be the same length as the BPM value The grid display will be based at LoopS Loop Start if looping is on If looping is off the grid will be based at Start 4 To hide
84. Track 2 Bass Setup 161 63 MER A J 996 gt Manu Reso a Hi RPPR Keyboar Guitar P Drin iSt rpeggiator Assign a Off a Off a Off D off a Off Be off Select the Sequencer P7 Arpeggiator Arpeggiator A page and set Pattern to U038 I A B SEQUENCER P Arpeggiator Arpeggiator A AA 601 61 660 Meter 44 J aga gt Manu gt S000 Hip Hop Rap P Tracka Drums Reso P Hi E RPPR _ Key Synce O Keyboard Sort velocity _ Latch Swing 000 Set Set A A eE Set Gate and Velocity to Step Do not check Key Sync Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key The LED will light In the Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box SEQUENCER P Play REC Preference EEk i 001 01 000 Meter 44 J aga P Manu OjS004 Hip Hop Rap P Tracka2 Bass Reso P Hi v RPPR Recording Setup Over Write O Over Dub Crisop AN Traci Manual Punch In 3 fast Metronome Setup Sound Only REC Level 127 Precount Measure 2_ k 1 8 9 16 1 8 3 16 1 8 9 16 If Recording Mode is set to Loop All Tracks it will not be possible to select Multi REC Set the Recording Mode to Over Write 4 Select the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page For all tracks the PLAY MUTE REC indication will show REC The track played by RPPR will be recorded simulta neously with the track played by the arpeggiator Se
85. UO RPPR 4 H Pa Ba HA TA Bissu Butar ui Strings T Ba nk Progra am i D aaa D e805 D aaae Dit D 1 i D ass F Romance fingertip Rez Dow prai Power C iLegato si Mixer Ea itor ia inal Prete 1 3 3 16 1 3 39 16 1 3 2 Set the pan and volume of each track In the Sequencer PO Play REC Mixer T01 08 T09 16 page Pan sets the pan of each track and Volume sets the volume of each track SEQUENCER P Play REC 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 15000 NEW SONG P Tracka1 Drums aLe l 0366 La Kit 1 2 4 Mixer 161 63 EEk J 998 gt Manu Reso gt Hi O RPPR Ch 41 RPPR Nofissign _ 5 a Bass Keyboar Guitar P SlowSynt Guitar P Guitar P Strings Q Q A ae X Q eA o 3 Specify the tone generator and MIDI channel that will be played by each track In the Sequencer P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch T01 08 T09 16 page Status specifies whether each track will sound the internal tone generator or an external tone generator MIDI Channel specifies the MIDI channel for each track If the track Status is set to INT playing the track data or operating the TRITON STUDIO s keyboard or con trollers will cause the TRITON STUDIO s internal tone generator to be played If Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH playing the track data or operating the TRITON STUDIO s keyboard or controllers will cause an external tone generator to be sounded and
86. When you reach the end of the pattern the sequncer will return to the beginning of the pattern and continue recording If you continue recording the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data 9 If you want to delete specific data while you continue pattern recording you can press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key or check the Remove Data check box For details refer to step of Loop All Tracks t p 85 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop recording If you made a mistake or decide to re record press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop recording and press the COMPARE key Then begin the pattern recording procedure again as in step 8 Control data in pattern recording amp To record control data in a pattern you should restore the control data to its normal value within the pat tern If you fail to restore the normal value unneces sary control data may remain in a stuck position when you place the pattern in a song or use the RPPR function to play the pattern However the following control data will be automatically reset to the follow ing values when the song or RPPR function finishes playing the pattern or when playback is halted Expression CC 1 1 Ribbon controller CC 16 Damper switch CC 64 00 zero Sostenuto switch CC 66 Soft switch CC 67 EG sustain level CC 70 64 center Resonance level CC 71 EG release time CC 72 EG attack
87. access the Jump page and press P8 Insert Effect The P8 Insert Effect page will appear Press the Insert FX tab to access the Insert FX page 3 Select IFX1 use the numeric keys to enter 5 2 and press the ENTER key to confirm 052 Reverb Hall Press IFX1 On Off to turn it ON SAMPLING P8 Insert Effect insert FX i GGG No Effect CAGA id ET 4 Speak into the mic and verify that reverb is applied to the sound You can adjust the effect settings in the IFX1 page IFX1 tab 6 After pressing the EXIT key press the Recording tab to access the P0 Recording Recording page SAMPLING P Recording Recording Aa EC Sample Setup Bank gt RAM1 Save to P RAM Sample Time min 16 816 sec Sample Mode gt Stereo R d Input P Tig JL etue rence Metais i y O 6 Set Sample Mode to Stereo Now the sound of the internal LR channels can be sam pled in stereo T Press the Create button to create a new index Quick Start Sampling 39 Press the SAMPLING REC key Press the SAMPLING START STOP key and speak the word s that you want to sample Speak the word that you want to sample Example It s Recording will start when the input exceeds the Level 30dB level Press the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop Play the keyboard When you play the OrigKey note you will hear the sound that was sampled Assigning a name to th
88. according to the settings in Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Be sure to verify the settings of the program amp Set the Gate and Velocity by using the ARPEG GIATOR GATE and VELOCITY knobs to the cen ter position 12 o clock PROGRAM P Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup A Arpeggiator Tempo J 126 Arpeggiator Setup Pattern P usa6 User ArpeggioPatS 6 Octave Resolution b Key Sync U Keyboard Gate Step Sort velocity Step UO Latch 000 di To change the user arpeggio pattern name use the Rename Arpeggio Pattern page menu command p 57 2 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern to internal memory be sure to Write the user arpeggio pattern p 58 If you turn off the power without writing the edited contents will be lost 3 If you wish to save the state of the program at the same time return to Program mode and write the pro gram p 56 135 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings eS To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed guitar Other examples of creating a user arpeggio pat chord select Flam In Program mode select an tern acoustic guitar program and choose the user arpeg gio pattern that you created here In the Arpeg Setup Melody pattern page of Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator set Gate to Step Then return to the Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Edit page For odd numbered steps set Flam t
89. and effect settings suitable for various styles of music By loading a template into a song you can begin recording immediately without having to make the same frequently used settings each time If you want to specify the program and volume set tings yourself from scratch refer to Preparations for recording p 82 Frog Mixer Mixer iFisLoop Pic oor ff Il Prete i g 9 16 1 8 9 16 1 8 rence WA Preset patterns can be used in a song at any time This can be done by using the page menu commands Put To Track or Copy To Track Sequencer P6 Pat tern RPPR Pattern Edit page PG p 77 3 When you play the keyboard you will hear the drum program for track 1 of the template song 4 Press the popup button located at the left of Track Select and select Track 02 Bass When you play the keyboard you will hear a bass sound Track Select is the track that will be used to record play song data Normally the track selected here can be played from the keyboard and during recording your performance will be recorded on this track in cases other than Multi REC or Master Track Next select TO3 T08 in order and play them from the keyboard The TRITON STUDIO has sixteen sequence tracks but this template song specifies only tracks 1 8 Select Track03 Elec Piano SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 e 661 61 600 Meter 4 4 J 198 Pb Maw gt So00 aag Jazz Reso gt Hi UO RPPR
90. and play combinations You can also perform simple editing make arpeggiator settings and make settings for audio input and sampling p 24 31 35 In P1 Edit Program Mixer P9 Edit Master FX you can edit the parameters of the combination you selected in PO Play WA You can perform sampling resampling in Combina tion mode p 45 102 You can also apply the TRI TON STUDIO s effects to an external audio input for a wide range of possibilities p 143 How a combination is organized A combination consists of a variety of parameters that can be accessed in P1 Edit Program Mixer P9 Edit Master FX The diagram below shows how a combination is structured Basic combination editing You can edit the preloaded combinations banks INT A INT D with which the TRITON STUDIO is shipped or start with an initialized combination banks INT E EXB A EXB G to create your own original combination WA Original programs using sample waveforms multi samples you sampled on the TRITON STUDIO or loaded into memory via Disk mode can also be used in a combination Timbre Timbre2 Timbres Timbre4 Routing P8 1 Insert Effect Master Effect Individual Outputs Timbres Insert Effect 1 5 P8 AUDIO OUTPUT amp If you wish to save an edited combination in internal memory you must write it p 56 amp If a program being edited in Program mode is used in a combination it will sound acc
91. and select by categories such as types of instrument CD RW drive When the CDRW 1 CD R RW drive option is installed you can create original CD s back up your data or play back and sample from audio CD s without the need to connect any external equipment Front and rear panel Front panel OMlMmMmmnmry Coco OCIS ee Cocotte eea 17 18 19 7 1 SW 1 key SW2 key These keys are on off switches their function can be assigned in Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Sampling modes When on the LED will light e p 25 2 Joystick This controls pitch and modulation Move the joystick up down and left right Y Y X X to vary the effect p 25 Various program parameters and effect parameters will determine what is being controlled by the joystick 3 Ribbon controller Slide your finger to the left or right on this ribbon control ler to control the pitch or modulation p 26 Various program parameters and effect parameters will determine what is controlled by the ribbon controller 4 VOLUME slider This adjusts the volume that is output from the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R jacks and the headphone jack 5 REALTIME CONTROLS _ p eee O LPF CUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE r e aaam O ASSIGNABLE 1 ASSIGNABLE2 ASSIGNABLE 3 ASSIGNABL
92. been recorded a small noise may be heard This has no effect on the audio data that was edited or sampled L When using the BPM MIDI Sync function to control the delay time of an effect noise may occur in the delay sound This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay sound and is not a malfunction Some effects such as 015 St Analog Record generate noise intentionally It is also possible to create oscillation using a 24 dB oct LPF filter with resonance These are not malfunctions Program Combination Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed Make sure that the Oscillator Mode Program P1 Program Basic parameter is set to Double PG p 7 A combination does not play correctly after you load data In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check the items that you wanted to save PG p 166 L Are the bank numbers of the programs used by the combination the same as when the combination was created Song A song does not play correctly after you load data In the dialog box when you saved the data did you check the items that you wanted to save PG p 166 _ Are the programs used by the song the same as when the song was created When saving the song it is best to use Save All or Save PCG amp SEQ so that the programs are saved together with the song Then when loading load both the PCG and the SEQ data PG p 166 157 Have you loaded the multisa
93. by the newly recorded data Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Auto Punch In aoa R eco rdi ng 5 e tu p AAEE EAEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EES O Over Write Auto Punch In Maas ZEB MApN C Over Dub C Loop All Tracks i igi Magi 9 Manual Punch In f Reiiive Dtg _ Multi REC 3 In M Auto Punch In Start Measure M Auto Punch In End Measure specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M005 M008 recording will occur only from measure 5 to measure 8 4 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 6 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin When you reach the starting location you specified in step recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step recording will end Playback will continue 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the location you specified in step Loop All Tracks This method lets you continue recording as you add musical data The specified region can be recorded repeatedly This is ideal when recording drum phrases etc 4 Use Track Select to select the
94. cable Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice March 02 154 O Music Workstation Sampler Date 2001 11 6 TRITON STUDIO MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Recognized Remane Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Memorized Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Memorized Messages W xO Altered OOOOOOOOOOo0o0o Note 0 127 0 127 Sequencer and Arpeggiator data Number True Voice ooggooom ooogo 0 127 can transmit all note numbers 0 127 Velocity Note On O 9n V 1 127 9n V 1 1274 Note Off x x Aftertouch Polyphonic Key o o Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted A Monophonic Channel o o only as sequence data A Oe Oe Bank Select MSB LSB P Joystick Y Y Ribbon Slider C Pedal Portamento Time Volume IFX pan Pan C Expression Effect Control 1 2 C Damper Portamento Sw Sostenuto Soft C Sound Realtime Controls 1 4A 74 71 79 72 C 64 65 66 67 Control 70 79 Change 80 81 82 83 93 91 92 94 95 6 38 96 97 98 99 100 101 0 95 Switch 1 2 Foot Switch Controller C Send 1 2 Effect ON OFF IFXs MFX1 MFX2 C Data Entry MSB LSB C Data Increment Decrement C NRPN LSB MSB 02 RPN LSB MSB O Realtime Controls knobs 1 4 B assign C 0 101 Sequencer data receive C 120 121 All Sound Off Reset All Controllers C Program O O 127 O 0 127 R Change Variable Range noooo
95. cc a1 Spread 50 Wet Dry sa s Sre off FX 1 2 3 d 5 l Rotate the TEMPO knob and the delay time will change When you push the joystick away from yourself and press the SW key the feedback level will rise and the delays will become longer di When you turn on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF switch the arpeggiator will begin playing Select any desired arpeggio pattern When you rotate the TEMPO knob the delay time will change in syn chronization with the changing tempo of the arpeggio amp If you rotate the TEMPO knob to change the tempo while the delay is sounding noise may occur in the delay sound This is because the delay sound becomes discontinuous and is not a malfunction M For some effects you can synchronize the LFO fre quency to the tempo Set the effect parameters BPM MIDI Sync to On and BPM to MIDI For details refer to PG p 248 O ther functions Setting the function of SW1 and SW 2 You can specify the function of the SW1 and SW2 keys PG p 249 The function of the SW1 and SW2 keys can be specified independently for each program each combination and each song These functions can also be set independently for the entire mode in Sampling mode and Song Play mode You can specify the function that will be performed by the SW1 and SW2 keys and can also select between Toggle when the function will be switched on off each time the SW1 or SW2
96. check box you can erase only the specified data During loop recording press the note that you wish to delete and only the data of that note number will be deleted from the key board as long as you continue pressing that note Similarly bender data will be deleted as long as you tilt the joystick in the X horizontal direction and after touch data will be deleted as long as you apply pressure to the keyboard When you are once again ready to record musical data uncheck the Remove Data check box 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will end and you will return to the recording start location that you specified in step If Loop All Tracks is selected normal playback will be looped as well Mult multitrack recording Multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record onto multiple tracks each with a different chan nel This method can be used with overwrite overdub manual punch in and auto punch in recording Using the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks simultaneously A multi track performance using the arpeggiator func tion can be recorded using multi recording When simultaneously recording multiple tracks using the RPPR function You can use multitrack recording to simultaneously record the playback of multiple tracks that are being triggered by the RPPR function For the procedure refer to Realtime recording an RPPR performance p 94 When simultaneously recordi
97. decimal point In Program and Combination mode P0 Play page other than the Sampling page the 10 s HOLD key performs the 10 s Hold function p 23 24 BANK INT A INT G EXB A EXB G keys MOSS PROG BANK SMPL GM _ COMBI BANK A B c D E F G w E DCO E MCO E MCO A B 0 D E F G cof M E CO OEC C CO PROG COMBI BANK The BANK INT A INT G EXB A EXB G keys are used in Program mode to select the program bank and in Combination mode to select the combination bank In combination Sequencer and Song Play modes these keys are used to select the bank of the program used by each timbre track CO MPARE key COMPARE ERE Use this key when you wish to compare the edits you have made to a program or combination s sound with the un edited original i e the sound that is written into memory When editing a program or combination press this key The LED will light and the last written settings for that program number or combination number will be recalled When you press the COMPARE key once again the LED will go dark and you will return to the settings that you were editing If you edit the settings that are recalled by pressing the COMPARE key i e the settings that are written into memory the LED will go dark and it will not be possible to return to the previous edits by pressing t
98. finger away from the ribbon controller The sound will remain as it was before you removed your finger Lock function 4 Press the SW2 key once again to release the Lock function note In the LCD screen SW2 indicates JS Y amp Ribbon Lock This means that the SW2 key is assigned to control the Lock function for the joystick Y direction and the ribbon controller PG p 249 The key will operate in Toggle mode If you move the joystick in the Y direction press the SW2 key to turn on the Lock function then operate the ribbon controller and finally release both control lers the sound you modified by the two controllers will be maintained WA In many programs and combinations the SW2 key is assigned to control the Lock function for the joy stick Y direction and the ribbon controller 26 WA The Lock function can also be applied to aftertouch If the SW1 or SW2 switch is assigned to After Touch Lock the effect produced by pressing down on the keyboard can be held by turning on the SW1 or SW2 switch For details on the SW1 and SW2 switch functions refer to PG p 249 REALTIME CONTROLS 1 2 3 4 These knobs can be used to control the filter cutoff fre quency and resonance the amp and filter EG volume portamento time pan pitch LFO or the send levels to the master effects etc Press the REALTIME CONTROLS key to switch the function of the realtime controllers to A mode or B
99. gt Program Up Foot Switch Assign Foot Pedal Assign Damper Polarity Foot Switch Polarity P KORG Standard gt KORG Standard Sets the function of an assignable switch such as the optional Korg PS 1 connected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack This switch can act as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation or switch portamento on off control the sostenuto effect turn the soft pedal effect on off turn the arpeggiator on off select programs or combi nations up down start stop the sequencer punch in out on the sequencer or be a trigger to advance the cue list step amp PG p 251 e This setting is made in Global P2 Controller Foot Switch Assign You can specify the function that will be performed by an assignable pedal the optional XVP 10 or EXP 2 con nected to the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack This pedal can be used to control master volume alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation portamento pitch change speed volume the pan following an insert effect pan volume or send levels to the master effects PG p 252 e This setting is made in Global P2 Controller Foot Pedal Assign WA You can use this as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation and use it to control program parameters or effect parameters In this case set Foot Switch Assign to Foot SW CC 82 and Foot Pedal Assign to Foot Pedal CC 04 Here we wi
100. in the Program Select and Mixer pages of PO Play Edit Program Mixer page COMBINATION P1 Edit Program Mixer Bank EXB A 00G Initial CombE AGG pi Poud Pastsuf Bank Program T mae a piid pid D aoe Category Program Select Bank Program Assigns a program to each timbre WA When the Bank Timbre Program select menu is displayed you can select programs by bank When the Category Timbre Program select menu is displayed you can select programs from the 16 cat egories amp p 35 note You can also use the BANK INT A EXB G keys to select the bank of the program M If you wish to select programs by receiving MIDI pro gram changes do so in PO Play Pan Specifies the panning stereo position for each timbre A setting of C064 will reproduce the oscillator pan setting of the program Adjusting this parameter will move the sound to left or right while preserving the pan relation ship between the oscillators A setting of L001 is far left and R127 is far right Volume Adjusts the volume of each timbre Create the overall sound by adjusting the volume balance between timbres The Volume setting is an important aspect of creating the sound and this setting will have a significant effect on the overall impression produced by the Combination Settings for status MIDI channel and pitch parameters P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch page COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch Z
101. is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authorit
102. kits that are suitable for a wide variety of music VNL Here you can only select a drum kit To edit or create a drum kit use Global P5 Drum Kit p 128 The following multisamples or drum kits can be used for the oscillator e 425 internal multisamples ROM e Multisamples that you sampled RAM Programs can be created from multisamples samples that you sampled in Sampling mode etc or loaded from media in Disk mode e Four internal piano multisamples Piano e Expansion multisamples if a EXB PCM option is installed e Nine internal drum kits ROM e 144 user drum kits created in Global mode Drum samples can be freely assigned to each key to create a drum kit For the sound of each key you can make filter and amp settings and specify routing to the effects and to the individual audio outputs 69 Basic functions Program settings 70 Velocity Zone page PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic OSC1 2 elocity Zone OSC1 Top 127 0SC1 Bottom Yelocity Zone AA Osc OSC l i EEFI OSC2 Top OSC2 Bottom k Basic Jl Basic Here you can specify the range of velocities for each oscil lator In the example shown above the velocity ranges are as follows e OSC1 will sound at all velocity values e OSC2 will sound only on strongly played notes 64 and above e You can use Velocity Multisample Switching in addition to this parameter High Multisample Low Multisample For this example set
103. loops MS gt 003 NewMS_____4 3 Index SRR G24 no Mit 4 Select Index Index can also be selected by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on keyboard For this example select 001 6 Assign a sample to the Index If sample memory RAM already contains samples use Sample Select to select the sample and assign it If you want to record a new sample you can sample it now The sample you record will be automatically assigned to the index you selected in step The assigned sample will sound when you play the keyboard in the range of the index to which the sample is assigned 6 Repeat steps 4 and to assign a sample to each index note The number and order of the indexes in a multisam ple the range of each index and the original key position can be freely changed later if desired Mul tisample editing p 111 Creating multiple samples In the example procedure described above several indexes were created by pressing the Create button sev eral times and then samples were assigned to each Index As an alternative method it is also possible to create one index sample into it and then repeat these two steps Press the Create button once to create an index Since we will not be sampling from an external input set BUS IFX Indiv Select to Off for each Input Titty ww 2 Record a sample The recorded sample wi
104. may be possible to make the disc be recognized by executing the page menu command Convert to 509660 Format Disk Util ity page to convert the disc to 509660 format However depending on the state in which the disc was saved it may be converted into ISO9660 level 3 format and may still not be recognized In this case if you install ISO9660 level 3 compatible reader soft ware or packet writing software on your computer it will be possible to recognize the disc PG p 299 L A CD R RW that was saved or copied on the TRITON STUDIO using packet writing is not recognized by the TRITON TRITON pro TRITON proX TRITON Rack These models do not support UDF version 1 5 and therefore will not recognize such a disc In the case of a CD R it may be possible to make the disc be recognized by executing the page menu command Convert to 509660 Format Disk Util ity page to convert the disc to 509660 format However depending on the state in which the disc was saved it may be converted into ISO9660 level 3 format and may still not be recognized PG p 299 152 Can t write audio tracks Additional writing is not possible on a CD R RW disc that has been finalized Can t play back the disc on an audio CD player _ Did you finalize the disc If you want to finalize the disc after writing addi tional data check the Execute finalize too check box when executing the page menu command Write to CD
105. mode Each time you press the key A mode or B mode will be alternately selected and the corresponding LED will light i O LPF CUTOFF RESONANCE HPF EG INTENSITY EG RELEASE aa Bem DO ASSIGNABLE 1 ASSIGNABLE 2 ASSIGNABLE3 ASSIGNABLE 4 Z 1 2 3 4 2 Rotate the desired knob to control the sound etc A mode controls In A mode knobs 1 4 will control edit the following functions WA Placing the knobs in the center 12 o clock position will produce the values specified by the program parameters Knob 1 LPF CUTO FF Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter When you adjust the cutoff frequency of the filter the brightness of the sound will change The effect will depend on the settings of the program parameters but normally rotating the knob toward the left will darken the sound and rotating it toward the right will brighten it Level Frequency Low Cutoff High frequency lt gt l l l l LPF l Knob 2 RESO NAN CE HPF Adjust the resonance level of a low pass filter or the cutoff frequency of a high pass filter The content that is controlled will depend on the filter type specified by the program By adjusting the filter resonance level you can increase or decrease the resonance level to add a unique character to the sound Adjusting the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter will modify the fullness of the sound from which the low fre quency range has been filte
106. of each mode can be used while sampling Here are some examples e Sample a vocal from a mic and play it back using one shot playback e Apply insert effects to the audio input and sample the result e Name multisamples or samples e Save the data you sampled e Convert a multisample into a program e Sample and loop playback a drum phrase etc e In Program mode resample a phrase played by the arpeggiator e In Program mode listen to drum phrases played by the arpeggiator while you sample the external input from a guitar WA The example procedures described here begin from the initial settings of the TRITON STUDIO immedi ately after power on For other procedures and more detailed explanations refer to p 99 or PG p 87 Sampling a vocal from a mic and playing itas a one shot sample 1 Connect a mic and make input settings Input 1 Connect a mic to the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack located on the rear panel Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the MIC position and set the LEVEL knob to the center ON Mic MAX MIN 6 O 2 Press the SAMPLING key to enter Sampling mode 3 Press the Input Setup tab to select the P0 Recording Input Setup page SAMPLING P8 Recording Input P Analog SAMPLING Input Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt GM Pan Logg Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup input Setup MEA A Source BUS
107. of the TRITON STUDIO are sounded by two Tone Generators Each tone generator is connected to the various PCM memories as shown in the diagram below Tone Generator 1 e ROM Internal PCM ROM 32 Mbytes e RAM User sample memory 16 Mbytes expandable to a maximum of 96 Mbytes Tone Generator 2 e Piano Internal Piano PCM ROM 16 Mbytes e EXB PCM Expansion PCM ROM 16 Mbytes each maximum of 7 boards totaling 112 Mbytes PCM memory PCM memory Piano Internal Piano PCM ROM 16 Mbytes ROM Internal PCM ROM 32 Mbytes EXB PCM Expansion PCM ROM Slot1 16 Mbytes RAM 96 Mbytes User sample memory EXB PCM Expansion PCM ROM Slot7 16 Mbytes Expandable to a maximum Factory settings is 16 Mbytes Tone Generator 2 Tone Generator 1 Maximum 60 oscillators Maximum 60 oscillators Total maximum 120 oscillators Each tone generator is able to simultaneously sound up to 60 oscillators i e to play the PCM data connected to that tone generator Together the two tone generators are able to sound up to 120 oscillators However it is not possible for example to simulta neously play 61 or more oscillators from only the internal PCM ROM Number of voices in each mode The maximum number of voices that can be played simul taneously will depend on the oscillator mode of the pro gram e Fora Single Drum mode program 1 oscillator 1 voice e For a Double mode program 2 oscillators 1 voice
108. on combination Bank INT C086 Shiny DigiPiano Press the COMBI key the LED will light to enter Combination mode 2 Select INT C086 Shiny DigiPiano COMBINATION P Play Program Select Category DG Keyboard d 128 Bank INT C Timbre 2 086 Shiny DigiPiano Timbre 1 in E Eln Balt nk Program D a Dil ans si T T Hiser nopean ps cy Select This combination layers simultaneously sounds the programs of timbre 1 and timbre 2 A typical electric piano INT D017 Pro Stage EP is assigned to Timbre 1 and a digital type electric piano INT D049 Classic Tines is assigned to Timbre 2 These two programs are layered to create a frequently heard type of electric piano sound WA A timbre consists a of program together with multi ple parameters that control that program A combina tion can use up to eight of these timbres Selecting the program for a timbre 3 Press the Prog Select tab When a timbre s Status is turned Off the program assigned to that timbre will not sound If the Status is set to INT the program will sound Try setting timbres 1 and 2 alternately to INT and Off and listen to the result a timbre 1 will sound Di TA Sah TA A TA TA Te Pro Stati Classic T Thin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell pos St Noisy St ii T Dess i TA aA TA TA ii Pro Stati Classic T Thin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell Thin Bell Noisy St Noisy St After you have seoed to
109. or Song Play modes can t edit the value of Timbre Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or Status Some parameters cannot be edited during a note on condition i e while a note is held down on the keyboard or while the damper pedal is held down Are you using a damper pedal with a polarity that does not match the Damper Polarity setting Glo bal P2 Controller In some cases this problem can be solved be execut ing the page menu command Half Damper Cali bration Global P0 Basic Setup No beep is sounded when you touch the LCD screen Check the Beep Enable check box Global PO Basic Setup System Preference p 146 Audio input and output No sound Are connections made correctly to your amp mixer or headphones p 11 Is the connected amp or mixer powered on and is its volume raised C Is Local Control turned on In Global P1 MIDI check the Local Control On check box PG p 142 Is the VOLUME slider raised p 3 If there is no sound from the OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks make sure that BUS Select or Bus Select following the insert effect is set to 1 2 3 4 1 2 or 3 4 1 p 140 _ If specific tracks in Sequencer mode or Song Play mode do not sound Make sure that the PLAY MUTE REC button or PLAY MUTE button is set to PLAY p 83 123 Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH p 35 82
110. piano Select various programs and try this out amp Pitch Stretch cannot be used with bank INT F e OSC Balance Adjusts the level balance between oscillators 1 and 2 amp For programs whose Oscillator Mode Program P1 Edit Basic Program Basic page setting is Single oscillator 2 will not sound Only the level of oscillator 1 will change For a Drums program this perfor mance editor will have no effect e Amp Level Indicates the amp level This will adjust the volume of the entire program e Attack Time Indicates the attack time of the filter EG and amp EG This will adjust the speed of the attack from note on amp In order to maximize the effect of the Attack Time adjustment the amp EG Start Level Attack Level Start Level Modulation and Attack Time Modulation parameters are also adjusted e Decay Time Indicates the decay time and slope time of the filter EG and amp EG e IFX Balance This simultaneously adjusts the Wet Dry balance of all insert effect e MFX Balance This simultaneously adjusts the Return 1 and 2 parameters of the master effects amp Depending on the settings of the program parame ters the result may not be noticeable Realtime controls The REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 knobs can be used to edit parameters such as the filter cutoff frequency reso nance the amp and filter EG release volume portamento time pan pitch LFO and master effect send level etc
111. pitch at which it was sampled fe You can make this setting easily by holding down the ENTER key and pressing the C2 key If you want to use the numeric keys to input this setting press 3 6 and ENTER 3 Press the Preference tab to access the P0 Recording Preference page SAMPLING P Recording Create Zone Preference Position gt Right to Selected Index Zone Range Original Key Position gt Bottom REC Sample Preference Preference O Auto Loop On __ Auto 12dB On Metronome Setup BUS Output Select L R Level 127 k ing Setup Status 4 Set Zone Range to 1 Key When you create a new index the width of the zone will be set to one key Press the Auto Loop On check box to uncheck it Looping will automatically be turned off for the sam ple that is recorded 6 Record a sample Press the Recording tab to access the P0 Recording Recording page 2 Press the SAMPLING REC key Press the SAMPLING START STOP key to enter record ready mode Speak the word that you want to sample Example It s Recording will start when the input exceeds the Level 30dB level When you finish speaking press the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop sampling A sample has now been created The sample you recorded is automatically assigned to Sample Sam ple Select SAMPLING P Recording Teenie Sample Time A min 21 636 sec Sample
112. power OM E E E E E E T 125 Specifying the function of the ASSIGNABLE Switch md ASSIGNABLE Pedaliaceae n 125 Creating original SCalGS ixiscnscenessonad manyenaseocys 126 Drum Kit SettingS aissadis baiana onia 127 About drumi Kit 25 55 eacos caansuasondedvaaneeraeaabusiaades 127 Editine a drun kifer A 128 Arpeggiator settings cscsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 130 Arpeggiator settings for a program s s 130 PEDESOALOMON ON orsakerna 130 ALpeeeidtOr set esis trntana ere 130 Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer TOGO iara a cures tinue OT 132 Arpegeiator On Off sediri iin 132 Arpeggiat r seting Suerciscouiiiiierosr aiei 132 Creating an user arpeggio pattern cee 134 About user arpeggio patterns sesssseseseseseee 134 Editing a user arpeggio pattern ccc eee 134 Dual arpeggiator editing scssnciccsiieieinnians 137 Synchronizing the arpeggiator cece 138 Synchronization between arpeggiators A ATIC git aacic E eames een eet 138 Synchronization between the arpeggiators and sequencer in Sequencer or Song Play mode 138 Synchronization with an external sequencer in Program Combination or Sequencer modes 138 Effects SCTUINGS ccs cote daereneeiesieee read anual 139 Effects in each Mode saeir iede 139 Routing settings and effect settings ee 140 Effect settings for a program seeeseeseseese 140 Effect settings in Combination Song and Song Play MOUS Rapa n aE 141 Effect
113. program parameters Just as the character and effect processing of a melodic instrument such as piano organ trumpet or strings is fundamentally different from that of percussion instru ments such as drums or timpani the program parameter structure of a multisample program Oscillator Mode Single or Double is fundamentally different from that of a drum kit program Oscillator Mode Drums The program parameters of a multisample specify filter and amp settings etc appropriate for a multisample For this reason it is difficult to convert such a program for use with a drum kit Thus if you wish to edit a drum kit you should first use Program mode to select a program that uses a drum kit Oscillator Mode Drums and then move to the Global P5 Drum Kit page 127 Basic functions System Drum kit settings settings Editing a drum kit amp Before editing a drum kit uncheck the Memory Pro tect p 57 In Prgoram P0 Play select the program that you wish to use while editing the drum kit Select a drum kit program from the preload programs etc If the drum kit that you will be editing is already being used by a program select that program In the separate VNL programs that use a drum kit are marked by a symbol amp Set Octave Program P1 Edit Basic OSC Basic page to 0 8 With a setting other than 0 8 the relationship between the keys and the sound
114. result By using a multisample you can record separate samples for each pitch range and assign these samples to their respec tive pitch ranges to avoid any unnatural sounds during playback Analog digital AUDIO INPUT jack convertor Insert Effects oo signal CDRW 1 Audio CD Digital signal Analog signal Ripping S P DIF IN jack mLAN jack Used by combinations and songs Program Sample 0000 3999 All of the instrumental sounds in the TRITON STUDIO s internal preset ROM multisamples are constructed in this way For example you might record one sample per octave and assign each of these samples to an index key board area By assigning multiple samples such as phrase samples or rhythm loops to a multisample and arranging them across the keyboard you can play multiple samples simulta neously Since a different phrase could be assigned to each key you can perform just as though you were using a pad type sampler Alternatively these samples could be assigned at one octave intervals and played as phrase variations with different playback pitches The TRITON STUDIO can hold a maximum of 1 000 mul tisamples in its internal memory A multisample can be selected as the oscillator for a pro gram and played as a program In a combination they can be combined with preset programs and used in a multi They can be used with the arpeggiator to produce interesting results for example by using the arpeggiator
115. sampling frequency Please wait until the sound is heard If audio cannot be input from the mLAN connector if the EXB mLAN is installed have the mLAN plug settings been made correctly PG p 139 141 Is the correct sampling frequency being input from the mLAN connector if the EXB mLAN is installed PG p 139 141 Asampling frequency of 48 kHz can be input Can t output sound from an audio CD Make sure that you have selected the Disk mode Play Audio CD page or Sampling mode Make sure that the audio outputs of your external SCSI CD R RW drive are connected to the AUDIO INPUT jacks p 102 Is the CD output being correctly input If you want to listen to the audio CD playback in the Disk mode Play Audio CD page set Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK to Analog and make the appropriate settings for Level and BUS IFX Indiv Select If you want to listen to the audio CD playback in Sampling mode make these settings in Input GAMPLING p 102 C Is the Volume slider raised Disk mode Play Audio CD page Sampling P5 Audio CD Ripping page p 120 174 Has the CD been finalized A CD R RW disc that you wrote using the Disk mode Make Audio CD page cannot be played in the Disk mode Play Audio CD page or in Sampling mode unless you have finalized the disc Execute the page menu command Finalize Audio CD to finalize the disc PG p 174 Excessive n
116. settings in Sampling mode ce 142 Effect settings for AUDIO INPUT 143 About dynamic modulation Dmod 144 Other TUNCHONS sinoi 145 Setting the function of SW1 and SW2 145 Setting the B mode functions of REALTIME CONTROLS FH ecran 145 Adjusting the contrast brightness of the LCD E EE EA E OT ES 145 Sounding a beep when the LCD screen is Pressed anirno n a R a N 146 Using the TRITON STUDIO as a data filer 146 Setting the calendar fUNCTION eects 146 SUOMI CUUS saseusssscisuiamiraduetin E wearin aivan 146 Appendices cccceeeeeees 147 Troubleshooting sssssssssnsssnsnnnnnnsnnnrnrrnnns 147 POwWErSUDP I e E T 147 EE BE EE E E E E T 147 Audio input and OU LDU biide tiesbutincecesteebatreaes 147 Program Combination sisissisirsisisieiirssiiiiiavessrssss 149 SONO E AE ENA 149 DANS ra E ent 149 Pran RS a a AE EER 150 PE DOR glAN aniey ra EEn EAEE RAE 150 FECTS a EE EAE 150 MD eer errr inn ce errr ere aren eee te ee 151 Medid sists devas aseene a A 151 WAVE MESS uinna a a rsanasteatdnc ede teateaeea 152 CDOT E E E tases Draubtlopeetean tuchsanectssoue 152 Specifications and Options csceesesseseeeees 153 PEN CANONS e aa meses ue enemas 153 OPONE saei ERE dosenieteoarealens 154 MIDI implementation chart 155 INDEX T E ce 156 vii viii EED pEr mE Jik ED pma Main features O verview The TRITON STUDIO is a music workstation sampler
117. so that the box is unchecked When the box is unchecked Mem ory Protect is off and data of this type may be written to internal memory Saving data d R Basic functions 57 About the Edit Buffer When you select a program or combination in Program PO Play and Combination P0 Play the program or combi nation data is called into the edit buffer When you modify the parameters in PO Play or in the Edit pages P1 P9 of Program mode or Combination mode the changes you make will affect the data in the edit buffer If you wish to save this modified data into internal mem ory you must perform the Write operation When you perform the Write operation the data in the edit buffer is written to the specified program number or combination number of the specified bank If you select another program or combination without writing the data of the newly selected program or combi nation will be called into the edit buffer and your changes will be lost amp When you press the COMPARE key in Program mode or Combination mode the data from memory i e the contents that were written into memory will be temporarily called into the edit buffer This allows you to compare the settings you are editing with the original un edited settings Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer Edit Buffer When you write the program or When yo
118. the order of its pitch regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes Unchecked the arpeggio will sound each note in the order in which you actually played the notes Setting the arpeggio to continue playing even after you have taken your hand off the keyboard You can select whether the arpeggio will continue playing when you take your hand off the keyboard or whether the arpeggio will stop Press the Latch check box in the LCD screen to make this setting Checked The arpeggio will continue playing even after you remove your hand from the keyboard Unchecked The arpeggio will stop playing when you remove your hand from the keyboard Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your key board timing You can specify whether the arpeggio will begin at the moment you play the keyboard or whether it will always play in synchronization to the MIDI clock tempo Press the Key Sync check box in the LCD screen to make this setting Checked When you take your hand completely off of the keyboard and then play the first note on the arpeg gio pattern will start from the beginning This setting is suitable when you want the arpeggio to start from the beginning of the measure as you are playing in real time Unchecked The arpeggio will always be synchronized to the MIDI clock tempo Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the notes you play Press the Keyboard check box to make this setting
119. the grid display select the page menu com mand Grid uncheck Grid and press the OK but ton WA The grid is displayed according to the playback pitch of the base key the key shown in gray in the Key board amp Index area You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard Sample waveform data editing Editing the waveform data of the sample is done in P1 Sample Edit You can use commands such as cut copy and normalize to edit the waveform data 1 Select the sample that you wish to edit Use Sample Select or Index in the P1 Sample Edit page or the PO Recording Recording page to select the sample p 106 amp If you use Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the index assignment will also change 2 Select the P1 Sample Edit page SAMPLING P1 Sample Edit Edit Range Start GO06666 a Edit Range End GA0AAAA Use Zero 4 zoom m Sampling START plays edit range orni i224 GPM RKI i A The waveform data of the currently selected sample will be displayed note Sample waveforms that were recorded with a Sam pling Mode of Stereo will be shown in two lines The upper line is the L channel waveform and the lower line is the R channel waveform 3 Use Edit Range Start and Edit Range End to spec ify the range that you wish to edit The selected range will be highlighted SAMPLING P1 Samp
120. the relationship between the notes and the instru ments of the drum kit will be shifted and the sequence will not play the correct rhythm instru ments Basic functions Producing songs 89 About editing Song editing In addition to copying and renaming a song other opera tions such as Delete can be performed from the Utility menu commands in pages such as Sequencer PO Play REC PG p 52 Track editing Event Editing allows you to edit or insert data in a recorded track In addition commands such as Create Control Data which lets you insert pitch bend aftertouch or control change data and other commands for deleting copying inserting or moving tracks can be accessed from the page menu command in the Sequencer P5 Track Edit PG p 68 Pattern editing Using the page menu commands of the Sequencer P6 Pat tern RPPR Pattern page you can use event editing to modify the recorded data or insert new data and execute commands to delete copy or bounce patterns PG p 77 Creating and playing a Cue List A cue list allows you to play multiple songs in succession For example you can create a separate song for each por tion introduction melody A melody B chorus and end ing of a composition and use the cue list to specify the order of each portion and the number of times that it will be repeated to complete the song If you want to change the structure of the song the cue list lets you do
121. the spud set the Status for timbres 1 and 2 to INT WA As an alternative to changing the Status setting you can select the page menu command Solo Selected Timbre to hear the sound of an individual timbre 4 Now let s change the program of timbre 2 to a differ ent program Press the timbre 2 Bank Program Program Select switch it will be pRO MEO pem m me mme seeen a me eae a be RE de Beis Mal Pe Be Bele Mal Fests Farts esboal Reuboad Belial Rainal Beina Belial Pastsud Pasteur nk Progra Nesscsssscessccssccbescesssccssscssscedhscsssccsssscssssssdscsssssssccessscesbsssccssscesssccsssbssscessscssscsssssfuacessssessssssssoslssssscessacassases Use the BANK INT A EXB G keys and VALUE controllers to select a program Alternatively you can select a program from a popup menu Press the popup button and select the desired program from the popup menu that appears 6 You can also select programs by category Press Cate gory popup button for timbre 2 The Category Timbre2 Program select menu will appear In this combination a program from the Key board category is selected for both timbres 1 and 2 Pers Di ai Pi ie 35 Quick Start Program Combination editing editing 36 O If you wish to select a different program from the same category press the desired program That pro gram will be highlighted Press the scroll bar to see other programs in the same cat
122. this data you must first save it before loading PRELOAD PCG p 59 PRELO AD SNG e Demonstration song and demonstration cue list data WA When you load PRELOAD SNG it will be written into internal sequencer memory This memory is vol atile and the data will be lost when the power is turned off amp Whether or not previously written data will be erased when you load PRELOAD SNG is determined by the Select SNG Allocation setting Refer to step of the procedure on p 20 PRELO AD KSC e Sample program data used by the demonstration songs WA When you load PRELOAD KSC its multisample sample data will be written into the TRITON STU DIO s sample memory RAM This data will be lost when the power is turned off amp Whether or not previously written data will be erased when you load PRELOAD KSC is determined by the Select KSC Allocation setting Refer to step of the procedure on p 20 Quick Start Demo song 21 Selecting and playing a program In Program mode you can select and play a program from Selecti ng the program bank banks INT A EXB G Here we will show how to select preset programs Try selecting various programs and hear how they sound In Program mode you can switch banks to select pro grams from another bank With the factory settings banks INT A INT D contain preloaded programs and banks G g 1 G 9 and g d contain preset programs table below x Press a PROG BA
123. time CC 73 Low pass filter cutoff CC 74 EG decay time CC 75 LFO1 speed CC 76 LFO1 depth pitch CC 77 LFO1 delay CC 78 Filter EG intensity CC 79 SW1 modulation CC 80 64 center 64 center 64 center 64 center 64 center 64 center 64 center 64 center 64 center Using the arpeggiator for pattern recording If the arpeggiator is set to operate for the track that is selected for Track Select you can turn on the ARPEG GIATOR ON OFF key and record the performance of the arpeggiator into the pattern For details on arpeggiator settings refer to p 94 and PG p 81 Basic functions Producing songs 87 88 Song editing methods A variety of editing operations can be performed on a song Here we will give some examples of how you can use various editing operations on the song you created in Producing a song p 49 to prepare for creating a cue list as described in the next section i Load the SEQ_DM1 SNG file that you saved on p 54 For the loading procedure refer to p 63 In the expla nations that follow we will assume that the song you created has been loaded into song S000 After loading the song press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode 1 Copying a song Here s how to copy a song This is convenient when you want to create different variations based on a song 1 Create a new song Access the Sequencer P0
124. track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Loop All Tracks If Multi REC is checked it will not be possible to select Loop All Tracks sissies R ecor d 1 n g 5 e t u p Bie O Over Write O Auto Punch In C Over Dub Loop All Tracks Maa RE O Manual Punch In i Renuvo PAR In M Loop Start Measure M Loop End Mea sure specify the area that you wish to record For example if you specify M004 M008 recording will occur repeatedly as a loop from measure 4 to measure 8 4 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 6 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin When you reach the starting loca tion you specified in step recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joy stick to record your performance When you reach the ending location you specified in step you will return to the starting location and continue recording The musical data that is loop recorded will be added to the previously recorded data 6 You can also erase specific data even while you con tinue loop recording If you press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key dur ing loop recording all musical will be removed from the currently selected track as long as you continue pressing the key By checking the Remove Data
125. use a different program for each of up to eight timbres and combine two or more of the above methods to create even more complex setups Program A Program B Program D Strong Keyboard playing Program C Soft dynamics Example B and C D are split In the lower keyboard range A and B are layered In the higher keyboard range C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A As an additional possibility you can set the slope for a key zone or velocity zone so that the volume diminishes grad ually This lets you change a split into a keyboard cross fade or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade Keyboard X Fade keyboard crossfade As you play from low notes to high notes the volume of A will fade out and the volume of B will fade in Program B Program A ESSO NAAM The Compare function As you are editing a combi you can use the COMPARE key to listen to the previously saved version as it was before you began editing Pressing COMPARE again the light goes dark returns you to the version you are editing amp If you continue editing when the COMPARE key LED is lit the LED will go dark and the current set ting will now be the sound that is recalled when the COMPARE key LED is dark Timbre 1 8 program pan and volume P1 Edit Program Mixer Here you can assign programs to each timbre 1 8 and set the pan and volume for each one These settings can also be made
126. use event editing to modify data that has been recorded or to insert data and use track editing operations such as Create Control Data to insert data such as bend after touch and control changes Recording a pattern There are two ways to record a pattern realtime record ing and step recording For realtime recording only one recording type loop is available In addition you can use event edit operations to modify data that has been recorded or to insert data The page menu command Get From Track can be used to take musical data from a desired area of a track and use it as the musical data for a pattern Conversely the page menu commands Put to Track and Copy to Track can be used to place or to copy the musical data of a pattern in a track Realtime recording on a track This is a method of recording in which your playing on the keyboard and your operations of controllers such as the joystick are recorded in realtime This method of recording is normally used one track at a time and is called single track recording As an alternative multitrack recording allows you to simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto multiple tracks This is the method you will use when using the RPPR function and the arpeggiator function to record multiple tracks of musical data at once or when you playback existing sequence data on an external sequencer and record it onto TRITON STUDIO s sequencer in realtime p
127. use the MIDI channel that is selected for Track Select 4 To turn off the RPPR function uncheck the RPPR check box Play RPPR while a song plays back RPPR can be played in synchronization with the playback of a song Pattern playback for a key with a Sync setting of SEQ will synchronize to the playback of the song PG p 80 Sync Start the song playback and then press the key The pat tern playback will start in synchronization with the mea sures of the song amp Synchronization will be lost if you use the lt lt REW or FF gt gt keys while a song is playing vJRPPR gt RPPR function is on _ RPPR gt Normal song playback and recording cto last User Pattern U00 U99 assigned P6 Rattern RPPR RPPR Setup 93 Basic functions Producing songs 94 is i you want RPPR pattern playback to begin at the moment that song playback begins it is a good idea to insert an empty measure containing no musical data before the song playback begins RA If the song is stopped the pattern will synchronize to the timing of the arpeggiator function Realtime recording an RPPR performance An RPPR performance can be recorded in realtime If you are using only one track Track01 Drums as in Creating and recording RPPR p 92 set Track Select to Track01 Drums and use single track recording in which only one track will be recorded Even if RPPR uses onl
128. ve Schwann When you play the keyboard as shown in the illustra tion the arpeggiator will begin playing Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of chord you play on the keyboard If Sort is unchecked it will correspond to the pitch of the first note you play For steps 01 08 make settings for Pitch Offset Gate Velocity and Flam Pitch Offset This offsets the pitch of the arpeggio note in semitones up or down You can input the same tone for each step and change the Pitch Offset value for each to create a melody using a single tone Melody pattern Gate Specifies the length of the arpeggio note for each step With a setting of Legato the note will con tinue sounding either until the next note of the same tone or until the end of the pattern With a setting of Off the note will not sound Velocity Specifies the strength of the note With a setting of Key the note will sound at the strength with which it was actually played amp The Gate and Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page of the program selected in Program mode are set to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and all notes of the arpeggio will sound
129. way to audition individual sounds of timbres that are layered PG p 35 Controller Setup P4 4 Arpeggiator P7 Master Effect 1 2 P9 MasterEQ P9 AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 P1 1 or P2 2 etc indicate pages or tab screens used on this instrument for editing Basic functions Program Combination settings settings 76 Layer split and velocity switch Within a combination you can use key position and veloc ity to determine which program will sound The programs assigned to each timbre can sound in three ways as part of a layer a split or a velocity switch A combination can be set to use any one of these methods or to use two or more of these methods Layer Layer refers to settings which cause two or more pro grams to sound simultaneously when a note is played Layer Two or more programs sound simultaneously SETH TUE eT Split Split refers to settings which cause different programs to sound on different areas of the keyboard Program B Program A Split Different programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard Velocity sw itch Velocity Switch refers to settings which cause different programs to sound depending on the velocity keyboard playing dynamics Strong Keyboard playing Program A Soft dynamics Velocity Switch Keyboard playing dynamics velocity switches between different programs On TRITON STUDIO you can
130. will show the input volume If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE con troller to lower the Recording Level slider located in the right of the display from the 0 0 setting down to an appropriate level 3 When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC key again 37 Quick Start Combination Sampling editing 3 Specify the recording method Recording Setup 1 Set Source BUS to L R Now you can sample the sound of the L R channels which is output from the headphones and from AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input 1 Level 127 _ BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt L R Pan LOGG Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 input Setup MEA Trigger P Threshold Level 30 dB 2 Set Trigger to Threshold and set Level to 30 With this setting recording will begin automatically when the audio input reaches 30 dB or higher in record ready mode 3 Set Pre Trigger to 005 ms With this setting sample recording will begin 5 ms ear lier than i e immediately before sampling is actually triggered so that the very beginning of the sound is not lost fe In Sampling mode the Trigger parameter which specifies how recording will begin can be set to vari ous settings other than the Threshold setting used above You can choose Sampling START SW so that
131. 0 Cto last assigned 4 Use KEY to select the key to which the pattern will be assigned Select C 2 This can also be selected by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note C2 and lower keys are used to stop playback and can not be assigned 6 Check the Assign check box 6 Set Pattern Bank to the Preset pattern type and set Pattern Select to pattern P121 HipHop 1 HipHop T Set Track to Track01 Drums The selected pattern will be played according to the settings program etc of the track you select here Assign patterns to other keys For KEY press the A key to select D2 Press the REVERT button The settings for Assign Pattern Pattern Bank Pattern Select and Track will be set to the values that were specified earlier in steps Choose Pattern Select and press the A key to select P122 HipHop 2 HipHop IE By using REVERT in this way you can work effi ciently when the patterns to be assigned have consec utive or nearby numbers or use the same track SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup EEk A P 5004 Hip Hop Rap J 996 P Tracka1 Drums A 6S HipHop Kit RPPR Setup KEY D2 LY Assign Mode Manual Shift 00 C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync P Beat cto last assigned Use the above method to assign several patterns from the range of P123 HipHop 3 HipHop P135 HipHop 15 HipHop 9 Pres
132. 0 42 Alternate Modulation 74 Amp _ 68 73 Amp EG 72 73 Amp Level 34 73 Amp Mod 73 Keyboard Track 73 LFO 73 Amp EG 27 34 73 Amplifier 34 68 72 AMS Alternate Modulation Source 71 72 73 74 Append 20 66 Arpeggiator 2 5 29 45 46 51 74 80 87 94 123 130 132 150 ASSIGNABLE PEDAL 7 11 28 125 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH 7 11 28 84 91 125 Audio CD 5 109 118 148 152 AUDIOINPUT 6 11 37 42 46 48 102 109 115 139 143 148 Audio input output Analog 11 42 102 108 Digital 7 11 102 108 Auto 12 dB On 105 Auto punch in 84 Auto pan 71 73 74 B Bank 4 17 22 24 64 BANK key 4 Base key 111 146 Bit resolution 100 BPM 44 78 112 144 BUS Select 6 47 48 109 115 129 140 141 142 C Calendar function 146 Cancel button 4 9 Category 8 23 24 35 69 82 128 140 CD R RW 6 19 59 60 108 118 151 156 Check box 9 Combination 1 13 16 24 31 35 56 63 75 102 132 139 141 149 Compare 17 68 76 97 COMPARE key 17 Connection 10 Controller 25 29 53 79 87 98 Copy 14 67 88 96 131 Copy the sounds of a combination to multiple tracks 95 Create Control Data 86 Cue List 21 81 90 92 Current page 8 Cutoff frequency 26 71 D DAMPER 7 11 28 78 Damper Pedal 28 Data dump 55 62 Delete Specific data 85 87 Demo song 20 Dialog 9 DIGITAL OUT 7 11 Disk 14 16 60 64 102 118 Dmod 144 Drum Kit 58 69 73 128 150 Drum sample 128 150
133. 0 089 can be selected for IFX1 2 3 4 5 and MFX1 and 2 Effects 090 102 are double size effects and require twice the processing area of other effects These can be selected for IFX2 IFX3 and IFX4 2S You can use the Copy Insert Effect page menu com mand to copy effect settings from another program etc Also you can use Swap Insert Effect to exchange for example IFX1 and IFX5 6 Press the ON OFF button to turn on the insert effect Each time you press the button the insert effect will be switched on off When OFF the result will be the same as when 000 No Effect is selected The input sound will be output without change T Make Chain settings If the Chain check box is checked the insert effect will be connected in series Since the output of the oscillator is being sent to IFX1 in making settings as shown in the diagram 4 would connect all five inser tion effects IFX1 IFX2 IFX3 IFX4 IFX5 in series so that these effects would be inserted into the output of the oscillator Make settings for Pan CC 8 BUS Sel BUS Select Send 1 and Send 2 for the sound after it has passed through the insert effects If the insert effects are chained these settings will apply after the last IFX Pan Sets the pan This is valid only when BUS Sel is L R BUS Sel BUS Select Specifies the output destina tion Normally you will set this
134. 1 094 D 2 V 127 L 900 097 BT 01 191 E2 V 127 L 000094 BT 02 093 F2 V 127 L 000098 BT 02 191 F 2 V 127 L 000 094 In the P6 Pattern RPPR Pattern Edit page press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback of pattern U00 When you press the C 2 key in the P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page the RPPR function will start playing pattern U00 In the same way as in step 8 changing the playback tempo will not affect the pitch Sampling in Program Combina tion or Sequencer modes External audio sources can be sampled from the various input jacks in Program Combination and Sequencer modes as well A performance in the above modes can also be internally resampled in digital form You can resample a perfor mance that uses the TRITON STUDIO s full range of fea tures filters effects arpeggiator and sequencer You can also sample the TRITON STUDIO s performance together with audio from an external input source or monitor the performance of the TRITON STUDIO s arpeggiator and sequencer etc while you sample only the external audio from the input jacks In Sequencer mode you can sample external audio while listening to a song play back and automatically create note data in the track that will play the sample when the track is played back This allows you to sample vocals or guitar while the sequencer runs just as though you were using a multitrack recorder This function is called In Track Sampling
135. 2 MFX2 000 Sampling Setup z Source BUS gt L R Recording Level dB Save to P RAM_Mode Stereo Sample Time min 10 923 sec 3 Use Input to select the input source If you want to sample the input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks set Input to Analog If you want to sample the input from the S P DIF IN jack set Input to S P DIF If you want to sample the input from the mLAN con nector set Input to mLAN selectable if the EXB mLAN option is installed amp If Input is set to S P DIF or mLAN an Obey Copyright Rules dialog box will appear Carefully read About copyright p iii and if you accept the terms press the OK button to continue with set tings If you do not accept the terms press the Cancel button to cancel the setting Obey Copyright Rules Are you sure EA if you want to sample analog audio from an audio CD inserted in the CDRW 1 option set Input to Analog and adjust the Level etc 4 For Input1 and Input2 set BUS IFX Indiv to spec ify the destination to which the external audio signal you selected in Input will be sent L R Send to the L R bus IFX1 IFX5 Send to the corresponding insert effect 1 4 1 2 3 4 Send to the INDIVIDUAL 1 4 1 2 or 3 4 bus es Use Level to adjust the signal level Normally you will set this to 127 Use Pan to specify the stereo position In the Input section
136. 61 T rand Piano 4 Keyboar Strings Brass FastSyn FastSyn i FastSyn FastSun FastSun i i i Transpose i i EM 612 12 soo soo soo 00 i seseennnnnnnnnnee l sees Detune Use BPM Adj in Page Menu 0000 6008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 oa Transpose Detune BPM Adjust These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre e Ina layer type combination you can set two or more timbres to the same program and create a richer sound by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch between the two e Insplit type combinations you can use Transpose to shift the pitch in semitone units of the programs specified for each key zone e If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum program use Detune If you change the Transpose setting the relationship between notes and drum sounds will change Pitch E Combination Basic functions settings 78 Adjusting the BPM of multisamples or samples cre ated in Sampling mode If a timbre s program uses multisamples or samples that you created in Sampling mode or loaded in Disk mode at a specific BPM value you can use the page menu com mand Detune BPM Adjust to call up a new BPM value This changes the BPM by adjusting the playback pitch PG p 39 Other page COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param Bank EXB A 688 Initial
137. 7 User programs EXB PCM series programs R INT A INT D Selecting a program number With the factory settings these banks contain a wide 2 Make sure that Program Select is selected variety of pr eloaded programs that use the internal If this is not selected press Program Select to high a ea BIO pat light it aac 3 Use the VALUE controllers to select the program that INT E you wish to play This bank is used to store programs that you created f le f les that ted You can use the following methods to select a program i a a ae a e Turn the VALUE dial IN TF a e Press the A or V key This can be selected only if the EXB MOSS option is e Use numeric keys 0 9 to specify the number installed If the option is not installed INT F cannot be and press the ENTER key selected 4 Audition the sound G g 1 g 9 g d l Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound you These banks contain 128 capital programs 128 varia esa tion programs and 9 drum programs all compatible l l with the GM sound map The programs of these banks Try oper ating various contr ollers to hear how the are all read only These programs are preset programs sound will change p 25 Each time you press the G key the bank will change in the following order Gg 1 gt g 2 gt g 3 gt 8 4 gt 8 5 gt 8 6 gt 2 7 gt 2 8 gt g 9 gt g d gt G The LED will light and the corresponding bank G g 1 g 9 g d will b
138. 712 2001 Soft yet smooth 448 29 12 2001 Brash Tpts amp Choir 448 29 12 2601 Stereo Mallets 443 29 12 2061 gt FDD TNSFD G P Save Utility Make AudioCD I LAudioCD Info 4 RA When you press the keyboard of the TRITON STU DIO the selected combination will sound However the internal programs will be used as the program of each timbre 2 Press the page menu button and select the Load Selected page menu command The dialog box will appear Load a Combination Combination gt l D024 Rock Organ Combination gt Use the Combination upper line to select the load source combination and use To Combina tion lower line to specify the destination combina tion For this example select A000 Combi I A000 4 Press the OK button to load the data A000 will now be Rock Organ Contents of the included floppy disk The TRITON STUDIO comes with one floppy disk TNSFD 00P The disk contains the following data TN SFD 00P PRELOAD PCG already loaded when the TRITON STU DIO is shipped e Programs bank I A I B I C I D I E e Combinations bank I A I B I C I D e Drum Kits 000 015 I A B 128 143 User e Arpeggio Patterns 000 199 I A B 312 506 User This is the preloaded data programs combinations drum kits arpeggio patterns global settings Basic functions Loading PCG files and SNG files from the floppy disks included with
139. BUS Select Here you can specify the bus insert effect to which the output of each timbre will be sent The routing insert effects and chain settings are shown graphically in the upper part of the display screen In this example T01 timbre 1 uses IFX1 and 2 T02 uses IFX2 T03 uses IFX3 and 4 T02 and T05 use IFX4 and T06 and T07 use IFX5 Selection of each effect type the on off setting and chain settings are made in the Insert Effect page Send1 Send2 specifies the send level from each timbre to the master effects This can be set only if IFX Indiv Out BUS Select is set to L R or Off amp The actual send level is determined by multiplying this by the Send 1 or Send 2 settings for oscilla tors 1 and 2 within the program selected by the tim bre If the program parameter Send 1 or Send 2 is set to 0 the resulting level will still be 0 even if you raise this send level If IFX Indiv Out BUS Select is set to IFX1 5 the send levels to the master effects are set by Send 1 and Send 2 Insert FX page following the insert effects Insert effects Select an effect for IFX1 IFX5 and set Pan CC 8 BUS Sel BUS Select Send 1 and Send 2 for the signal that has passed through each insert effect If effects are chained the settings after the last IFX in the chain will be used Send 1 and Send 2 adjust the amount of master
140. Bank EXB A GGG InitialCombEAGaa ALLE I C 61 C Grand Piano a 4 Kesboar Strings Brass iFastSyn iFastSyn i FastSyn i Fast5un FastSun Status i me De Dien Dyer Dp sr pe Biv Bee a SEEE PITENEE i MIDI Channel CCOO a4 a5 e Status Here you can specify the MIDI status of the internal tone generator assigned to each timbre Normally when play ing the internal tone generator of TRITON STUDIO you will set this to INT Set this to Off for timbres that you are not using With settings of Off EXT or EX2 TRITON STUDIO will not sound With settings of EXT or EX2 you can control an external tone generator connected via MIDI PG p 38 MIDI Channel Timbres that you wish to play from TRITON STUDIO s keyboard must be set to the global MIDI channel Your playing on the keyboard is transmitted on the global MIDI channel and will sound any timbre that matches this channel Normally you will set this to Gch When this is set to Gch the MIDI channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI channel even if you change the global MIDI channel amp On some preloaded combinations that use the arpeg giator timbres assigned to the arpeggiator may not have a Status of INT and MIDI Ch of Gch The reason for this is that these settings are for timbres that sound only when the arpeggiator is on This is a very useful technique for creating combinations that use the arpeggiator Refer to Arpeggiator s
141. C R BPM Delay BPM 126 L Delay Base Note Jf Times x3 Level 26 C Delay Base Note d Times x1 Level 20 R Delay Base Note J Times x1 Level 20 Feedback C Delay 10 Sre sw 1 cc s0 amt ER High Damp a Low Damp a FX a Time Over gt Input Level Dmod 100 Sre sty cc at Spread 50 Wet Dry sa s Sre off Amt 0 q FX 1 2 3 d 5 144 When you move the joystick away from yourself and press the SW1 key the feedback level will increase and the delay sound will continue for a longer time The Amt setting specifies the feedback level that will be in effect when the SW1 key is pressed If Amt is set to 10 pressing the SW1 key will reduce the feed back level to 0 Using the BPM MIDI Sync function to synchronize the delay time to arpeggiator tempo changes Set BPM to MIDI For L C and R set Delay Base Note and Times as desired For this example set Delay Base Note to J and Times to x1 so that the effect will be easily under standable The delay time will repeat at an interval of a 8th note PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect L C R BPM Delay BPM MIDI L Delay Base Note Times x1 Level 26 IFX1 a Time Over gt C Delay Base Note Times x1 Level 26 R Delay Base Note Times M Level 20 Feedback C Delay sre Sw 1 CC 80 Amt 30 High Damp Low Damp a Input Level Dmod 188 __ Sre us v
142. COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK you can specify the send levels Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 to master effects 1 and 2 These settings can be made if BUS IFX Indiv is L R or Off amp Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 cannot be set in Sampling mode e The input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack is set by Input1 and the input from the AUDIO INPUT 2 jack is set by Input2 e The L channel of the input from the S P DIF IN jack is set by Input1 and the R channel is set by Input2 e Of the input from the mLAN connector mLANT is set by Input1 and mLAN2 is set by Input2 Example Send the signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack in mono to the L R bus Input1 BUS IFX Indiv L R Level 127 Pan L000 Example Send the signal from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks in stereo to the L R bus Input1 BUS IFX Indiv L R Level 127 Pan L000 Input2 BUS IFX Indiv L R Level 127 Pan R127 amp When BUS IFX Indiv is changed from Off to L R or IFX please be aware that the volume level of the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks and the head phones may rise excessively 2 Setting the recording level Recording Level dB 1 Produce sound at the volume that you want to record If you are inputting from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks gradually turn the LEVEL knob from the MIN position toward MAX Set the level immediately below the point where the disp
143. D or to perform the test If you do not accept the terms press the Cancel button to cancel the opera tion Obey Copyright Rules Are you sure amp In order to avoid causing errors do not subject the drive to physical shock or vibration while CD R RW media is being written 6 An audio CD to which audio tracks have been writ ten and which has been finalized can be played in the Play Audio CD page allowing you to hear the CD you created Press the Play Audio CD tab to access the Play Audio CD page Play Audio CDs Drive gt CDD Audio CD Volume Track 1 05 21 08 vig ip Efe Sequencer START plays selected track z Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK 3 Input Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select L R Pan LOGG Sendi MFX1 00A Send2 MFX2 000 Input2 i Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select LZR Pan R127 Sendi MFX1 000 Send2 MFX2 000 eee E In Drive select your CD R RW drive Drive will indicate Audio CD 1 PG p 156 Make the following settings to allow monitoring Basic functions Input Analog Input1 BUS IFX Indiv L R Level 127 Pan L000 Input2 BUS IFX Indiv L R Level 127 Pan R127 Volume 127 Use Track to select the track and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to begin playback Saving a track list that you have completed or par tially edited amp The track list will be lost w
144. DIO features a Touch View system that uses a touch panel LCD screen By touching on objects that are shown in the LCD screen you can select pages tabs and parameters and set values p 8 10 EXIT key When a dialog box is open this key will cancel the set tings made in the dialog box and close the dialog box cor responds to the Cancel button If a popup menu or page menu is open pressing EXIT will close the menu When in P page 1 9 of each mode pressing the EXIT key will move to P page 0 of that mode 11 MENU key Use this key to move between pages When you press the MENU key a list of the pages in the mode will appear in the LCD screen Press the desired page and you will move to that page You can also move to a page by hold ing down the MENU key and pressing the correspond ing numeric key 0 9 p 16 12 BANK keys These keys are used to switch the program combination bank PROG BANK SMPL MOSS GM PROG COMBI BANK PROG BANK IN T A J IN T B IN T C IN T D IN T E SM PL INT F M O SS INT G G M EXB A EXB B EXB C EXB D EXB E EXB F EXB G COMBI BANK IN T A IN T B IN T C IN T D IN T E EXB A EXB B EXB C EXB D EXB E EXB F EXB G In Program mode these keys select the program bank In Combination mode these keys select the combination bank When assigning a program to the variou
145. DIO when it is shipped from the factory You are free to rewrite this data and with the exception of the demo songs the data will be written to the location listed in Writing to internal memory This data is also stored in the internal hard disk and on the included floppy disk except for the demo songs e Program banks INT A INT D 000 127 e Combination banks INT A INT D 000 127 e User drum kits 000 I A B 015 I A B 128 User 131 User e User arpeggio patterns U000 I A B 199 I A B U312 User U478 User e Demo songs S000 S006 Preset data is data that cannot be rewritten by the Write operation This includes the following data Program banks G g 1 g 9 g d 001 128 Preset drum kits 144 GM 152 GM Preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 Preset template songs POO P15 Preset patterns POOO P149 Writing to internal memory Writing a program or combination The programs or combinations that you create by using the Performance Editor or by editing parameters in the various Edit pages can be saved in the internal memory of the TRITON STUDIO This action is referred to as writ ing a program or writing a combination If you want your edited data to be preserved after the power is turned off you must write it There are two ways to write a program or combination amp Before you write data into memory you must turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode Memory protect
146. E 4 Bee 10 11 13 14 15 Use the REALTIME CONTROLS key to select A or B mode for the realtime controllers and use knobs 1 4 to control the tone effects and MIDI control changes etc in realtime p 26 REALTIME CONTROLS key This key selects either A or B mode for the realtime con trollers The selected mode will light 1 knob 2 knob 3 knob 4 knob In A mode the function of each knob is fixed 1 is the low pass filter cutoff frequency 2 is the filter resonance level or the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter 3 is the filter EG intensity and 4 is the filter amp release time In B mode each knob will control the function that was assigned to it in the Program Combination Sequencer Song Play or Sampling modes 6 Mode keys Use these keys to enter the desired mode When you press a key the LED will light and you will enter the mode whose key you pressed p 16 CO MBI key COMBI PROG Combination mode will be selected PROG key SEQ SAMPLING Program mode will be selected S PLAY GLOBAL SEQ key Sequencer mode will be selected DISK COMPARE Front amp rear panel SAMPLING key Sampling mode will be selected S PLAY key Song Play mode will be selected GLOBAL key Global mode will be selected DISK key Disk mode will be selected 7 COMPARE key Use this key when you wish to compare the sound of the program or combinatio
147. EC key will cause the amount of space specified by Sample Time to be allocated within the hard disk You should set Sample Time slightly longer than the length that you will actually sample and avoid specifying an excessively long sample time Drum kits The pitch of a drum sample does not change You have left the Assign check box unchecked and want to play the drum sample at the adjacent right a semitone lower but the pitch does not change If you have selected a drum program in Program mode and then want to edit the drum kit in Global mode go to the Program P2 Edit Pitch OSC1 Pitch Mod page and set Pitch Slope to 1 0 before you enter Global mode Arpeggiator Arpeggiator does not start L Is the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key turned on lit _ If the arpeggiator does not start for a combination or song make sure that Arpeggiator Run is checked and that an arpeggiator is selected for Assign amp p 28 PG p 44 82 130 C Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI parameter set to Internal PG p 143 L If the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key does not respond in Global P6 User Arpeggio you may have moved here from Sampling mode or Disk mode Effects Effects are not applied Have you selected effect program 000 Select an effect other than 000 No Effect for IFX1 5 or MEX 1 2 Are the IFX 1 5 Off MFX1 Off or
148. EXB A EXB G However bank INT F is available only if the EXB MOSS option is installed e Combination Combinations 0 127 in banks INT A INT E EXB A EXB G e Global settings Global P0 Basic Setup P4 Category Name e User drum kits 00 I A B 143 User e User arpeggio patterns U000 I A B U506 User e User template songs U00 U15 Song settings such as the song name and tempo track settings p 81 arpeggiator settings and effect set tings can be saved written to internal memory How ever the musical data for song tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory Furthermore settings that govern how the musical data is played back such as Meter Metronome Play Mute Track Play Loop including Start End measure and RPPR set tings will not be saved either Use the Sequencer mode page menu command Save Template Song to write this data PG p 54 amp If multisamples or samples from the RAM bank are used in the Multisample or Drum Kit of a program you should be aware that these multisamples or sam ples cannot be written into memory This means that if you turn the power of and then on once again pro grams or combinations that use such multisamples or samples will not sound as intended To reproduce such programs or combinations the necessary multi samples or samples must be saved on media such as floppy disk hard disk CD R RW and removable disk etc and then reloaded
149. I A B U199 I A B U312 User U506 User contain a wide vari ety of preloaded user arpeggio patterns For the arpeggio pattern names VNL Choose Pat Pattern Select and use the VALUE slider VALUE dial A V keys and popup menu to select an arpeggio pattern User arpeggio patterns can also be selected by using the numeric keys 0 9 to input the pattern number and then pressing the ENTER key p 130 Changing the note value of the arpeggiated notes The Reso Resolution parameter in the LCD screen lets you set the note value of the arpeggiated notes over a range from i J Press Reso and use the VALUE slider VALUE dial A V keys or popup menu to select the desired arpeggio note interval Selecting the octave range in which the arpeggio is sounded Use the Octave radio buttons in the LCD screen to spec ify the range of octaves in which the arpeggio will be sounded p 131 Press an Octave radio button to make your selec tion Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the pitches in the chord you played You can select whether the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded in the order of the pitches in the chord you played regardless of the order in which you actually played the notes or in the order in which you played the notes Press the Sort check box in the LCD screen to make this setting Checked the arpeggio will sound each note in
150. I Clock Global P1 MIDI is set to External MIDI or External mLAN the display will indicate EXT This setting lets you synchronize the tempo with an external MIDI device In this case it will not be possible to change the tempo on the TRITON STU DIO In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern You can select from preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 and user arpeggio patterns U000 I A B U506 User The way in which the pattern is played will depend on settings such as Octave and Sort P000 P004 in the following diagrams show how the arpeggio will be played when Octave is set to 1 and Sort is checked P004 RANDOM is only one possibility 130 P000 UP P001 DOWN P002 ALT1 Ta P003 ALT2 P004 RANDO M oni T U000 I A B U199 I A B With the factory settings various arpeggio patterns are preloaded These include a variety of patterns such as drum or bass phrases or guitar or keyboard backing riffs VNL U200 E A U311 E G With the factory settings these do not contain patterns U312 User U506 User When the TRITON STUDIO is shipped from the factory arpeggio patterns are preloaded in some of these memo ries Octave 4 4 Adjust the settings of the various parameters Octave Selects the octave range in which the arpeg gio will be played
151. IDI Channel E S moan ae n EEE T A asesansssaasannsaaiaanasaacaanacaaeaaMasaaansseaaasnssaaiansasaasaansacasaeMacaaasnsaaaaanssaalaasacacaaasscasaaaMacsasassccaansacalansaacsasasaacaaad If aak Run A and B are checked and the arpeggiator is assigned to a track make sure that MIDI Channel is set to other than 01 M Make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 01 02 01 03 etc Correction required for only one 01 02 03 etc No correction required Correction required are checked 1 If the MIDI Channel of multiple tracks operated by the arpeggiator is set only to 01 refer to the lines for 01 only If the MIDI Channel settings are 01 and one other channel such as 01 and 02 or 01 and 03 then refer to the lines for 01 02 01 03 etc If the MIDI Channel settings are 01 and multiple other MIDI channels such as 01 and 02 and 03 then refer to the line for 01 02 03 etc 2 Correction is necessary only if the tracks operated by a single arpeggiator are using only MIDI Channel 01 In some cases correction may also be necessary if the two arpeggiators use the same MIDI channel amp Depending on the combination settings it may also be necessary to change the track settings as well In the screens shown above combination INT C005 In the Pocket has been copied using Copy From Combi As described in step
152. ITON STUDIOuses Korg s TouchView graphical user interface By touching on objects displayed in the LCD screen you can select pages set parameter values rename programs and combinations write data and perform many other operations WA References in the TRITON STUDIO s owner s man ual to the button or tab refer to objects dis played on the LCD screen References to the key knob dial or slider refer to controls on the front or rear panel of the TRITON STUDIO a Current page i Page menu button e category Popup button DAF COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play A a b Edit cell d Popup button 2 f Check box c Popup button 1 Reso p J L Key Syne L Keyboard EEE eee ete etter eer eee terete ree eee ere eer eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ree ee eee ere eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee H i Frog Miser Arpegg Arpegg Sampling blebs M a g Radio buttons a cya C4 wr Latch a Current page This indicates the selected page within the current mode From the left this shows the mode name page number and page name Mode name Page number Page name COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play A BMk A b Edit cell When you press a parameter in the LCD screen the parameter or parameter value will sometimes be high lighted displayed in inverse video This is called the edit cell and the highlighted item will be subject to editing
153. K button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the pro gram that had been selected before you opened the popup menu Using 10 s HO LD to select programs If you press the 10 s HOLD key to turn on the 10 s Hold function the LCD screen will indicate ia the ten s place of the program number will be fixed and you will be able to switch programs simply by pressing a single numeric key Each time you press a numeric key the one s place will change You can also use the A V keys to change the value of the ten s place Press the 10 s HOLD key to make the display indi cate ital The ten s place of the program number will be held fixed PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit A Bank INT A d 128 bj000 Noisy Stabber ISWI Porta Sw CC 65 2IFX1008 St Graphic 7EQ Knob1B Attack iSW2 JS Y amp Ribbon Lock IFX223 Stereo Phaser Knob2B Decay EIFX3 053 Reverb SmoothHall Knob3B Sust iMFX1620 Stereo Flanger SIF Xd GBG No Effect iMFX2 6d9 L C R BPM Delay ZIFX5S G00 No Effect KnobdB KModd Performance Editor Octave Pitch osc Amp Attack Decay IFX MFX Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance o 2 By pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can input the one s place in a single action You can use the A V keys to change the value of ten s place 4 To cancel the 10 s HOLD function
154. MFX2 Off Global PO Basic page settings checked p 140 L If you are in Combination Sequencer and Song Play and master effects are not applied when you raise the Send1 or Send2 of the timbre track does Return 1 or Return 2 from the master effect need to be raised p 141 Alternatively has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscillator of the program used by the timbre track been lowered p 140 WA The actual send level is determined by multiplying the send setting of each oscillator in the program with the send setting of the timbre track _ Have you routed the output to an insert effect p 140 141 MIDI The TRITON STUDIO does not respond to incoming MIDI data Are all MIDI cables connected correctly PG p 258 _ Is the MIDI data being received on the channel on which it is being transmitted PG p 259 The TRITON STUDIO does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI data Are the Global P1 MIDI settings Enable Program Change Enable Bank Change Enable Control Change and Enable AfterTouch each checked PG p 144 If you wish to receive MIDI exclusive messages is the Enable Exclusive Global P1 MIDI item checked PG p 144 L Does the TRITON STUDIO support the types of messages that are being sent to it PG p 259 Media Floppy disk Can t format a floppy disk Are you using a 3 5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk Is the f
155. Mode gt L Mono Record Input Prefe Memory ing Setup Jl rence Jl Status Press the OrigKey note C2 in this case and you will hear the sound that was sampled 3 Press the Create button to create a new index 4 Press the SAMPLING REC key Press the SAMPLING START STOP key Speak the word that you want to sample Example So When you finish speaking press the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop sampling Repeat steps 8 and to record additional samples Example Easy To Sample With TRITON STUDIO Play consecutive notes on the keyboard Play a chromatic scale upward starting at the C2 key The samples you recorded will be played one after another In this example playing notes C2 through F 2 in sequence will produce It s So Easy To Sample With TRITON STUDIO Applying an insert effect to the audio input and sampling the result 1 In step of the preceding section 1 Connect a mic and make input settings set the Input1 Pan to C064 and BUS to IFX1 SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input 1 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select gt GER Pan C064 Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup Input Setup aaa Source BUS L R Trigger P Threshold Level 30 dB Recording Level d6 setup rence status S 2 Press the MENU key to
156. NK INT A EXB G key to select a Selecting a program TOR Press the PROG key the LED will light The LED will light and the selected bank will be dis played in the left of the LCD screen For example to select bank INT B press the BANK INT B key The INT B key s LED will light and the upper left of the LCD screen will indicate Bank INT B Bark lt Prog No Explanation INT A INT D I A 1 D 000 127 Preloaded programs VNL You will enter Program mode Make sure that the upper line of the LCD screen indicates PROGRAM PO Play If this is not selected press the EXIT key Category PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit opup button Category Porup Bank INT A J 128 000 Noisy Stabber Select SW1 Portagw CC B5 EIFN1G08 3t Graphic FEG KnobiB Attack She JS Y amp Ribbon Lock IFX2 G23 Stereo Phaser EKnob2B Decay i INT E 000 127 User programs e g pro Program grams that use samples you created SIFH3O53 Reverb SmoothHall Knob3B Sust MPRA B28 Sterea Flanger IF Md OG Ho Effect EKnobde KModd Popup button IMF 8d9 L C R BPM Delay IFX5 900 No Effect Performance Editor Oetave Pitch Osc Amp Attack Decay IFs HF Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance G 001 128 GM2 basic programs VNL VNL GM2 variation programs I E INT F I F EXB MOSS programs 1 9 g d VNL GM2 drum programs EXB A EXB H E A E H 000 12
157. O The loading destination banks need not be in the above order Load the data into any bank EXB A EXB G that will make it easy for you to keep your data organized amp EXB PCM boards can be installed in any slot 1 7 PG p 286 65 66 4 If you have modified the program settings or the order of the programs in banks INT A or INT B load banks I A and I B from the internal hard disk or the included floppy disk Combinations except for those of the EXB PCM03 are created using the EXB PCM programs and the bank INT A and INT B preloaded programs This means that when loading data other than EXB PCM03 data you must load banks I A and I B of the preloaded pro grams Loading data Restoring the factory settings p 63 2 Insert the included floppy disk and select the PCG file For the EXB PCM01 05 As described in steps of Loading data Restor ing the factory settings select C_ BANK PCG For the EXB PCM06 07 As described in steps of Loading data Restor ing the factory settings select C_ BANK PCG After loading C_BANK PCG use the same procedure to select D BANK PCG Load both files 3 Select the page menu command Load Selected A dialog box will appear 4 As described in Loading individual banks of data from a PCG file set PCG Contents and To Make the settings shown below EXB PCMO1 PCG Contents bank I C To bank E A EXB PCM02
158. Octave Scales in which the pitch of each note of the octave is repeated for all octaves and one User All Note Scale in which the pitch of each of the 128 notes can be specified independently By adjusting the pitch of each key in the range of 99 you can raise or lower it by as much as approximately one semitone relative to the normal pitch The user scales you create here can be used by specifying the scale for a program for each timbre of a combination or for each track of a song Sequencer Song Play Changing the scale You can specify the scale for each program for each tim bre in a combination or for each track of a song These settings are made by the Scale Use Prog s Scale parameters in the following pages Program P1 Edit Basic Program Basic Combination P2 Edit Trk Param Other Sequencer P2 Trk Param Other Song Play mode Song Play P1 Track Status Scale Here we will show how to make settings in Sequencer mode Press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode 2 After pressing the MENU key and press the P2 Trk Param 3 Press the Other 1 8 tab or Other 9 16 tab to select the Sequencer P2 Trk Param Other page 4 If you wish to use the scale that is specified for the program used by a track check the Use Program s Scale check box for that track Tracks that are not checked will use the scale specified by Scale Type Song s Scale 6 Set Type Song s Scale
159. PEGGIATOR ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on or off When on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED will light The selected arpeggio pattern will begin when you play the keyboard The on off setting is saved when the combina tion is written into memory amp If Assign is Off or Arpeggiator Run is not checked the arpeggiator will not operate even if this key is on Arpeggiator settings Select Combination P1 Edit Program Mixer page Select programs for the timbres that you wish to use For this example select any desired program for tim bres 1 4 2 Select Combination P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch page For the timbres that you will be using set Status to INT and set MIDI Channel to Gch or to the global MIDI channel set in Global P1 MIDI MIDI Chan nel 132 For this example set timbres 1 4 to a Status of INT and timbres 5 8 to a Status of Off Set the MIDI Channel of timbres 1 4 to Gch COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param MIDI Ch A Bank EXB A 888 Initial CombEA GOG ae Bank Select When Status Ex2 smn jvm i 5 E a a a a a a e jRevcany Organ Bell Mall Strings iFastSyniFastSyniFa yn artan i Arpeggiator Assign x B a Off a Off a Off B Off D or C Set J Temp to specify the tempo This is the same as for a program p 130 However the tempo is shared by both arpeggiators A and B 6 Make Arpeggiator Assign
160. Play in P1 Edit Program Mixer Category Category Timbre Program Select or in Sequencer P0 Play REC Cate gory Category Track Program Select In the case of a combination the category you specify here will be used when you select a combination by category in Combination P0 Play Category Cate gory Combination Select 6 Use To to specify the bank and number of the writ ing destination program combination Use the VALUE controllers or the BANK keys to make your selection 6 To execute the Write operation press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button When you press the OK button the display will ask Are you sure When you press the OK button once again the data will be written Using the SEQ UEN CER REC W RITE key to write This method can only be used to re write update the selected program combination number Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key The following Update Program Update Combination dialog box will appear The screen shown is for Program mode Update Program AGGG Noisy Stabber Are you sure 2 To write the data press the OK button To cancel without writing press the Cancel button Assigning a name Rename You can modify the name of an edited program combina tion song drum kit user arpeggio pattern multisample or sample etc You can also modify the category names for programs and combinations
161. Play REC Program T01 08 page Choose Song Select use the numeric keys to input the song number that you want to newly create and press the ENTER key For example press the 1 key and then the ENTER key A dialog box will appear Create new song this song No Set Length HZS Are you sure Decide on the number of measures input the number in Set Length and press the OK button SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 65 A 001 01 00Q Meter 4 4 J 120 pb Manu S001 NEW SONG Track 1 TRACK 1 Reso Hi RPPR gt esoh m Ch Estoy aston iia Ta Dl fi aes la an D ia Prox Mixer Mixer ica PlyLo T Prete 9 16 1 3 9 16 S 18 A new song will be created Next we will copy the song settings and playback data of another song into this newly created song 2 Select the page menu command Copy From Song Copy Song From gt S00 Acid Jazz au O Without Track Pattern Events A dialog box will appear Select the song that you want to copy i e the copy source If you select All all song settings and playback data will be copied from that song If you select Without Track Pattern Events set tings other than Play Loop and RPPR will be copied For this example select All Press the OK button to execute the copy 3 As described in steps Q and create one more new song S002 and copy song S000 to it 2 Naming a song Here s how to assign a name to a song you cr
162. Power On Mode Global P0 System Preference page so that the mode and page that had been selected when you turned the power off will appear when the power is turned on p 125 Information displayed in the LCD screen when var lous options or SIMM modules are installed The TRITON STUDIO allows you to install separately sold options or sample memory RAM boards When the power is turned on the type of installed options will be displayed After installing an option be sure to check this display to verify that the option was installed correctly If the option is not displayed here even though it was installed it was not installed correctly Turn off the power and re install the option For details on install ing an option refer to PG p 286 OPTIONS OPTIONS EXB PCM CDRW 1 The CDRW 1 CORY 1 Slot1 EXB1 eee EXB MOSS Slot EXB option is installed EXE DI Slotz EXBS EXE mLAN Slot4 EXB4 EXB MOSS The EXB MOSS SIHH Slots EXB5 Slot 16MB option is installed oe EXB DI The EXB Dl optionis stot installed EXB mLAN The EXB mLAN option is installed SIMM Slot 1 3 MB Sample memory RAM s are installed in SIMM slots 1 3 The capacity of each SIMM is shown in parentheses When shipped from the factory a 16 MB SIMM is installed in SIMM slot 1 EXB PCM Slot 1 7 PCM expansion boards are installed in EXB PCM series slots 1 7 The model number of each board is shown
163. RE again the light goes dark returns you to the version you are editing WA If you edit while the COMPARE key LED is lit the key will go dark That previous sound will now become be the sound that is recalled when the COM PARE key LED is dark Oscillator settings P1 Edit Basic Basic settings for the oscillator are made in the P1 Edit Basic page The TRITON STUDIO provides two oscilla tors and for each oscillator you can select a basic wave form multisample and set the pitch The multisamples provided by the TRITON STUDIO include waveforms for musical instruments such as pianos as well as special waveforms unique to synthesiz ers Multisamples reproduce the complex overtone struc ture and frequency characteristics that allow us to identify a sound as being piano like or guitar like etc Program Basic page PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Program Basic EEk Aa Oscillator Mode Yoice Assign Mode O Single Poly O Single Trigger Double i ikeggig C Drums Prispty i O Hold Scale Type gt Equal Temperament Key P C Random 1_ OSC Velo Contro Basic M Zone ler 4 Oscillator Mode This sets the mode of the oscillator Single uses one oscil lator and Double uses two oscillators In the case of Sin gle the maximum polyphony is 60 notes and in the case of Double the maximum polyphony is 30 notes If you wish to use a Drum Kit to create a drums program select Drums In the case of Dr
164. RITON STUDIO The TRITON STUDIO s headphone jack will output the same signal as MAIN L MONO and R RO If you are using INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 connect these jacks to your mixer and use the headphone jack of your mixer to monitor the sound 3 Analog audio input connec tions You can input external analog audio sources and sample them or process them with the internal effects and output them from the OUTPUT jacks Connect mics or the OUTPUT jacks of your external audio equipment to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks 4 Digital audio input output con nections Digital audio output The same audio signal present at the TRITON STUDIO s AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks can be output in digital format to a DAT MD or digital multi track recorder that can accept a digital audio input with a sample frequency of 48 kHz or 96 kHz Use an optical cable to connect the S P DIF OUT MAIN jack to the optical digital input jack of your DAT MD or digital multitrack recorder amp The VOLUME slider does not affect the volume of this output jack Connections Digital audio input TRITON STUDIO can accept a digital audio input from a DAT or other digital device that can output digital audio at a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or 96 kHz This signal can be input to the L and R channels then sampled or pro cessed by the internal effects and output from the OUT PUT jacks Use an optical cable to conne
165. Ri Pro Dyrii BDESD ki Cymbals BDESD ki Acoustic Acoustic Noisy a If you are using the arpeggiator press the ARPEGGIA TOR ON OFF key to turn it off and then turn it on again 3 Begin recording Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If you play a B3 note or lower during the pre count before recording the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning at the moment that recording begins Record your performance 4 When you are finished performing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If you made a mistake or want to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE key to re record as many times as you want The Mullti REC check box will be unchecked when you use Compare so you will need to check it again If the recorded performance is not reproduced cor rectly during playback If you use the page menu command Copy From Combi to copy the settings of a combination and then perform multi track recording with the arpeggiator turned on there may be cases in which the performance during recording is not reproduced correctly during playback Multiple tracks that are set to the same MIDI channel are combined into a single stream of performance data during recording If there is a track with the same MIDI channel as the track being played by the arpeggiator the data playe
166. T E With the factory settings this bank does not contain combinations This bank can be used to load combina tions that use programs of the EXB MOSS option or to store combinations that you created EXB A EXB G With the factory settings these banks do not contain combinations These banks can be used to load combi nations that use programs of the EXB PCM option boards or to store combinations that you have created 128 programs can be written or rewritten to each bank INT A INT E EXB A EXB G for a total of 1 536 t For details of the combination names etc refer to VNL Voice Name List Selecting combinations by category You can select combinations from any of the sixteen cate gories in the same way as for programs With the factory settings all the preloaded combinations are organized into sixteen categories You can choose a category and then select from the combinations in that category Selecting programs by category p 23 Using 10 s HOLD to select combinations You can fix the ten s place of the combination number so that a combination can be selected simply by pressing a numeric key once to change the one s place Using 10 s HOLD to select programs p 23 Using a connected switch to select combinations An optional on off type foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 can be connected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack and used to select combinations p 125
167. TRITON STUDIO MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER Basic Guide Please read this guide first HEE HYPER INTEGRATED SYNTHESIS SYSTEM To ouch View R aphical User Interfac mj Midi CD RW installable G 0 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 Read these instructions 2 Keep these instructions 3 Heed all warnings 4 Follow all instructions 5 Do not use this apparatus near water 6 No objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus 7 Clean only with dry cloth 8 Do not block any ventilation openings install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 9 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet for U S A and Canada Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus 12 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 13 Unplug this apparat
168. TUDIO s AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 You can use the TRITON STUDIO s SEQUENCER START STOP key etc to control operations such as playback and stop on your CD ROM or CD R RW drive When using the CDRW 1 option the analog output can be internally connected to AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 so it is not necessary to make connections using audio cables If you are using a SCSI connected CD ROM or CD R RW drive use audio cables to connect its audio outputs to the TRITON STUDIO s AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 2 Insert an audio CD 3 Access the Sampling mode P5 Audio CD Ripping page 4 Use Drive drive select to select the drive that con tains the audio CD and use Track to select the track that you want to read Raise the Volume amp Some SCSI connected CD ROM or CD R RW drives cannot be controlled in this way so this setting may not affect the volume SAMPLING P5 Audio CD Drive CDD Audio CD Ripping B Track gt 31 93 00 0 Index b 01 00 0 Sequencer START plays selected track Range Start Range End Duration In the P0 Recording Input Setup page make Input settings as follows Input Analog Input1 Level 127 Pan L000 BUS Select L R Input2 Level 127 Pan R127 BUS Select L R 6 Specify the recording method in Recording Setup Source BUS L R Trigger Sampling START SW Sampling will start when you press the SAMPLING
169. The arpeggiator will synchronize to the J Tempo based on the timing of the external MIDI clock Synchronization to the MIDI Start message e When the arpeggiator is on and operating receiving a MIDI Start message will cause the arpeggiator to reset to the beginning of the pattern This has no relation to the Key Sync setting amp In Song Play mode the TRITON STUDIO will not synchronize to an external MIDI clock Effects settings The effect section of the TRITON STUDIO provides five insert effects two master effects one master EQ stereo 3 band EQ and a mixer that controls the routing of these components You can choose from 102 types of full digital effects for each insert effect and from 89 types for each master effect The effects are categorized as follows Categories of the 102 effect types 001 015 Filter and dynamics effects such as EQ and com pressor 016 031 Phase modulation effects such as chorus and phaser 032 040 Other modulation and pitch shift effects such as rotary speaker and pitch shifter 041 051 Early reflection and delay effects 052 057 Reverb effects 058 089 Mono mono chain effects that internally connect two mono effects in series 090 102 Double size effects amp Effects 000 089 can be selected for IFX1 2 3 4 5 or MEX 1 or 2 Effects 090 102 are double size effects and will use twice the processing area of other effects They can be selected for IFX2
170. UTE REC to PLAY or MUTE 6 In P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch page MIDI Channel specify the MIDI channel for each track Set the MIDI channel of each external sequencer track to match the MIDI channel of each TRITON STUDIO track Data of the corresponding channel will be recorded on each TRITON STUDIO track Make sure that Status is set either to INT or BTH 6 Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 T Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key to enter recording standby mode Start the external sequencer The TRITON STUDIO sequencer will receive the MIDI Start message transmitted by the external sequencer and will automatically begin recording Basic functions Producing songs 86 When the song ends stop the external sequencer TRITON STUDIO s sequencer will receive the MIDI Stop message transmitted by the external sequencer and will automatically stop recording You can also press the SEQUENCER START STOP key on TRI TON STUDIO itself to stop recording Playback In the Global P1 MIDI page set MIDI Clock to Internal Set Tempo Mode to Auto When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key playback will begin ZS If the correct sounds do not play immediately after playback is started you may be able to solve the problem by using the page menu command Event Edit Sequencer P5 Track Edit to edit the Program Change data Step recording This
171. When this device is moved to a location where the tem perature is radically different water droplets may con dense on the disk drive If the device is used in this condition it may malfunction so please allow several hours to pass before operating the device Do not repeatedly turn the power on off This may damage not only the TRITON STUDIO but also any SCSI devices that are connected This device begins to access the hard drive immedi ately after the power is turned on Never turn off the power while the hard drive is being accessed Doing so can cause all or part of the data on the disk to be lost or may cause malfunctions such as damage to the hard drive If the hard drive has been damaged due to incorrect operation power failure or accidental interruption of the power supply a fee may be charged for replacement even if this device is still within its war ranty period COPYRIGHT WARNING This professional device is intended only for use with works for which you yourself own the copy right for which you have received permission from the copyright holder to publicly perform record broadcast sell and duplicate or in connection with activities which constitute fair use under copy right law If you are not the copyright holder have not received permission from the copyright holder or have not engaged in fair use of the works you may be violating copyright law and may be liable for damages and penalties If
172. ack on the fly You can rewind or fast forward while listening to the sound The LOCATE key lets you move quickly to a desired location Multisamples you create can be played back together with internal programs in Sequencer mode The Time Slice function of Sampling mode lets you divide a rhythm loop sample and create performance data that corresponds to the divided samples In Sequencer mode you can play this performance data and adjust the playback tempo without affecting the pitch of the rhythm loop sample You can also exchange the note numbers of the data or modify the timing to freely re create new rhythm loops The TRITON STUDIO provides an In Track Sampling function which lets you sample an external audio source while the song plays back and will automatically create note data to trigger that sample at the appropriate point during the playback of the track A song you create can be resampled to the hard disk In Disk mode this data can then be written to an audio CD by using the CDRW 1 option The structure of Sequencer mode The following describes the structure of Sequencer mode diagram below Songs A song consists of tracks 1 16 a master track song parameters such as the song name effect arpeggiator and RPPR parameters and 100 user patterns A maximum of 200 such songs can be created on TRITON STUDIO Tracks 1 16 and the master track each consist of setup parameters located at the start location a
173. ack to your mixer so that the metronome can be monitored via your mixer Metronome Setup BUS Output Select gt EM Level 127 Producing a song This section explains how to use the TRITON STUDIO s internal sequencer The example procedures described here will cover realtime recording and step recording as well as various convenient functions provided by the internal sequencer such as template songs preset pat terns and the arpeggiator There are many other recording methods and functions p 80 but working through this section will give you a basic understanding of the song production process WA This explanation assumes that you are starting from the default state immediately after power on Creating the basic song 1 Loading a template song and copying preset patterns drum phrases Press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 120 P Mau S000 NEW SONG rei 7 TRACK 1 Reso Hi pm Ped Pasur Fa Bank Program i Prog Mizer Er Ply ca Ea 9 16 1 8 a 16 1 3 S 18 rence 2 Load a template song Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Load Template Song A dialog box will appear Load Template Song From gt P13 Acid Jazz Copy Pattern to Track too Press the popup button located at the right of From and select P13 Acid Jazz from the m
174. age and in the Select Directory page menu dialog box of the Program Combination Sequencer and Sampling modes 16 EXB PCM sample memory RAM slot cover Open this cover to install EXB PCM option boards or to install SIMMs to increase the sampling memory RAM Up to seven EXB PCM option boards can be installed and up to three SIMM sampling memory RAM boards can be installed PG p 286 Front amp rear panel 17 18 19 17 Headphone jack A set of headphones can be connected here stereo 1 4 jack This allows stereo monitoring of the same signal as the OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks 18 Floppy disk drive 3 5 inch 2DD double side double density or 2HD dou ble side high density floppy disks can be inserted here allowing you to save your edited data or to load factory set data SMF data or multisample sample data etc Rear panel For details on handling floppy disks refer to Cautions when handling floppy disks p 62 Eject button To remove a floppy disk make sure that the disk access indicator is dark and then press this button If the disk is not ejected when you press this button do not attempt to forcibly remove the disk but contact your Korg distribu tor Eject button Disk access indicator 19 CDRW 1 drive bay The CDRW 1 CD R RW drive option can be installed in this bay PG p 286
175. ameter settings Musical data Track 8 Parameter settings Insert Effect Master Effect Individual Outputs Musical data Track 16 Parameter settings Musical data Master Track Tempo Time signature data AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 81 Producing Basic functions songs 82 Preparations for recording On the TRITON STUDIO recording is the process by which your performance on the keyboard and controllers is written into the tracks and patterns of a song as data This section explains how to make preparations for recording a song such as assigning a program to each track and setting the volume WA By loading a template song you can easily make appropriate settings for various styles of music Assign a program to each track In the Sequencer P0 Play REC Program T01 08 T09 16 page use Program Select to assign a program to each track At this time you can press the Category popup and select programs by category PG p 51 You can also use the Utility menu command Copy From Combi to copy settings from a combination p 95 PG p 52 ie When assigning a program you can use Track Select to select the track for which you are making assignments and try playing the sound SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 aa 001 01 000 Meter 444 J a98 gt Manu 15000 NEW SONG P Tracka Drums d Peo h t Hi
176. annels will be added The analog inputs have a MIC LINE level select switch and a level knob accommodating a wide range of audio sources from mic level to line level The digital inputs support S P DIF format Audio inputs can also be routed to the effects You can apply effects while sampling and use the TRITON STUDIO as a 6 in 6 out effect processor or even create a vocoder effect in conjunction with internal sounds e 6 channels of audio output are standard four individual audio outputs in addition to the L MONO and R main stereo audio outputs Oscillators drums timbres tracks and the insert effect outputs can all be freely routed to any output As analog outputs the TRITON STUDIO provides AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R and INDI VIDUAL 1 2 3 and 4 As digital output you can use S P DIF 2 channels L MONO and R ADAT when the EXB DI option is installed and mLAN 6 channels when the EXB mLAN option is installed e S P DIF input and output support 48 kHz 96 kHz sampling frequencies You can interface directly to a 96 kHz sampling fre quency digital recording system TouchView user interface The TRITON STUDIO uses a TouchView user interface that lets you operate the instrument directly by touching a large 320 x 240 pixel LCD screen for a revolutionary leap in ease of operation and user friendliness When selecting programs combinations multisamples drumsamples or effects in the LCD screen you can also view
177. ard disk This section explains how you can create an audio CD by specifying the desired order of WAVE files on the hard disk As described in Resampling the song playback to create a WAVE file on the hard drive p 116 a song you cre ated in Sequencer mode can be sampled to the hard disk to create a WAVE file amp To do this the CDRW 1 option PG p 286 must be installed or an external CD R RW drive must be con nected to the SCSI connector PG p 298 amp In order to write data to CD R RW media the drive containing the WAVE files must have at least as much free space as the WAVE files Before you execute this procedure make sure that the drive containing the WAVE files has sufficient free space Access the Disk mode Make Audio CD page In the default state the WAVE File area will show only Fpynd Make Audio CD EEk Audiol Info A 2 To the track list add the WAVE files that you want to write to the CD Select End it will be highlighted and press the Insert button The Insert Track dialog box will appear Insert Track SONGSSG1 WAY 53 6M 61 12 2661 15 00 00 a SONGOGOZ WAY 371M 61 12 2661 15 00 0 ALE Poh SONGGGGS WAY 31 7M 01 12 2661 15 00 00 P AE gt HDD INTERNAL HD Sampling START STOP plays selected file Use drive select and the Open and Up buttons to access the directory that contains the WAVE file and
178. arpeggiator is on Notice the timbre settings for T7 and T8 e Ifthe arpeggiator is off playing the keyboard will sound the timbre s that are set to Gch or to the global MIDI channel in this case 01 Since the MIDI Channel of T7 is set to 02 it will not sound T8 is set to Gch but since Status is Off it will not sound e Any MIDI channel that is assigned to a timbre will trigger the arpeggiator In this case these will be MIDI Channel 02 and Gch global MIDI channel When the arpeggiator is on playing the keyboard will trigger arpeggiator A which is assigned to T8 Gch T7 will be sounded by arpeggiator A Since the Status of T8 is Off it will not sound e Since the Status of T8 is Off it will not sound regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off It is a dummy timbre that causes T7 to sound only when the arpeggiator is on Combination INT C005 In The Pocket Select and play combination INT C005 In The Pocket Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 e Arpeggiator A is assigned to T7 and T8 and arpeggiator B is assigned to T5 When you play the keyboard the T7 program INT A068 HipHop Kit will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern U444 User Dr In The Pocket The T5 program INT D034 Chord Trigger will be sounded by the arpeggio pattern U123 I A B Syn Echo e The B Bottom Key and Top K
179. as described in Recording methods p 83 and following sections Monitoring just a specific track Muting just a spe cific track Solo Mute functions The TRITON STUDIO provides a Solo function that lets you play only a specific track 1 16 and a Mute function that silences only specific tracks These functions can be used in various ways For example you can intentionally mute or solo specific tracks or listen only to the rhythm section of the previously recorded tracks while you record new tracks Let s try out the Mute and Solo functions 1 Load a song As described on p 20 load the demo songs and select any song 2 Access the Sequencer P0 Play REC Program T01 08 T09 16 page Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key 3 Press track 1 PLAY MUTE REC The display will change from PLAY to MUTE and the playback of track 1 will no longer be heard In this way the mute function allows you to silence a speci fied track until the track is un muted Press track 2 PLAY MUTE REC The display will change and the playback of track 2 will also be muted To cancel muting press PLAY REC MUTE once again 4 Press track 1 SOLO ON OFF The display will change from SOLO OFF to SOLO ON and this time only the performance of track 1 will be heard To play back only a specified track by itself in this way is known as soloing the track turn ing Solo on f
180. ata you will need to turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode p 57 About MIDI Track status status You can make settings for TRITON STUDIO s sequencer to specify whether it will sound the internal tone genera tor or an external tone generator When Track Status Status P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch T01 08 T09 16 is set to INT operating TRITON STU DIO s keyboard and controllers will sound and control TRITON STUDIO s own tone generator When Status is set to EXT EX2 or BTH operating TRI TON STUDIO s keyboard and controllers will sound and control the external tone generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI Chan nel of the track that is set to EXT EX2 or BTH With a setting of BTH both the external tone generator and TRI TON STUDIO s tone generator will sound and be con trolled a a ee ee ee E PT ay Drums Bass Keyboar ae onua T Guitar P Strings E E E E SBE E L a E E E T o og Bier Dye Blo Dee Dere EEEREN namnpeaes ciebebennebe padsomonieseesen i MIDI Channel E S E a e2 a3 04 05 as O78 beaneetnn a Bank Select when Status EX2 i pigi i HH i hes iH i the 00 i He i HH H i Heli deed geji popi gegi BOB jeji pjg AassssssssssssssssahasssssssssssssssaedhasassssssssssssssalaasasasasasasaaasadhaasasasasasasasasalascacacaosccssasesMasccascscscacscccalaccccascacscacsssed If you wish to use the Sequencer mode of the
181. ata from a floppy disk insert the floppy disk into the TRITON STUDIO s disk drive If you want to play back data from an external SCSI device make sure that the external SCSI device is con nected Also make sure that the media contains SMF data If there is no SMF data in the floppy disk or if there is no SMF data in the currently selected directory no file name will be displayed as shown below SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 68 E 000 Meter J 128 Jukebox te pign Name ray I Tracka1 Chai GHG1 Acoustic Piano To move to a directory that contains SMF data press the MENU key and then press P3 Select Directory to display P3 Select Directory SONG PLAY P3 Select Directory 43K 16 16 2601 12 60 06 16 16 2601 12 06 06 SONG_641 MID SONG_662 MID SONG_643 MID 16710 2001 12 66 06 sonc 884 MID 16 16 2601 12 06 06 16 16 2681 12 66 06 SONG_665 MID Drive select FOD NEW YOLUME Press the drive select button and select the drive that contains the data that you want to play Then press the Open button or Up button to move between levels and find the desired SMF When the SMF file make sure that the extension is SMF appears in the LCD screen press the EXIT key and move to P0 Prog Mix File Select will show the SMF filenames note If no jukebox list has been created no filenames will be displayed if the Jukebox check box is checked Uncheck the Jukebo
182. atched to the same tempo without changing their pitch e You can change the tempo in realtime without affecting the pitch As an example we will describe how a rhythm loop sam ple can be time sliced in Sampling mode and then how the rhythm loop sample can be played in Sequencer mode You will need to provide rhythm loop samples of drums etc You can either record these on the TRITON STUDIO or load them in Disk mode Initially you should try this using a one measure pattern in 4 4 time with a fairly sim ple beat and record the pattern as a mono rhythm loop sample For this example we will use a 120 BPM rhythm loop sample Select Sample Select 120 BPM rhythm loop sample note Play back the sample and verify that the beats that you want to loop are played cleanly If they are not played cleanly make the appropriate settings for the start address Start and end address End and exe cute the page menu command Truncate p 44 110 2 Access the P2 Loop Edit page SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit Start AAAAAAA YJ Loop _ Rev LJ 1206 LoopS 8999940 Loop Lock Loop Tune 08 ig 200M gt ing gem ES Dy End 96001 VY Use Zero Grn 3 Select the page menu command Time Slice The Set Sample Tempo dialog box will appear Set Sample Tempo Beat 004 Source BPM EJ 4 Specify the number of quarter note beats in the sam ple and its tempo If you know the BPM s
183. ator and or keyboard performance Input Analog Input1 BUS Select Off Input2 BUS Select Off Source BUS L R Recording Level 12 0 Auto 12dB On On chacked PG p 5 57 Resampling the sound of the TRITON STUDIO arpeggiator and or keyboard performance together with the input sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 jack Input Analog Input1 BUS Select L R Pan C064 or as desired Input2 BUS Select Off Source BUS L R Recording Level 12 0 Auto 12dB On On chacked PG p 5 57 Sampling only the stereo input sound from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks while you listen to the sound of the TRITON STUDIO arpeggiator etc Input Analog Input1 BUS Select 1 2 Pan L000 Input2 BUS Select 1 2 Pan R127 Source BUS Indiv 1 2 Recording Level 0 0 Auto 12dB On Off unchacked PG p 5 57 In this case the sound that is input to AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 will be output only to AUDIO OUTPUT INDI VIDUAL 1 and 2 Using the metronome It is convenient to use the metronome when you want to play a program or combination at a specific tempo and sample your performance To access the metronome settings use the Program or Combination P0 Play Sampling page menu command Metronome Setup We recommend that you set BUS OUTPUT Select to either 3 or 4 and connect the INDI VIDUAL 3 or 4 j
184. ature In this example we will use a CD player For details on how you can digitally sample or rip from the CDRW 1 option or from a SCSI connected CD ROM or CD R RW refer to p 108 WA This explanation assumes that you are starting from the default state immediately after power on 1 Connect your external audio device and adjust the input settings Input Connect the AUDIO INPUT 1 2 jacks on the rear panel to the LINE OUT L and R jacks of your CD player Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch to the LINE position and set the LEVEL knob near the center ooooOoOoOo0 Ga ooo0000 dee Ba CD player A E H gt r 2 MAX MIN t LEVEL es AUDIO INPUT ll WO Ifthe CDRW 1 option is installed the analog audio will be internally connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks You can also rip digital audio data via the CDRW 1 option or a SCSI connected CD R RW p 108 2 Press the SAMPLING key to enter Sampling mode 3 Press the Input Setup tab to select the P0 Recording Input Setup page SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING inputi Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Pan LOGG Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt MEE Pan R127 Recording Setup Titty ww Source BUS p LZR Trigger Sampling START SW Metronome Precount gt Off J 126 Resample Manual Rec
185. audition a track p 82 You can use the Solo Selected Track page menu com mand to audition only the currently selected track This provides a convenient way to hear the parameter settings and effect settings of a track PG p 52 124 121 Basic functions SMF playback Playback using the Jukebox func tion The TRITON STUDIO provides a Jukebox function that can be used to playback SMF data This function allows you to specify the order in which files in the same directory will be played amp Any jukebox list you create will be erased when the power is turned off and cannot be recovered If you wish to keep your jukebox list refer to the section Saving a Jukebox list next page and save it onto media Press the EXIT key to display the P0 Prog Mix page 2 Check the Jukebox check box SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 63 R A 001 01 00O Meter J 122 A Jukebox 3 Select P3 Jukebox SONG PLAY P3 Jukebox ry 2 Jukebox SONG_663 MID SONG_Gaz 7 SONG 00S D SONG_664 MID SONG_6B7 SONGE SONG_ 5 MID SONG_9884 SONG_661 SONG_ G6 MID SONG007 SONG_667 MID Drive select LD FDD NEW VOLUME Press the drive select button and select the drive that contains the data that you want to play back 4 Use the scroll bar to display the SMF filename exten sion MID that will be played first and select that file 5 Press the Add button The fil
186. aying the keyboard softly will sound the Low multisample and playing strongly will sound the High multisample 3 Adjust the Lvl Level for High and Low multisam ples to set their volume balance If you do not wish to use this function set the Veloc ity M Sample SW Lo gt Hi value to 001 Only the High multisample will sound Rev Reverse check box If this is checked the multisample will be played back ward This can produce interesting results when used on sound effects etc Normally you will not check this When Oscillator Mode Double To use OSC2 set Oscillator Mode to Double in the Pro gram Basic page In the same way as for OSC1 you can set High and Low multisamples for OSC2 The playback pitch can be set independently By using the same multisample with slightly different Tune settings you can detune the oscillators to produce a richer sound WA It will be convenient to use the page menu command Copy Oscillator to make the oscillator settings match each other When Oscillator Mode Drums PROGRAM P1 Edi Octave 8 8 _ Transpose 66 Py hs 127 Tune 0000 Delay GGGGms tisamgie m In the Program Basic page set Oscillator Mode to Drums When this is set to Drums you will be able to cre ate a drum program This will select a drum kit instead of a multisample TRI TON STUDIO provides twenty factory preset drum
187. bration amp PG p 137 146 11 12 6 SCSI device connections By connecting an external SCSI device such as a hard disk drive or CD R RW drive to the SCSI connector you can manage large amounts of data on devices other than the internal hard drive If a hard disk drive is connected it can also be specified as the destination when sampling t For details on connecting SCSI devices refer to PG p 298 About SCSI devices that can be used with the TRI TON STUDIO e To store data the TRITON STUDIO can use either DOS formatted SCSI disks or UDF formatted CD R RW discs e Insome cases it will not be possible to use a DOS format or UDF format disk that was formatted on a personal computer As far as possible please use the TRITON STUDIO to format the disc e The TRITON STUDIO can use MO disks of 128 Mbytes 230 Mbytes 540 Mbytes 640 Mbytes and 1 3 Gbyte capacities 7 Connections to MIDI equip ment computers Connections to MIDI equipment The keyboard controllers and sequencer etc of TRITON STUDIO can be used to control an external MIDI tone generator Conversely another MIDI keyboard or sequencer can control the tone generator of TRITON STU DIO to produce sound Use MIDI cables to connect the MIDI connectors of TRITON STUDIO with the MIDI connectors of your external device t PG p 258 MIDI applications Connecting MIDI deveices computers Connections to a computer You
188. bytes This will create a WAVE file In order to play a hard disk sample from the TRITON STUDIO s keyboard it must be able to be loaded into the sampling memory RAM Sample files of up to 16 Mbytes mono or 32 Mbytes stereo can be loaded into RAM For more on the sampling features of the TRITON STU DIO p 99 Sequencer A sophisticated 16 track MIDI sequencer is built in The sequencer can be used in conjunction with other functions such as the dual arpeggiator and RPPR making it an even more powerful music production tool than a stand alone sequencer In addition you can sample while listening to sequencer tracks play back just as if you were recording an audio track In Track Sampling For more on the TRITON STUDIO s sequencer p 80 Song Play In Song Play mode SMF Standard MIDI File songs can be played back directly from floppy disk or other media You can also play the keyboard along with the SMF play back You can play along on the keyboard as you listen to the SMF playback and even play the arpeggiator in sync with the playback tempo of the SMF e Formats 0 and 1 are supported e A jukebox function lets you edit the order in which songs are played back Dual polyphonic arpeggiator e Five preset arpeggio patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 RANDOM and 507 user arpeggio patterns are provided With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preload user patterns 367 In addition t
189. c and playing it as a one shot sample p 37 3 Press the EXIT key to select the P0 Recording page 4 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Convert MS To Program The following dialog box will appear Convert Multisample 6686 SMPL Demo UO Use Destination Program Parameters To Program gt EERIE Gee ence 6 In the To Program field select the program into which the data will be converted We recommend that you select one of the initialized programs in bank I E amp When you execute the Convert operation the pro gram in the conversion destination location will be overwritten and replaced by the converted program 6 Set the Use Destination Program Parameters set ting For this example leave this unchecked If you execute the conversion with this unchecked the program will be created using the sound that you heard in Sam pling mode note If you want to use the program parameters of a pre loaded program INT A000 INT D127 copy that program to bank INT E before you perform this oper ation Use the To Program field to select that pro gram and check Use Destination Program Parameters before you perform the conversion However if you want to convert a stereo multisam ple with Use Destination Program Parameters checked you must change the Oscillator Mode PG p 7 to Double for the conversion destination p
190. ce 3 Specify the recording method Recording 1 Set Source BUS to L R This setting lets you sample the sound of the L R chan nels i e the sound that is output from the headphones and the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input1 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt EEE Pan R127 Recording Setup Source BUS L R Trigger gt Sampling START SWW Metronome Precount Off J 126 Resample gt Manual Input Prefe Memory Setup Jl rence Jl Status 2 Set Trigger to Sampling START SW With this setting you can press the SAMPLING REC key to enter record ready mode and then press the SAMPLING START STOP key to start recording Recording Level d6 4 Settings for the sample that will be recorded REC Sample Setup Press the Recording to access the P0 Recording Recording page SAMPLING P Recording Recording Aa REC Sample Setup Save to gt RAM Bank gt RAMI Sample Time min 16 925 sec Sample Mode gt Stereo Airs E Se 2 Set Save to to RAM The recorded sample will be written into sample mem ory RAM For details on the DISK setting refer to p 105 3 Set Sample Mode to Stereo With this setting the sound of the internal LR channels can be sampled in stereo 5 Record the sample Press the SAMPLING
191. cer mode this key will advance or rewind the song or cue list playback to a specified point In Song Play mode this key returns the playback location of the SMF to a specified point SEQ UEN CER REC W RITE key In Sequencer mode pressing this key will make the LED light and if you then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key recording will begin p 84 In Program Combination and Global modes pressing this key will open a dialog box and if you then press the OK button the edited contents will be written p 57 59 SEQ UEN CER START STO P key This is the start stop key for song or cue list recording and playback in Sequencer mode and SMF playback in Song Play mode During recording and playback the LED will blink at the current tempo These keys are also used to play an audio CD in the CDRW 1 option or in a SCSI connected CD R RW drive SEQUENCER START STOP key Play Stop FF gt gt key Fast forward lt lt REW key Rewind PAUSE key Pause LOCATE key Return to the beginning of the track 14 ARPEGGIATOR These knobs control the performance of the arpeggiator in realtime p 29 O ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE VELOCITY 120 QBS TEMPO knob This adjusts the base tempo of the arpeggiator and sequencer The LED will blink at quarter note intervals of the current tempo GATE knob This adjusts the gate time note duration of the arpeggi ated notes At the center position
192. ck can be assigned to each of the 72 keys in the range of C 2 C8 If you do not assign a key it can be used to play as usual As in the example shown in the following diagram you can make one key play a drums pattern another key a bass phrase and yet another key play guitar chords all by specifying a different pattern and track for each key Pattern P000 Track01 Drums Program gt Pattern U000 Track02 Bass Program gt Pattern P001 Track0O1 Drums Program gt gt Pattern U001 Track02 Bass Program gt B Pattern U002 Track03 Guitar Program _ _ _ gt 33 Quick Start Arpeggiator RPPR F Type of Master effect Performance editor 34 Simple program editing By operating the performance editor and the realtime con trollers you can easily and intuitively modify the sound of a program Program editing refers to the process of modifying the parameters that make up a program in order to modify the sound or change the controller effect settings etc fe More detailed editing can be performed in Program P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect Performance Edit By using the eight sliders of the Performance Editor you can make overall adjustments to the sound When you edit the setting multiple program parameters are adjusted simultaneously Press the PROG key the LED will light to enter Program mode 2 Press th
193. controlled The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must be set to match the MIDI Channel of TRITON STUDIO tracks that are set to EXT EX2 or BTH If Status is set to BTH both the external tone genera tor and the TRITON STUDIO s own tone generator will be sounded and controlled If you are using the TRITON STUDIO s Sequencer mode as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator set this parameter to INT or BTH Status PG p 62 In general you should set MIDI Channel to different channels 1 16 for each track Tracks that are sent to the same MIDI channel will sound simultaneously when either is recorded or played SEQUENCER P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch 161 63 aa 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J ags b Manu P5000 NEW SONG Dl Track 1 Drums Reso ee Hi or RPPR 4 Adjust the effect settings Make settings for each effect in Sequencer P8 Insert Effect and P9 Master Effect p 141 PG p 83 6 Set the tempo and time signature Make these settings in Sequecner PO Play REC J Tempo sets the tempo and Meter sets the time signature amp PG p 49 6 As necessary set Reso to specify the quantization resolution p 51 7 Make other settings as necessary As necessary make arpeggiator settings Sequencer P7 Arpggiator and MIDI filter settings Sequencer P3 MIDI Filter PG p 49 86 When you are finished making these settings the basic setup is complete Record
194. cording P4 Controller Setup you can select and execute the Convert MS To Program page menu command When you execute this command the settings of the currently selected multisample will be con verted into a program In Program mode you can make fil ter amp and effect settings etc and play the sample as a program The resulting program can be used in a combi nation or song For details on the Convert MS To Program page menu command p 41 PG p 93 112 Using samples in a drum kit A sample you created in Sampling mode can be used as one of the instruments in a drum kit In the Global P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup page and Low Sample page set Drumsample Bank to RAM and use Drumsample to select the sample that you created Using Time Slice to divide a sample and playing it in Sequencer mode Time Slice is a function that detects the attack of the kick or snare etc in a rhythm loop sample a sample consisting of a looped pattern of drums etc and automatically divides it into separate instrumental sounds Each of the divided instrumental sounds is made into a sample of its own and then automatically expanded into a multisam ple and program Pattern playback data for the Sequencer mode using the divided samples is also created automati cally The time slices sample can be used in the following ways by the song of Sequencer mode e Multiple rhythm loop samples of differing tempo can be m
195. ct Bank amp Smpl No and make the following settings Select RAM Bank amp Sample No Bank P Rami _ Auto 12dB On Sample No L 0000 R P 69091 v Program gt 1 E193 InitialProglE 103 MS gt saa New MS aAA Orig Key C3 U sec event EERE Bank as desired Program Seq Event On Track a track that contains no recorded data Auto 12 dB On Off unchacked You should normally turn this Off when you sample external audio sources in Sequencer mode The power on default is On After making these settings press the OK button to close the dialog box 115 Basic functions Sampling settings Begin sampling Press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAM PLING START STOP key to enter recording standby mode Press the LOCATE key to reset the song playback location to the beginning of the song and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back If you want to verify the location press the Prog 9 16 tab to access the Program T09 16 page Begin playing at the point where you want to record Sampling will begin when the Threshold Level vol ume is exceeded At the point where you want to stop sampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key Sampling will also stop if the specified Sample Time is reached Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback Event data and a program will be assigned to the trac
196. ct a strings program for timbre 3 2 In the MIDI Ch page of P2 Edit Trk Param set Sta tus to INT for all the timbres that you wish to use and set MIDI Channel to either Gch or to match the global MIDI channel a G will be displayed after the channel number 3 In the Key Zone page of P4 Edit Zone Ctrl set Top Key and Bottom Key Set timbre 1 to a Top Key of G9 and a Bottom Key of C4 Set timbres 2 and 3 to a Top Key of B3 and a Bottom Key of C 1 You can also enter these values by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard COMBINATION P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone EEk _ e a aaa N Dank EXB a A Initial CombE AGAH i TOP Slope 66 68 i Key Zone Slope Here you can specify the range of keys over which the original volume will be reached starting at the top key and bottom key In the case of the above example you could set the key zones so that a portion of timbres 1 and 2 overlaps i e is layered with timbre 3 and set Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound changes gradually instead of changing suddenly between B3 and C4 Vel Zone page Velocity zone settings Here you can make settings for velocity switching and velocity crossfading For each timbre you can specify a range of velocities for which it will sound The range of velocities for which a timbre will sound is called a Velocity Zone
197. ct the optical digital out put jacks of your DAT etc to the S P DIF IN jack WA If the EXB mLAN option is installed digital audio can be input output via the mLAN connector If the EXB DI option is installed digital audio can be out put via the DIGITAL OUT jack PG p 286 5 Connecting pedals Foot pedal connections A foot pedal can be used to control various synthesis and effect parameters Connect an optional expression pedal such as the Korg XVP 10 or EXP 2 to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack The function controlled by the foot pedal is specified in Global P2 Foot Pedal Assign p 125 PG p 146 252 Foot switch connections A foot switch controls sostenuto soft pedal on off arpeg giator on off to select programs or combinations and to start stop the sequencer etc Connect an optional foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack The function assigned to the foot switch and the polarity of the foot switch can be set in Global P2 Foot Switch Assign and Foot Switch Polarity p 125 PG p 146 251 Damper pedal connections This pedal applies a piano style damper effect as you play Connect an optional footswitch to the DAMPER jack of the TRITON STUDIO If a Korg DS 1H is connected half damper effects can be produced The polarity of the pedal is set in Global P2 Controller Damper Polarity and the sensitivity is set in Global PO Half Damper Cali
198. cted hard disk make sure that the exter nal SCSI drive is connected PG p 298 Format the media if necessary amp PG p 170 2 Press the DISK key to enter Disk mode Drive select LAIF OC NEW OLUME i Giger iip re E O E 3 Press the Save tab to access the Save page 4 Press Drive Select to select the save destination drive If the media contains directories select the directory in which you want to save the data To move to a lower level press the Open button To move to a higher level press the Up button W Ifyou are saving data on high capacity media we recommend that you create directories to organize the media into sections To create a new directory move to the level at which you want to create the directory and execute the Util ity page menu command Create Directory 6 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Save All A dialog box will appear The contents settings and operations for the dialog box will depend on the type of data that you are saving For details refer to PG p 166 Save All PCG SNG and KSC T NEWFILE Program Combination PCG 7 SNG 7 KSC Drum Kit Arp Pattern G i ABCDEFGU ABCDEFGU FINTA HINT HINT i B exe Alla Betta Pa Pa Pa Pa P Pa Pa Pa HEL Pa Pa Pa Pa Pa Pa P Pa 7 Press the text edit button and input a filename for the file you want to save p 40 56 Press each Selection bu
199. d 76 Velocity Curve 124 Velocity drumsample switch ing 128 Velocity multisample switch ing 69 Velocity switch 76 78 Velocity Zone 79 Velocity Sample SW Lo gt Hi 128 Vibrato 25 70 71 74 Volume 3 19 27 34 36 68 72 76 82 108 Combination 36 Sequencer 82 VOLUME slider 3 W Wah 25 71 72 74 Write 5 55 Arpeggiator 29 30 Global settings User drum kits User arpeggio patterns 58 Program Combination 34 36 56 Realtime controls 34 SW1 SW2 25 User template song 55 Z Zero crosses 110 ZOOM button 44 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty 2002 KORG INC 1403 FTH Printed in Japan KORG INC 15 12 Shimotakaido 1 chome Suginami ku Tokyo Japan
200. d by the arpeggiator will be combined with the per formance data that was played manually and all of this data will be sounded by each track of the same channel if Status is INT In such cases you can solve the problem by changing the MIDI channel of the track that is played by the arpeggiator and then creating a track that will drive the arpeggiator If the recorded performance is not reproduced by the playback check the following conditions WA These settings can be executed automatically if you check Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC in the page menu command Copy From Combi Nor mally you will check this to execute the settings In this case these adjustments will not be necessary but you can verify here that the automatic adjustments have been made e Sequencer P7 Arpeggiator Setup T01 08 page Arpeggiator Run A B and Arpeggiator Assign settings 1 E Bass iBass rrastSun rFastSun Hit Ares Motions Drums Fastoun O sssecssese Arpeggiator Assign esacecsecseponcccsecososecsscofosessoscsssssencse 4 PE o Bo Don Be Hora ni Nesseessseesscnsssccssscssscessacessacessscssscessscessccssscesnceesscensscesasessscessssessceenscessasesscensasessscusssessscesscessssessasessseesssenneae e Sequencer P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch T01 08 page MIDI Channel settings 1 a Bass iBass rrastSun Fastsun Hiv Ares Motions Drums FastSun E E E og Pe P Dye De Dyn Dwr Blow EEN See eee Seen M
201. d in synthesizer performance such as using the joystick to vary the pitch are also provided as special parameters separate from alternate modulation TRITON STUDIO provides 29 types of alternate modula tion In single mode you can use 29 alternate modulation desti nations of 29 types and in double mode you can use 55 alternate modulation destinations of 29 types There are 42 AMS sources However depending on the type of modulation some sources cannot be selected For details on alternate modulation and AMS refer to PG p 241 Suggestions on using alternate modulation When making settings for alternate modulation think of the effect that you wish to produce what type of modula tion will be necessary to produce that effect and what parameter of the oscillator filter or amplifier needs to be controlled Then select a source AMS and set the Intensity If you proceed logically in this way you will achieve the desired effect For example if you want to control a guitar like sound so that it appears to be approaching feedback when the joy stick is moved away you will make settings so that the joystick controls filter modulation or the resonance level Combination settings Combination editing is performed in Combination mode just as combinations can be selected and played in Combi nation mode Combination mode consists of the P0 Play P9 Edit Mas ter FX pages In PO Play you can select
202. d play along on the keyboard with the song Arpeggiator You can use the arpeggiator for your keyboard perfor mance p 132 PG p 129 123 SMF playback Basic functions Settings for the entre TRITON STUDIO Global settings In Global mode you can make settings that affect the entire TRITON STUDIO such as master tune key trans pose effect global switch global MIDI channel and sys tem clock In this mode you can also make settings for the damper pedal assignable foot switch pedal and edit the program combination category names You can also cre ate user drum kits p 128 and user arpeggio patterns p 134 amp The edits you perform in Global mode will be pre served until the power is turned off but will not be preserved after the power is turned off Three types of data are handled in Global mode user drum kit settings Global P5 user arpeggio pattern settings Global P6 and all other global settings Global P0 P4 Each of these can be written into their respective memory area This data can also be saved to various types of media in Disk mode p 58 59 amp Global mode does not provide a Compare function that lets you return to the state of the data before it was edited Tuning to another instrument Transposing GLOBAL P Basic Setup Basic Master Tune ied 444 00Hz Key Transpose Velocity Curve After Touch Curve Effect Global SW _ Fx1 5 Off I mMFx1
203. did you set Recording Level below 0 0 The Recording Level setting affects the level of the sample data that is recorded but it is not possi ble to monitor that level If the sample playback is louder is Auto 12 dB On turned on If the playback is softer is this set ting turned off If you resampled the playback of a song or your playback performance using a program combina tion or sample or combined your performance with an external audio source and sampled the result did you set Recording Level to approxi mately 12 0 dB and turn on the Auto 12 dB On setting p 105 If you sampled only an external audio source did you set Recording Level to approximately 0 0 and turn off Auto 12 dB On amp p 105 150 Song or CD playback stops temporarily when you sample C Is Auto Optimize RAM checked If this is checked RAM will be optimized automati cally when sampling ends meaning that the sound will stop when sampling ends If a song is being played in Sequencer mode or if a CD is being played back the playback will stop There is a time lag after you press the SAMPLING REC key until you enter sampling standby mode The length of time until you enter sampling standby mode will depend on the state of the free space on the hard disk i e whether the free space is continuous or fragmented When sampling to the hard disk pressing the SAM PLING R
204. ding to the keyboard position at which you play a note ona TRITON STUDIO With a setting of LFO1 or 2 the sound will sweep from side to side auto pan Other settings allow you to move the oscillator pan by operating a controller Use DKit Setting This is valid when Oscillator Mode is set to Drums If this is checked the pan location specified by the Drum Kit for each drum sound will be used If this is unchecked all drum sounds will sound at the same location Preload and GM drum kits are set to stereo settings Normally you will leave this checked Amp Mod page PROGRAM P4 Edit Am Keyboard Track Key Low ZE Key Hi Ramp Low 84 Ramp High 06 Amp Modulation velocity Intensity 5 Amp1 Mod O S Intensity 00 LFO 1 2 LFO1 Intensity AMS Off Intensity 00 aMs off Intensity 86 k Lul Pant Mod EG vl PanJl_ Mod EG LFO2 Intensity Keyboard Track This lets you vary the volume relative to the position of the key you are playing on the keyboard e When Ramp Low has a positive value the volume will increase as you play lower on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play lower on the keyboard e When Ramp High has a positive value the volume will increase as you play higher on the keyboard With a negative value the volume will decrease as you play higher on the keyboard Amp Modulation Velocity Inte
205. dit the setting With a setting of C064 the sound will be located in the center A setting of L001 places the sound at the far left and R127 at the far right With a setting of RND the sound will move randomly between left and right each time a note is played Adjusting the volume Q Press Volume for timbre 2 it will be highlighted and use the VALUE controllers to edit the setting WA Ifyou check Hold Balance and adjust the Vol ume value the volume balance between the timbres at the time that Hold Balance was checked will be maintained while the volume of all timbres is adjusted Writing a Combination amp The edited content will be lost if you select another Combination or turn off the power before saving If you want to save the modified sound select the page menu command Write Combination and write the program p 56 It is best to write your own edited Combinations into an initial initialized combination of bank INT E or EXB A EXB G You should also give anew name to the combination you are writing W9 If you want to overwrite the combination using the same combination number press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the OK button Sampling recording a sample The TRITON STUDIO can record 48 kHz stereo 16 bit samples Sampling can be performed in Sampling Pro gram Combination and Sequencer modes Open Sam pling System The various functions
206. do things such as adjusting the pitch of only the snare replacing it with a different sample or changing the playback timing on the sequencer in this way creating a new rhythm loop based on the rhythm loop you started with Stereo samples are supported The Time Stretch function lets you modify the tempo without changing the pitch of a sample You can select either Sustaining suitable for sustain type instruments such as strings or vocals or Slice suitable for rhythm loops on decay type instruments such drums Stereo samples are supported The Crossfade Loop function is an important looping tool that helps smooth out irregularities in long loops which contain complex material By executing Crossfade Loop you can eliminate this problem and create natural sounding loops The Link with Crossfade function allows you to join two samples into a single sample You can also crossfade the overlapping portion of the samples at this time so that the volume changes gradually producing a natural sounding transition The BPM Adjust function playback pitch adjust lets you adjust the playback pitch of each index so that the loop frequency matches the desired BPM value You can use resampling auto to automatically apply effects to a sample and create a new sample How Sampling mode is organized This section describes how sampling on the TRITON STU DIO is organized see the lower diagram on the follow ing page Sampling freque
207. e Disk Media Information to re mount the SCSI device The TRITON STUDIO does not recognize when MO disk has been exchanged and does not correctly display the media information after the exchange If you are able to switch the mode setting of your MO drive between PC AT and Mac settings please use PC AT mode For details on changing the mode of your drive refer to the owner s manual for your MO drive L If your MO drive does not have a mode setting or if the media exchange is not recognized even after you switch the mode use the drive select button to select a different drive and then re select the MO drive Error in writing to medium occurs frequently when saving data to the internal hard drive or external device Execute the page menu command Check Medium Disk Utility page to detect and correct errors on the selected MS DOS format media PG p 171 CD R RW CD R RW drive is not recognized If you are using the CDRW 1 option was it installed correctly Turn on the power of the TRITON STUDIO once again and verify that the CDRW 1 is displayed in the startup screen If it is not displayed turn off the power and re install the drive correctly p 19 151 ices roubleshooting Can t write _ Was the drive subjected to physical shock or vibration while data is being written _ If you are unable to save data such as PCG or SNG files has the disc been
208. e Convert Cue List dialog box will appear Convert Cue List C98 to Song To Song PEASE 3 Press the OK button The cue list will be converted into a song Access the PO Play REC page select the song number that you specified as the conversion destination and check the results SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 661 61 GQ Meter 4 4 J 108 P Auto S003 NEW CUELIST 00 gt Track 8 Lead Synth DE i ai ae che i i Dia iStandare Fretless Pro a Funkin CiStereo Percussi Tsunami Espress Creating and recording RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Record This section explains how to assign a pattern to RPPR and how to play and record Playing with the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function p 33 Creating RPPR data 1 Create a new song 1 p 88 2 Specify the program for each track For this example we will use a template song Use the Utility menu command Load Template Song to load P14 Hip Hop Rap It is not necessary to copy the pat terns p 49 3 Select the Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page In this page the RPPR function is automatically turned on SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR P 5004 Hip Hop Rap P Tracka Drums RPPR Setup EEk A J 090 AGES HipHop Kit RPPR Setup KEY Assign Mode Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Syne gt Beat Pattern gt Preset P P1 21 HipHop 1 HipHop Track P Trackat Drums Shift 0
209. e make the following settings for Sampling Setup Source BUS L R This lets you sample the sound of the L R channel i e the sound that is output from the headphones and the AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R jacks Trigger Note On With this setting sampling will begin the instant you play the keyboard Save to RAM The sample will be written into sample memory RAM Mode Stereo The sound will be sampled in stereo Quick Start WA If desired you can set Sample Time a bit longer than necessary and then after sampling use editing commands in Sampling mode such as TRUNCATE to delete any unwanted portion at the beginning or end of the sample If the tempo J is 120 and the time signature is 4 4 it will take two seconds to play one measure If you want to sample one measure a sampling time of 00 min 02 000 sec will be the exact length 4 Make settings for the sample that will be recorded 4 Select the page menu command Select Bank amp Smpl No to access the dialog box Select RAM Bank amp Sample No Bank gt Rami VY Auto 12dB On Sample No L 0099 R 2001 prooram D SERRE ec MS gt aaa NewMS___ Orig Key C3 2 Set Bank Sample No L and R to specify the sample memory RAM and sample number into which the sample will be written If the above Mode is Stereo specify L and R 3 In the Convert to area speci
210. e make the volume of the notes more consistent even when they are played with varying velocities dynamics Each curve has its own character so you can select the curve that is appropriate for your own playing dynamics playing style and the effect that you wish to obtain PG p 135 1 Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode 2 Press the EXIT key 3 Select the Basic tab 4 To change the velocity curve select Velocity Curve and specify the desired curve To change the after touch curve select After Touch Curve and specify the desired curve WA This setting will affect the operation of the entire TRI TON STUDIO WA Each program has parameters that allow you to adjust the effect of velocity playing dynamics and the change will depend on the settings of these parameters These parameters can be individually set in detail in Program mode Bypassing the effects Normally effects are turned on off within each program combination or song or in Sampling mode or Song Play mode However if you want the entire TRITON STUDIO not to use its insert effects or master effects you can bypass these effects This is set by the Effect Global SW parameter in the Global PO Basic Setup Basic page Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode 2 Press the EXIT key 3 Select the Basic tab 4 To turn off insert effects 1 5 check the IFX1 5 Off check box To turn off master effect 1 chec
211. e overwritten For details on other recording modes refer to p 83 and PG p 57 When recording rapid or difficult phrases you can slow down the tempo and record at a more comfort able tempo Simply adjust the J Tempo After recording restore the original tempo SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 001 01 000 Meter 444 J EB P Man gt 1S000 Acid Jazz P TrackG2 Bass Reso P Hi _ RPPR WA You can use the Quantize and Resolution functions to correct the timing of your performance as it is recorded For example during realtime recording suppose that you input eighth notes at slightly inaccurate timing as shown in line 1 of the diagram below If you set Reso Resolution to J and performed realtime recording the timing would automatically be cor rected as shown in line 2 With a setting of Hi the performance will be recorded with the exact timing at which it was played SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 998 gt Manu 15000 Acid Jazz P TrackG2 Bass Reso gt AM L RPPR Independent of this function there is also a page menu command Quantize P5 Track Edit Track Edit page that can be used to correct the timing of performance data that has already been recorded If data recorded without using Realtime Quantize falls at the timings shown in the above figure 1 then when played back it will be corrected to the timings shown in figure 2 if
212. e Group setting is used when you wish to group drumsamples of the same type For example if the note number assigned to an open hi hat drumsample and a closed hi hat drumsample are set to the same exclusive group number the open hi hat and closed hi hat can not be sounded simulta neously ensuring that the hi hat performance will sound natural 2 Use BUS Select to specify the output routing Set this when you wish to send the output of the drum sample assigned to each note number to its own insert effect or AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL jack 1 4 For example you might send all snare sounds to IFX1 all kick sounds to IFX2 and the remaining sounds to L R You can also specify 1 2 3 4 1 2 or 3 4 so that spe cific drum samples will be sent to the AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks The settings you make here are used if Use DKit Set ting Program P8 Edit Inert Effect Routing page is checked for the program that uses this drum kit PG p 28 179 3 Use Pan to specify the stereo output position The setting you make here is valid if the Use DKit Setting is checked Program P4 Edit Amp Amp1 Level Pan page for the program that uses this drum kit PG p 21 Use Send1 MFX1 and Send2 MFX2 to set the send levels to the master effects The settings you make here are valid if the Use DKit Setting is checked Program P8 Edit Insert Effect Routing page for the program that
213. e If both Mute and Solo are used the Solo function will be given priority 5 Press track 2 SOLO ON OFF The display will change and only the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be heard To switch Solo off press SOLO ON OFF once again Press SOLO ON OFF for both tracks 1 and 2 The display will change and the playback of tracks 1 and 2 will be muted If the Solo function is turned off for all tracks playback will be according to the PLAY MUTE REC settings R By using the page menu command Solo Selected Track you can listen to the sound of only the selected track This is convenient when you want to set track parameters or to make effect settings PG p 52 LO CATE settings By pressing the LOCATE key you can move to a speci fied location The location is specified by the Utility menu command Set Location You can also hold down the ENTER key and press the LOCATE key to set the location even dur ing playback PG p 54 When you select a song the LOCATE setting will auto matically be set to 001 01 000 Normally you will leave this set to 001 01 000 to return you to the begining of the song Recording methods This section describes the ways in which you can record on the TRITON STUDIO Recording a track There are two ways to record to a track realtime record ing and step recording You can choose from six types of realtime recording In addition you can
214. e Perf Edit tab The Performance Edit page will appear unctions assigned to SW1 and SW2 keys PROGRAM P Play Performance Category E Bank INT A BE FastSunth d 125 E000 Noisy Stabber EEES AE EA EE tees vstnerscsvsssanGegieusuacawensvecstacs ahecsdisvatsedevseivaahessh eaisuacesein Sicnaraesdissancsseusesvssneeass Swi Portas CCHES HIFI BAE St Graphic TER H Knob 1B Attack i Sie JS amp Ribbon Lock Fae b2aStereo Phaser 2 Knob2B Decay i Suninnnminnnanimmamnimin nnn sti TF HS B53 Reverck SmoothHall Knob3B Sust RnobdB kModd Type of Insert effect HIF Xd GG6 No Effect HIFS3 GG Ho Effect MEM 1 G20 Stereo Flanger IMFM2 Gd9 L C R BPM Delay Performance Editor ppe ppepd Oetave gn Amp Attack Decay tretch pies Lepel Time Time PRA Beene me e Parameters assigned to B mode of the realtime editor 3 Select the Program 4 Select the Performance Editor and use the VALUE controllers to edit the settings fe If you want to reset the value to the value saved with the selected program press numeric key 0 and then press the ENTER key to restore the previous setting e Octave Indicates the octave setting e Pitch Stretch Simultaneously adjusts the transpose and tune settings of the oscillator This allows you to produce a variety of tonal changes without losing the character of the original sound WA This is particularly effective for acoustic type pro grams such as guitar bass or
215. e displayed in the upper left of the LCD screen EXB A EXB G With the factory settings these banks do not contain programs These banks are used to load programs for the EXB PCM series options or they can be used to hold programs that you create 128 programs can be written or rewritten to each bank INT A INT E EXB A EXB G for a total of 1 536 t For details of the program names etc refer to VNL Voice Name List Selecting programs by category You can select programs by category such as keyboard organ bass and drums With the factory settings the preloaded programs and preseted program are organized into sixteen categories You can choose a category and then select from the pro grams in that category Press the Category popup button A tabbed Category Program Select popup menu will appear Category Program Select 15 Drums fe uboarl IRC EE AC AALA I BO04 Jazz Brush Kits ieee 81 09 Organ i SlowSyn 82 16 Bell Mal FastSyn 83 i i 11 Strings e LeadSy ad 12 85 i 13 Brass SE K f i Hit Arp kee 100 BD amp SD Kit 2 Pms In the above graphic category 15 Drums is selected The center area shows the programs contained in that category 2 Press the tabs located at the left and right to select a different category The name of the selected category will be displayed in full in the upper right 3 Press a program name
216. e erage iancmn eee 3 Rear pane liurecesirian nan e heen 6 Names and functions of objects in the LCD screen 8 Connect ONS spiecanu aaas 10 1 Connecting the power cable eee 11 2 Analog audio output connections 11 3 Analog audio input connections cee 11 4 Digital audio input output connections 11 De COMMeChne PECANS sta acrtzoiciel n 11 6 SCSI deyice connections 12 7 Connections to MIDI equipment computers 12 8 Installing options 5 bsarosssabyioin sure seat iestectackoctsaus tess 12 BaSiC CONCEPIS sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaes 13 OVETVIEW OF the Modessa evteveastisneaadaens 13 ADOUL POLY DNONY naa inane 15 Tone generators and oscillators eee 15 Number of voices in each mode 15 Dasic Operati Oesia i 16 Te SELGCHING MOde Sawarna a 16 2 Oele NNE PA ESen a 16 Dy De CNP a Pal all eleginen AS 17 Quick Start ccccccceseeeeeeees 19 Turning the power On Off cccseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19 1 Turning the power ON Giieiisiisaicasnsceatearonrauovds 19 2 LOTS INS POWER Ol unana S 19 Listening to a demo SONG s seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 20 1 Loading the demo song data in Disk mode 20 2 Selecting and playing a demonstration song in Seguen er INOA Eiee n ln et vieestcewuedadevaueets 21 Playing a cue liskarren 21 Selecting and playing a program sssssssssssssn 22 Selectne A PEO raoran cad Gar ccestayties 22 Selecting and playing a combination
217. e foot switch as a modulation controller to select programs or combinations or to start stop the sequencer p 125 PEDAL jack An optional Korg EXP 2 or XVP 10 expression pedal can be connected here p 11 Its function can be assigned in Global mode allowing you to use the pedal to control the volume etc p 124 10 Contrast adjustment knob This adjusts the contrast of the LCD screen The optimal setting will depend on the height or angle from which you view the screen display so please adjust as necessary 11 EXB DI option OUT jack This is an ADAT optical format digital output connector It outputs the six channels of the TRITON STUDIO s AUDIO OUTPUT jacks MAIN L MONO R INDIVID UAL 1 2 3 4 analog audio outputs as digital audio with a sampling rate of 48 kHz These signals are output as channels 1 through 6 of the ADAT optical format By connecting this to the DIGITAL IN jack of an ADAT Optical format compatible mixer amp or recorder you can output the audio signal of the TRITON STUDIO in digital form Use an optical cable made by the Alesis Cor poration or an optical cable for CD DAT both sold sepa rately to make this connection p 11 PG p 286 300 The VOLUME slider does not adjust the output level of this connector 48 kHz WORD CLOCK IN jack Connect this to the WORD CLOCK OUT jack of an ADAT Optical format compatible mixer or remote controller Use this when you want the connected d
218. e playback of a song or your keyboard performance using a program combi nation or sample When simultaneously resampling and sampling an external audio source Recording Level 12 0 dB Auto 12 dB On on checked t p 105 The recording level and Auto 12 dB On When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC key 103 Basic functions Sampling settings 3 Specifying the recording method Recording Setup Sampling Setup C In Source BUS select the source that you want to sample The sound being sent to the bus you select here will be sampled L R The sound being sent to the L R bus will be sam pled Indiv 1 2 The sound being sent to the Individual 1 2 bus will be sampled For examples of these settings refer to the various examples of sampling p 37 43 45 47 115 SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input1 Level 127_ BUS IFX Indiv Select L R Pan LOGO Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup input Setup M A Trigger P Threshold Level 30 dB Input Prefe Memory Setup Jl rence Jl Status 2 Use Trigger to specify how sampling will begin The available trigger methods will differ depending on the mode Sampling mode Sampling START SW Note On Threshold Program Combination modes Sampling START SW Note On Sequencer mode Samp
219. e sample or multisample The TRITON STUDIO allows you to create up to 4 000 samples and 1 000 multisamples limited by the amount of memory It is a good idea to assign names so that you can distinguish individual samples and multisamples Naming a multisample 1 Press the Recording tab to access the PO Recording Recording page In MS select the multisample that you want to name 3 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Rename MS Rename Multisample T NewMS____oag Press the text dialog button to display the text dialog box and assign a name of SMPL Demo p 56 pe Character Set PAASA RS EES A E Jenn Comm NAAAAEACICIE HAHUA AHAAA aaHHAHATEA Press the Clear button Press the Shift button to switch to uppercase letters and press S M P L and D in that order Press the Shift button once again to switch to lower case letters and press e m and o in that order Press the OK button to close the text dialog box If you do not need to make any corrections press the OK button to execute Rename Multisample and complete the procedure WA A stereo multisample will have a L and R displayed at the end of the name meaning that you will be able to input 14 characters The L and R are fixed You can input 16 characters for a mono multisample This also applies to samples Naming a sample C Press the Recording tab to access the PO Record
220. e selected We will copy the effect settings of the combination as well so check the With Effects check box Since we want to copy the settings of the combination s eight timbres to tracks 1 8 select Track 1 to 8 If you have selected Track 1 to 8 you will be able to select Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC If you check this check box the MIDI channel etc of some of the tracks will automatically be adjusted to ensure that the same sound as was used during recording will be reproduced by the playback when you perform multi track recording with the arpeggiator turned on amp Depending on the combination settings it may be necessary to make additional changes to the track set tings WA In order to use the Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC function the combination to be copied must have been written with the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key turned on Press the OK button to execute the copy Notice that when you execute this command the PLAY REC MUTE setting of each track will be set automatically 95 Basic functions Producing songs 96 In the Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page the Multi REC check box will be checked SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 001 01 000 Meter 444 J as3 gt Manu S005 NEW SONG Maai TRACK 01 Reso gt Hi i Category gt 15 iD 15 gus Drums k Progra Di Dia Diol ee Sita 7 D aaa D aaa iMetalic
221. e tempo is changed You will need to adjust the way in which the samples are divided in step RS The silence between samples may become obtrusive if you play back at a slower tempo or noise may occur between samples if you play back at a faster tempo To avoid such problems you can set Stretch New BPM or Ratio in step to the tempo at which you want to play back and execute time stretch to adjust the length of each sample PG p 112 In Song Select choose 001 114 SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 120 ph Maru 001 NEW SONG P Tracker TRACK 81 ak Pregra m 4 Dill T TA Pe D kanal Sil m a StiNoisy StiN x ti The following song data has been set created automat ically as you specified in step PO Play REC page Song 001 Meter 4 4 Tempo 120 RPPR On PO Play REC Program T01 08 page Track01 Program INT E102 P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page Key C 2 Assign On Pattern User U00 Track Track01 Pattern data 1 measure D2 SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup EEk A MEERE J 120 P Tracka1 TRACK ot KEY C 2 Assign Mode P Manual Shift 00 C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync gt Beat Pattern P User gt uaa PATTERN 00 Track all Mkali TRACK 01 Cto last assigned Event Edit Pattern U Measure pmi Index HAHAH Meter 4 4 BT 1 000 PROG Bank I E P 102 BT 01 000 D2 V 127 L 900 094 BT 0
222. e the following points Data loss may occur if a floppy disk is handled improperly Floppy disk type and format The TRITON STUDIO can use 2HD or 2DD 3 5 inch floppy disks Floppy disk handling e Do not open the shutter of a floppy disk or touch the magnetic surface inside the disk If the magnetic disk becomes soiled or scratched it will no longer be possible to read the data e Never transport the TRITON STUDIO with a floppy disk in the disk drive Vibration may cause the disk drive heads to scratch the floppy disk making it unusable e Do not allow a floppy disk to be placed near a device that emits a magnetic field such as a television computer computer display speaker or power supply transformer This can erase data on the disk e Do not use or store floppy disks in locations of excessive temperature or humidity in direct sunlight or in dusty or dirty locations e Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk e While the disk drive is operating do not attempt to remove the floppy disk and do not subject the TRITON STUDIO to physical shock Floppy disk write protect Floppy disks have a small write protect hole that can be used to prevent data from being erased or rewritten acci dentally After saving data to disk move the write protect tab so that the hole is uncovered This will prohibit writing to the disk and will prevent the data from being destroyed acci dentally Write prohibit Move the tab so that th
223. e when you monitor the results of resampling through an insert effect If you want to apply an insert effect once again re select IFX1 3 In the P0 Recording Input Setup page set Resam 5 As an alternative to automatically resampling as ple to Auto described above Resample Auto you can simply sample the sounds that you play from the keyboard Use Key to specify the sample that will be resam Resample Manual pled Set this to C2 107 In Sample Select assign the sample that you will resample and set Resample to Manual Set Trig ger to Note On and set Sample Mode to Stereo as desired Then set the bus and effect as described in steps 8 and 4 press the SAMPLING REC and then the START STOP key and then press the C2 key to start resampling When you want to stop resampling press the SAMPLING START STOP key CHOHOCHCHCHCHCHCOCCEOCOCHECHCO COE OOOO ECC Ripping Digital data from an audio CD inserted in the CDRW 1 option or a SCSI connected CD ROM or CD R RW drive can be sampled in the digital domain This process is known as ripping You can either read the audio CD playback from the AUDIO INPUT as analog audio or directly read it as digi tal data amp In order to perform this operation you must either install the CDRW 1 option or connect an external CD ROM or CD R RW drive to the SCSI connector For details on installing the CDRW 1 refer
224. e write protect hole is Open Write permit Move the tab so that the write protect hole is covered lab 8h Inserting a floppy disk With the label of the floppy disk facing upward insert it into the disk drive Press the disk inward until it clicks into place Malfunctions will occur if you use excessive force to insert the disk Disks must be inserted gently and straight in indicator Removing a floppy disk To remove a floppy disk first make sure that the disk access indicator is dark Then press the eject button and remove the disk If the disk does not come out when you press this button do not attempt to remove the disk by force Please contact your dealer Eject button Disk access indicator Head cleaning If the heads of the disk drive are soiled errors may occur during saving or loading It is important to clean the heads regularly using a commercially available wet type 3 5 inch double sided head cleaning disk For the cleaning procedure refer to the owner s manual for your cleaning disk MIDI data dump The programs INT A INT E EXB A EXB G combina tions INT A INT E EXB A EXB G user drum kits user areggio patterns and global settings of internal memory and sequencer songs cue lists can be transmitted as MIDI exclusive data and saved on a connected MIDI data filer computer or another TRITON STUDIO PG p 145 Loading data and restoring the factory settings
225. ear SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit 2 Notice that 0000 LOOP1 140BPM L is selected for Sample Sample Select and that the sample wave form data is displayed The selected sample is a stereo sample The L and R waveforms will be shown in the upper and lower parts of the sample waveform display 3 Use Start to set the start address LoopS Loop Start to set the loop start address and End to set the end address The sample will sound as follows When looping is on S gt E gt LoopS gt E gt continue repeating LoopS gt E When looping is off S gt E Select Start highlighted and use the VALUE dial etc to specify the location at which the sample will begin sounding The vertical line in the display will move accordingly WA If necessary you can press the ZOOM buttons to expand or shrink the waveform display Zoom will expand or contract the display beginning at the Start LoopS Loop Start or End point that is selected Zoom in vertically Zoom out oo c t B zor in horizontally Maximum EH horizontal zoom in horizontal zoom out E n a Zoom out veins If you check Use Zero locations where the wave form is at zero will automatically be found and selected when you use the VALUE dial etc to set Start LoopS Loop Start or End points This makes it easy to set these points to addresses that will not produce clic
226. eated 1 Choose Song Select to select a song For this example select song 002 2 In the Sequencer P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page select the page menu command Rename Song Rename Song S002 T Acid Jazz A dialog box will appear Press the text edit button to access the text dialog box Press the Clear button and input CHORUS p 40 When you are finished inputting the name press the OK button Press the OK button once again to execute the Rename operation 3 As described in steps 1 and 2 assign a name of INTRO to S000 and VERSE to S001 3 Setting the number of measures in the song Here s how to specify the number of measures in the song By default this is set to 64 measures If you realtime record for more measures than this the song length will be the amount of measures you have recorded 1 Select song S000 INTRO 2 Select the Sequencer P5 Track Edit Track Edit page In the P5 Track Edit page press the MENU key to access the Jump page Press the P5 Track Edit SEQUENCER P5 Track Edit Track Edit 6 601 61 66 Meter 44 J 108 gt Manu gt S 000 INTRO Track s8 Lead Synth Reso Dh Hi E RPPR From Measure 681 To End of Measure 868 3 Access the page menu This contains various commands for editing tracks and measures Press the Set Song Length A dialog box will appear 0000 000000000H088OO888OO8E 8 4 Changing the key transpos
227. ed to 2x amp Be aware that if you use a faster writing speed ina slower system writing errors will occur Use Mode to specify the writing method note Depending on the drive you are using it may not be possible to write at the specified speed We recom mend that the first time you write you select Test to perform a writing test in order to determine the speed capabilities of your drive Test will not write data to the CD R RW media but will perform all other processing just as when data is actually written If an error occurs the display will indicate Error in writing to medium Press the OK button to execute the writing test After verifying that data can be written correctly at the specified speed select Write Execute finalize too specifies whether Finalization will be executed after the audio tracks have been writ ten to the CD R RW media If finalization has been executed the disc can be played back on a CD player but it will no longer be possible to add more tracks EA If you only want to execute finalization execute Finalize Audio CD When you are ready to write to the CD R RW media or to execute a writing test press the OK button To cancel without executing press the Cancel button amp When you press the OK button the Obey Copyright Rules dialog box will appear Carefully read About copyright p iii If you accept the terms press the OK button to write to the C
228. effect that is applied to the signal that has passed through the IFX These settings can be made in the same way as for a program p 140 141 Effects settings Basic functions COMBINATION P8 Edit Insert FX Insert FX i Bank INT A 000 Romance Layers Chain Insert Effect PantCC 8 BU l Sendi Send2 E oN 7 FJ mi 126 G64 ma otetes Lar i Pie fet gt 26 Stereo Flanger FX 1 2 3 d 5 Master effects Master EQ These settings can be made in the same way as in Effect settings for a program p 141 Effect settings in Sampling mode In Sampling mode you can apply an insert effect to an external audio source that is input from AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN or mLAN if the EXB mLAN option is installed or to audio from an audio CD if the CDRW 1 option is installed and sample the result You can also apply an insert effect to the samples assigned to a multi sample and resample the result Routing Use Input SAMPLING to specify the external audio input and set the Sampling P0 Recording Input Setup page BUS IFX Indiv Select parame ter to specify the bus i e the insert effect to which the signal will be sent p 39 SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input1 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Pan LOBA Input2 Level 127_ BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt Off Pan R127 ecording Setu Tria o e BUS L R Trigger Sampling
229. eggio Select A and B to select the arpeggiator that you wish to edit If this is A your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A If this is B your editing will apply to the parameters and user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B 6 Switch between arpeggiators A and B and edit their respective user arpeggio patterns If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators return to Combination mode and in Combination PO Play select the Arpeggio Play A or the Arpeggio Play B page and uncheck the Arpeggiator Run check box 6 To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern use the Utility Rename Arpeggio Pattern p 56 7 If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern in internal memory you must write the user arpeggio pattern In this case both user arpeggio patterns will be written simultaneously If you turn off the power without writ ing the edited contents will be lost p 58 If you wish to save the state of the combination at the same time return to Combination mode and write the combination p 56 WA When editing a user arpeggio pattern pay attention to the global MIDI channel the channel of each track and the arpeggiator assignments and make sure that the arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern that you wish to edit amp If you moved here from Sampling mode the arpeg giator will not turn on Nor will it be possible to edit arpeggio patterns 137
230. egory Category Timbre2 Program 4 Keyboard kutoa l 4001 Acoustic Piano il Al G7 SynPiano tsa 13 Sweeping EP If you wish to select a program from a different cate gory press one of the tabs located to the left and right to select the desired category The full name of the selected category will appear in the upper right Let s select the 04 Vocal Airy category Press the 04 Vocal Airy electric tab and then press the desired program to select it The program you pressed will be highlighted Press the scroll bar to see other programs in the same category For this example select INT C027 Dream Voices This will produce a layered combination consisting of a piano and voice maalt MLE Program 84 Vocal Airy I CO43 The Airvox l C 61 Digital Voice 6 If you are satisfied with the selected program press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button your selection will be discarded and you will return to the program that had been selected before the popup menu was opened For this example press the OK button Adjusting the stereo position 7 Press the Mixer tab COMBINATION P8 QIWIS VQ oo C064 C064 C064 C064 C064 C064 C064 COb4 asesasasascoascssejosoasaososoesaososbossssssaonssososos as i Volume m aoe Hold Bal ance Mixer weary beh eae s E Press Pan for timbre 2 it will be highlighted and use the VALUE controllers to e
231. elect WJHOD INTERNAL HD In the drive select field select the drive Use the Open and Up buttons to move between levels of the direc tory hierarchy to select the desired directory Press the Done button to finalize the settings i If you sampled to the internal hard disk etc as a WAVE file the Auto 12 dB On setting will be ignored The playback level of the WAVE file is set by WAVE File Play Level PG p 138 2 In Sample Time specify the length of time that you want to sample This can be set in units of minutes and seconds If you are sampling to RAM sample memory you can sample a maximum of approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds in mono or approximately 1 minute 27 sec onds in stereo If you have installed additional SIMM boards to expand the sample memory to 96 Mbytes you will be able to sample up to six samples of 2 min utes 54 seconds each in mono or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds in stereo for a total of 17 minutes 28 seconds or approximately 8 minutes 44 seconds in stereo If you are sampling to DISK you can sample a maxi mum of 80 minutes in either mono or stereo mono approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 879 Mbytes 3 Set Sample Mode to specify whether a mono or a stereo file will be created L Mono The sound of the internal L channel will be sampled in mono R Mono The sound of the internal R channel will be sampled in mono Stereo The sound of the
232. ename you specified in step will appear in the Jukebox list 6 Select the file that will be played second and press the Add button Add files to the Jukebox list in the order that they will be played A maximum of 100 files 00 99 can be regis tered in the Jukebox list To delete a file from the Jukebox list press the Delete button D Press the EXIT key to display P0 Prog Mix Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key The files will playback in the order in which they were registered 9 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key once again to stop playback amp Only files in the same directory can be registered in a jukebox list If you perform the following operations while creat ing a jukebox list the jukebox list will be lost e Change the directory e Remove media such as the floppy disk e Change drives 122 Saving a Jukebox list Saving procedure 1 Use the procedure described above to create a juke box list 2 If you want to save the jukebox list on the internal hard disk or an external SCSI device use the P3 Jukebox drive select button to select the drive on which you want to save the data 3 In P3 Jukebox select the Save Jukebox List page menu command Save Jukebox List T MYLIST 4 Use the text edit button to enter a name for the juke box list p 40 57 5 Press the OK button The jukebox list will be saved to the media Loading procedure In the Jukebox
233. encer For details on each of these functions refer to PG p 246 248 Setting example We will show how you can use dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime As described in the procedure for Effect settings for a program p 140 set IFX1 to 049 L C R BPM Delay Verify that a delay sound is being output 2 Access the Program P8 Edit Insert Effect IFX1 page Using Dmod to change the delay level by moving the joystick away from yourself 3 Set Input Level Dmod to 100 4 Set Src to JS Y CC 01 The delay sound will disap pear The input level to the effect can be controlled by the joystick As you move the joystick away from yourself the delay sound will gradually increase PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect L C R BPM Delay BPM 126 L Delay Base Note Jf Times x3 Level 20 C Delay Base Note d Times x1 Level 26 R Delay Base Note J Times x1 Level 20 Feedback C Delay 10 sre gt Off Amt 8 IFX1 a Time Over gt High Damp a Low Damp a Input Level Dmod 100 Sre gt NER Spread 50 Wet Dry 58 50 Sre orf Amt 0 I FX 1 2 3 d 5 Using Dmod to modify the feedback level from SW 1 key In P1 Edit Basic select the Controller Setup page and set the function of SW1 to SW1 Mod CC 80 Toggle 6 Return to P8 Set Feedback Src to SW 1 CC 80 T Set Amt to 30 PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect L
234. ength and velocity of each note can be specified in the LCD as you input the pitches from the keyboard The musical data and control events that you recorded can be edited in various ways including event editing and many other edit commands When the Status of a track is set to INT or BTH an external sequencer can be used to play TRITON STUDIO as a multi timbral tone generator When the Status of a track is set to BTH EXT or EXT2 the sequencer of TRITON STUDIO can play external tone generators Playback can be synchronized with an external MIDI device TRITON STUDIO s AMS Alternate Modulation capability lets you use control changes for realtime control of the parameters of the programs used in a program Its MIDI Sync abilities let you synchronize the LFO speed to changes in the tempo Dmod Dynamic Modulation functionality lets you control effect parameters in realtime You can also use MIDI Sync to synchronize the LFO speed or delay time to changes in the tempo You can assign names not only to the song but also to each pattern and track Combination settings can be copied to a song Sequencer data such as a song or cue list that you create can be saved in TRITON STUDIO s native format or transmitted as a MIDI data dump A song you created can be converted into SMF Standard MIDI File data SMF songs can also be loaded The PLAY MUTE REC and SOLO On Off let you instantly play mute any desired tr
235. enu Check the Copy Pattern to Track too check box If this is checked a drum pattern will be copied to the song after the template song is loaded Press the OK button to load the template song A dialog box will appear Copy Pattern to Track Pattern gt Preset pb Pt G9 AcidJazz 1 Std2 Track 01 Measure 881 Make sure that Preset P109 AcidJazz 1 Std2 is selected at the right of Pattern If not use the VALUE controller to select it You can press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to hear the selected pattern To stop press the START STOP key once again Press the OK button to copy the pattern The Measure value will change from 001 to 009 This indicates that the pattern has been copied from mea sure 1 to measure 8 and that the next time you press the OK button the pattern will be copied from measure 9 Copy Pattern to Track Pattern gt Preset bp Pt 09 AcidJazz 1 Std2 Track 1 Measure 89 Press the Exit button In the Sequencer PO Play REC Program T01 08 page the Song Select field will indicate S000 Acid Jazz SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 661 61 666 Meter 474 108 gt Manu CS000 Acid Jazz P Track 1 Drums Reso P Hi _ RPPR Track Select c Py or fibes E Guitar Strings Bank Program Quick Start Sampling Song a beat ecoe WA There are 16 template songs each containing pro f gram pan volume
236. enu will appear allowing you to perform the following selections e Bank Program Select Bank Combination Select Select programs or combinations by bank e Multisample Select Select a multisample for a program oscillator by category ROM multisamples only e Category Effect Select Select an insert effect or master effect by category To close the tabbed popup menu press the OK button or Cancel button e Category popup button When you press this button a tabbed popup menu will appear allowing you to perform the following selections e Category Program Select Category Combination Select Select programs or combinations by category To close the tabbed popup menu press the OK button or Cancel button f Check box Each time you press a check box a check mark will be added or removed When checked the parameter will function when unchecked the parameter will not function g Radio buttons Press a radio button to select one value from two or more choices h Tab Press the tab to select a page I Page menu button When this button is pressed a list of page menu com mands will appear The page menu commands that appear will depend on the currently selected page You can also select up to ten page menu commands by holding down the ENTER key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 The page menu will close when you press the LCD screen at a location other than the page men
237. equencer will return to the location at which recording began If you made a mistake during your performance or would like to re record you can use the Compare func tion press the COMPARE key to re record as many times as you wish If you want to record other tracks un check the Multi REC or RPPR check boxes as necessary In step uncheck the Multi REC check box to defeat multi track recording In step uncheck the RPPR check box to turn off the RPPR function Recording the sounds of a combi nation Here s how you can copy the sounds of a combination to multiple tracks and record your performance note Make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 1 Create a new song p 88 SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 001 01 000 Meter 474 J 120 gt Manu S005 NEW SONG Reso Hi E kiii P Trackat T TRACK 01 er me s asssevsasssosa r m Hice B D a6 Bel D ol Noisy t ai St iNoi 2 Execute the page menu command Copy From Combi A dialog box will appear Copy from Combination Combination D BG S5 Steely Keys with Effects Tracki tos Track9to 16 Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC Select the combination that you want to copy i e the copy source Press the COMBI BANK INT B key then press numeric keys 8 5 and finally press the ENTER key I B085 Steely Keys will b
238. er the power is turned on the Index will be indicated as 001 001 This means that there is only one index The range that is highlighted in the keyboard amp Index is the range of the selected index Press the Create button several times Each time you press it an index will be created The keyboard display will indicate the zone and original key location of each index 106 iS The index that is created when you press the Create button will be created according to the PO Recording Pregerence page Create Zone Preference settings These settings can also be made in P3 Multisample Preference page Create Zone Preference PG p 99 119 SAMPLING P Recording Create Zone Preference Position gt Right te Preference EEk i zone Range 12 Keys Original Key Position gt Bottom REC Sample Preference Auto Loop On __ Auto 12dB On Metronome Setup BUS Output Select L R Level 12 Lins N setup renee Sis Immediately after the power is turned on Position will be Right to selected index Zone Range will be 12 Keys and Original Key Position will be Bot tom so that indexes will be created as shown below MS gt GGG NewMS aaa index GEIM gas Rs i you set Zone Range to 1 Key an index will be created for each note of the keyboard It is convenient to use 1 Key when you wish to sample numerous takes in succession such as when recording phrases or rhythm
239. ereo amp to zero 2 Turn off the power of your powered monitor or stereo amp 3 Press the TRITON STUDIO s POWER switch to turn off the power amp Never turn off the power while data is being written into internal memory If the power is turned off while processing is being performed memory write operations will not be completed correctly If this occurs TRITON STUDIO will automatically initialize its internal memory so that it will operate correctly This is not a malfunction While data is being written the LCD screen will indi cate Now writing into internal memory Data is writ ten into internal memory by the following operations Writing updating a Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kits or Arpeggio Patterns Loading Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit or Arpeggio Patterns data in Disk mode e Receiving a MIDI data dump for Program Combination Global Setting Drum Kit or Arpeggio Patterns e When using Sampling mode page menu commands Move Sample Move MS Convert To Program Time Slice etc to simultaneously modify programs or drum kits e When sampling to RAM in Program Combination or Sequencer mode if you simultaneously convert the sample to a program amp Never turn off the power while the hard disk or other media is being accessed If you turn off the power while media is being accessed the media may become unusable fe You can set the
240. es Select if you want to use the unmodified length of the note that is selected at the left Note Duration indicates the length that the note itself will sound Smaller values will produce a staccato note and larger values will produce a legato note For this example leave this setting unchanged Note Velocity is the velocity playing strength and larger values will produce a louder volume Set this to about 090 If you select Key for this parameter the velocity with which you actually play the keyboard will be input 6 On the keyboard press and then release the first note that you want to input The data you input will appear in the LCD screen as numerical values In the upper right M001 01 000 will change to M001 01 048 The next note you input will be placed at this location Continue pressing notes to input a melody You can also delete notes or rests or input rests or ties e To delete a note or rest that you input press the Step Back button The previously input note will be deleted e To input a rest press the Rest button This will input a rest of the Step Time value e To modify the length of a note you can modify the Step time value before you input the note However if you want to extend the length tie of the note press the Tie button At this time the previously input note will be extended by the length of Step time dons fe If you want to check the note t
241. et _ Sort 4 Austen Prog Mi A JJA a Sampli Cl oes oa a COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play B Aa C Bank INT B ee 3 097 Try Some Tekno Arpeggiator Run oo i Wa We pee Octave 1 O 2 v Sort O4 YJ Latch ss earl cn l Select A B O Key Sync E Keyboard e As you can see from the Timbre Assign table arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 7 and 8 and arpeggiator B is assigned to timbre 6 When you play the keyboard the U453 User Dr Techno arpeggio pattern will play the program INT C004 Trance GrageKit of timbre 7 Timbre 8 is a dummy timbre used to operate Timbre 7 p 133 The P000 UP arpeggio pattern will play the pro gram INT C122 Synchro Science of timbre 6 e If you uncheck Arpeggiator Run A or Arpeggiator Run B the unchecked arpeggiator will stop If you check it once again and play the keyboard the arpeggiator will begin running e Look at the Combination P7 Edit Arp Scan Zone A B page and you will see that the A keys Top Key and Bottom Key are set so that arpeggiator A will operate only for keys B3 and lower and that the B Top Key and Bottom Key are set so that arpeggiator B will operate only for keys C4 and higher COMBINATION P Edit Arp Bank INT B 6097 Try Some Tekno Scan Zone A B Ik A QAULLLOLLULLLELLOLLLULLOLLLOLLELLLOLLELLLELLELLLELLULLLELLOLLLOLLOLLLOLLELE Scan Zone A B A Top Key EM Bottom Key Bottom Key
242. et Source BPM If you do not know the BPM set Beat and the BPM will be calculated automatically Since in this example we know the beat set Source BPM to 120 5 Press the OK button The sample will automatically be sliced and a dialog box will appear Time Slice Sample 66868 Index Source Sensitivity a Start ag90008 When you play the keyboard C2 will play the original sample Source and D2 and subsequent keys will play the divided samples While listening to each divided sample adjust Sensi tivity so that each drum strike or other rhythm instru ment sound is divided into its own sample In some cases it may not be possible to slice the sample cleanly even if you adjust Sensitivity If the attack of the next sound is included in the end of the preceding sample or if one sample contains two notes you will need to edit the samples note If you want to edit hold down the ENTER key and select the Index that is assigned to the note that you want to edit This portion of the waveform display will be highlighted Then you can make adjustments by adjusting Start or End and by using Divide to separate or Link to combine PG p 110 6 Press the Save button The Save Samples amp MS dialog box will appear Here you can save the time sliced samples and the multisample At this time set the items in the Save With area to spec ify the conversion destination for t
243. et to Step If these parameters have a setting other than Step the Gate and Velocity that were specified for each individual step will be ignored and the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded according to the set tings of the Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page Check the settings of the program amp Set the Gate and Velocity by using the ARPEG GIATOR GATE and VELOCITY knobs to the cen ter position 12 o clock Dual arpeggiator editing Here we will use a combination as an example in our explanation The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio pattern in Sequencer and Song Play modes If you have entered this mode from the Combination mode the arpeggio pattern selected by the combination will be affected by your editing 4 In Combination mode select a combination that uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit For this example select a combination to which both arpeggiators A and B are assigned 2 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn on the arpeggiator the LED will light Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you moved here you can use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on However if Arpeggiator Run A or B are not checked and if Arpeggiator Assign is set to off then the arpeggiator will not operate 3 Select the Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup page 4 If you moved here from Combination mode use the Arp
244. ettings Sampling and editing in Sampling mode In Sampling mode you can record samples and edit sam ple data that you sampled or loaded from media includ ing WAVE and AIFF formats You can also assign the edited samples to indexes zones to create a multisample For an example of sampling refer to p 37 Here we will explain sampling operations that are specific to Sampling mode and how to edit a multisample or sam ple Creating multisample indexes and sampling Here s how to create indexes for a multisample and how to assign a sample to each index Select the P0 Recording Recording page SAMPLING P Recording Ms gt GGG NewMS aaa Recording Aa Index 001 661 Sample Time min 21 845 sec Sample Mode gt L Mono R I Prete M ting JL Er e 2 Select MS Multisample Select and create a multi sample To create a new multisample press the MS Multi sample Select popup button Then press a Multisam ple No in the list for which no name has been entered or use the numeric keys 0 9 to input a number and then press the ENTER key A dialog box will appear Create New Multisample 661 O Stereo If you want to create a stereo multisample check the Stereo box and press the OK button If you want to create a monaural multisample uncheck the Stereo box and press the OK button 3 Press the Create button to create an index Immediately aft
245. ettings in Combination and Sequencer modes amp p 132 PG p 44 and study the relationship between arpeggiator assignments Status and MIDI Channel Bank Select when status EX2 This setting is valid when Status is set to EX2 It speci fies the Bank Select message that will be transmitted from TRITON STUDIO OSC page ARO ososseseseccessesedescscsescsesoseses l osc Select c on mP gi ag eP ol mP BTH Force OSC Mode Normally you will set this to PRG the oscillator will play as set by the program settings If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound monophonically set this either to MN Mono or LGT Legato Conversely set this to Poly if you wish to force a monophonic program to play polyphonically PG p 38 OSC Select Normally you will set this to BTH Both If the timbre is using a program whose Oscillator Mode is Double and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 not both to sound set this to OSC1 only OSC1 will sound or OSC2 only OSC2 will sound Portamento Normally you will set this to PRG If you want to overide the portamento setting specified in the program assigned to the timbre to be forced off set this parameter to Off Conversely if you want to force the portamento to be on or to change the portamento time set this to a value of 001 127 to specify the portamento time Pitch page COMBINATION P2 Edit Trk Param Bank EXB A 00G Initial CombE AGG ELLE I C6
246. evice to be the word clock master and the TRITON STUDIO to be the word clock slave for synchronization Use an BNC coax cable made by the Alesis Corporation or a video BNC cable both sold separately to make this connection 12 EXB mLAN option A special cable is used to connect mLAN compatible devices or computers p 12 PG p 286 mLAN IEEE 1394 1 2 3 jacks SERIAL I O connector For details refer to the manual included with the EXB mLAN option nian What is mLAN mLAN is a new standard for musical instruments that uses the general purpose IEEE 1394 FireWire interface a general pur pose interface with a wide range of uses including current and dig ital AV devices with a special transmission protocol for musical data It allows high quality digital audio and MIDI data to be simul taneously transmitted and received over a single cable At a trans mission speed of 200 Mbps approximately 100 channels of audio data or 256 ports of MIDI data i e 16 channels x 256 connectors can be transmitted and received over a single cable mLAN provides unprecedented flexibility allowing you to daisy chain up to 63 devices and even to reconfigure the input and out put connections between devices without actually disconnecting the mLAN cable Even sophisticated setups in the studio or on stage are made easy by mLAN Front amp rear panel Names and functions of objects in the LCD screen The TR
247. ewing the parameters that are assigned to SW 1 SW 2 keys and the REALTIME CONTROLS B mode In Program mode the B mode functions of the REAL TIME CONTROLS knobs 1 2 3 and 4 and SW1 SW2 keys can be verified in the PO Play Performance Edit page PROGRAM P8 Play Performance Edit BERZA Category Bank INT A gt 10 FastSunth J 128 Functions assigned to fj000 Noisy Stabber the B mode knobs 1 4 kayi pasy ewes i SW2 JS Y amp Ribbon Lock Functions assigned to the SW1 and SW2 keys ZIFX1008 St Graphic TEQ Knob1B Attack IFX2823 Stereo Phaser Knob2B Decay IFX3 853 Reverb SmoothHall Knob3B Sust 2 KnobdB KModd MFA 820 Stereo Flanger iMFX2 Gd3 L C R BPM Delay 1FX5 G80 No Effect IF Xd 808 No Effect Performance Editor sodfachadfachacdacfacf 00 Octave Pitch osc Amp Attack Decay IFX MF Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance Arpe Sampling ggio VALUE slider When a program number is selected in Program PO Play page or when a combination number is selected in Com bination mode page P0 Play page you can use the VALUE slider as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation and control program parame ters or effect parameters Keyboard Velocity The force with which you initially strike a note can apply an effect Normally this is used to control volume or the speed or sensitivity of the EG After Touch This e
248. ey Combination P7 Edit Arp Scan Zone page are set so that arpeggiators B will operate only for the G3 note and above e Arpeggiator B is assigned to T8 as well but this setting is so that the T7 program INT A068 HipHop Kit will sound only when the arpeggiator is on Refer to the preceding section Select and play Combination INT D080 Old Vox Organ Linking the arpeggiator to the combination If you want the arpeggiator settings of a combination to become active when that combination is selected check Combination for Auto Arpeggiator Global PO Basic Setup Basic page 133 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings Creating an user arpeggio pat tern About user arpeggio patterns The patterns that can be selected on the TRITON STU DIO s arpeggiator are called arpeggio patterns There are two types of arpeggio patterns preset arpeggio pat terns and user arpeggio patterns Preset arpeggio patterns There are five patterns UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RANDOM The operation of these patterns is fixed and cannot be edited User arpeggio patterns There are 507 patterns U000 I A B U506 User which can develop chords or phrases in a wide variety of ways based on the pitches that you play on the keyboard or the timing at which you play them In Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern setup you can mod ify these user arpeggio patterns or create a new user arpeggio pattern from an
249. f desired simply by playing the corresponding note Preset pat terns suitable for playing by the drum track are already provided in the internal memory Here we will explain how to use the RPPR function to play a demo song 1 Load the demo song data as described in 1 Loading the demo song data in Disk mode p 20 2 Press the SEQ key the LED will light to enter Sequencer mode and access the P0 Play REC Pro gram 101 08 page 3 In Song Select select S005 Midnight Sun Select the song as described in 2 Selecting and play ing a demonstration song in Sequencer mode p 21 SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 A 001 01 000 Meter 444 J 140 p Auto OjS005 Midnight Sun i v P Trackas Nu Hard Riff Category gt od jp 13 oca 4 Make sure that the RPPR check box is checked Checked The specified RPPR set in Sequencer P6 Pat tern RPPR RPPR Setup will function Unchecked RPPR will not function Operation will be as in normal Sequencer mode 6 Press a key The pattern assigned to that key will playback In some cases the pattern will continue playing after you release your hand from the keyboard You can stop playback either by pressing that key again or by press ing a key in the area of C2 or below Shutdown Keys When you play a key in the range of C 1 C2 the cur rently playing pattern will stop Pattern Assignable A pattern and tra
250. fects and MIDI Appendices contains information on troubleshoot ing specifications and various other information Parameter Guide The Parameter Guide contains explanations and other information regarding the operations of the parame ters and settings on the TRITON STUDIO The expla nations are organized by mode and page Explanations and other information on the effects and their parameters are also provided for each effect Refer to this guide when an unfamiliar parameter appears in the display or when you need to know more about a particular function Voice Name List This lists the multisamples and drumsamples that are built into the TRITON STUDIO and the factory preset combinations programs drum kits and user arpeggio patterns Refer to these lists when you wish to know more about the preloaded sounds Conventions in this manual References to the TRITON STUDIO The TRITON STUDIO is available in 88 key 76 key and 61 key models but all three models are referred to without distinction in this manual as the TRITON STUDIO Illustrations of the front and rear panels in this manual show the 61 key model but the illustra tions apply equally to the 88 key and 76 key models Abbreviations for the manuals BG PG VNL References to the manuals included with the TRITON STUDIO are abbreviated as follows in this document BG Basic Guide PG Parameter Guide VNL Voice Name List Keys and knobs Refere
251. ferent song use the Utility menu commands Copy Pattern or Copy From Song etc to copy the pattern The pattern length can be specified in units of a measure Each pattern consists of musical data for one track It is not possible to create patterns that contain multiple tracks These patterns can be used as track musical data by being placed in a track page menu command Put to Track or copied to a track page menu command Copy to Track Alternatively you can use a pattern with the RPPR func tion of a song Cue List A cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in suc cession The TRITON STUDIO allows you to create 20 cue lists Each cue list allows you to connect a maximum of 99 songs in any order and to specify the number of times that each song will repeat The page menu command Convert to Song lets you convert the two or more songs in a cue list into a single song This allows you to use a cue list to create the back ing then convert the cue list into a song and add solo phrases on unused tracks Pattern UOO U99 RPPR Setup Controller Setup P4 4 P6 Arpeggiator P7 Track 4 Parameter settings Track 5 Parameter settings Musical data F gt _ _ e Master Effect 1 2 P9 Insert Effect 1 5 P8 AUDIO OUTPUT MasterEQ P9 L MONO R Track 6 Parameter settings Musical data Track 7 Par
252. ffect can be applied by varing the pressure on a key that is already being held down Normally this is used to control volume tone cutoff fre quency or LFO sensitivity etc Note Number Varing amounts of an effect will be applied depending on the position of the key on the keyboard Normally this is used to control volume tone cutoff fre quency LFO sensitivity and EG sensitivity etc i This can be used as a source for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to control program parameters or effect parameters 27 Quick Start Using controllers 28 Foot pedals Switch Damper Pedal An optional switch type damper pedal such as the Korg DS 1H can be connected to TRITON STUDIO If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal The half damper function cannot be controlled by other ped als Assignable Foot Switch If an optional foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 is con nected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack an assigned function can be switched on off using the foot switch The function of the foot switch is assigned in Global P2 Controller Foot SW Assign p 125 Assignable Foot Pedal An optional expression pedal such as the Korg EXP 2 foot controller or Korg XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal can be con nected to the rear panel ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack and used to apply an effect The function of the foot pedal is assigned in Global P2 Controller Foot Pedal Assig
253. formatted If you are writing audio tracks to create an audio CD it is not necessary to format the disc Are you using the recommended media for your drive L If you are writing from an external SCSI drive to CD R RW it is possible that the transfer speed is insufficient Writing may be successful if you lower the writing speed PG p 173 Writing may be successful if you first copy the data from the external SCSI drive to the internal hard disk and then execute the writing operation from the internal hard disk _ In some cases a certain length of time may be required before the data begins to be saved When first saving data on high capacity media e g the first time after powering on the TRITON STUDIO that you save in Disk mode or execute sampling to hard disk in Sampling mode some time will be required to allocate free area Are you using blank media If using CD R please use new media If using CD RW use the page menu command Erase CD RW Disk Make Audio CD to erase the contents of the media before you execute Save A CD R RW saved on the TRITON STUDIO is not recognized by an external device A CD R RW saved or copied on the TRITON STUDIO using packet writing is not recognized on a computer If you install a UDF version 1 5 compatible UDF reader or packet writing software on your com puter it will be possible to recognize the disc PG p 299 In the case of a CD R it
254. fy the number of the pro gram into which the sample will be converted the multisample name and the key assignment Check the check box and select one of the bank INT E initialized programs as the conversion destination pro gram number 4 Press the OK button to finalize the settings Sampling 5 Record the sample Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on Press the SAMPLING REC key Press the SAMPLING START STOP key to enter record ready mode 2 Play the keyboard Recording will begin at the instant you play a note All of the sounds you play from the keyboard and con trollers will be recorded in the sample 45 46 3 Press the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop recording WA Sampling will end automatically when the specified Sample Time is reached 6 Listen to the sample and edit it 1 Press the Perf Edit tab to select the PO Play Perfor mance Edit page and select the program into which the newly recorded sample was converted INT E 101 was selected in the example shown here so press the INT E key then numeric keys 1 0 and the 1 key 2 Play the C3 note on the keyboard to hear the sound that was resampled RA REALTIME CONTROLS knobs 1 4 the Performance Editor and the various parameters in P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect can be used to edit the program for the sound you resampled for example by adjust ing the filter EG or effects p 34 67
255. g a parameter The parameter value in the edit cell can be set by using the front panel VALUE controllers VALUE slider A V7 keys VALUE dial numeric keys 0 9 key ENTER key and 10 s HOLD key As necessary you can also use the BANK keys and the COMPARE key For some parameters the value can be set by pressing a popup button to display the popup menu and then select ing a parameter value or by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard to input a note number or velocity value VALUE controllers VALUE slider Use this when you wish to make major changes in the value In Program mode and Combination mode this slider can also be used as a control source for alternate modulation or dynamic modulation This is active in Program or Combination P0 Play when the Program Select or Combination Select the large characters in the upper part of the LCD is selected A V keys Use these when you wish to make small changes in the value 0 10 s HOLD ENTER A E i VALUE dial Use this when you wish to make large changes in a value Numeric keys 0 9 EN TER key key 10 s HOLD key Use these when you know the parameter value that you wish to input After using the numeric keys 0 9 to input a number press the ENTER key to finalize the parameter value Use the key to enter negative numbers Use the 10 s HOLD key to enter a
256. g the page menu command Copy Oscillator This is useful when you want to make the same settings for both oscillators or when you want to copy settings from another program Basic functions amp If you wish to save an edited program into internal memory be sure to Write the program p 56 In this section we will give examples of how to modify representative parameters in each page For details on all parameters refer to in the PG p 1 Loading data Programs you edit or create can be written into the 1 536 program memory areas of banks INT A INT E EXB A EXB G You can also save and manage programs on various types of media p 59 WA If the EXB MOSS option is installed you will be able to use the special bank INT F The parameter struc ture of bank INT F programs is different than that of the other banks Refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual Program settings Controller Setup P1 4 Arpeggiator P7 Master Effect 1 2 P9 Routing P8 1 Insert Effect 1 5 AUDIO OUTPUT OSC1 2 P8 MasterEQ P9 LIMONO R Y Insert Effect AUDIO OUTPUT Master Effect Individual Output INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 lt Oscillator Pitch gt lt a Filter Amplifier _ _ tO Effect P1 1 and P2 2 etc indicate the page tab screens used when editing on the TRITON STUDIO The three e
257. ge jump menu will not appear PROGRAM Jump PB Play P1 P2 P3 Edit Basic Edit Pitch Edit Filter P4 PS Edit Armp Edit Common LFO P P8 P9 Edit Arpeggiator Edit Insert Effect f Edit Master Effect 3 In the LCD screen press the desired page You will jump to the selected page and it will appear in the display As an example here press P1 Edit Basic e Asa reminder the page that was ae selected before you pressed the MENU key will have its top right corner bent over e You can also jump to the corresponding page by pressing a numeric key 0 9 P0 P9 i correspond to numeric keys 0 9 i i e By holding down the MENU key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can jump directly to the corresponding page without displaying the page jump menu PROGRAM P1 Edit Basic Oscillator Mode O Single Double Program Basic EEk Yoice Assign Mode Poly _ Single Trigger Random T WA When you press the EXIT key you will return to PO from any page 4 Press one of the tabs located at the bottom of the page As an example here press the OSC Basic tab which is the second from the left OSC2 Multisample High P ROM 74 frei Rev Lvl 127 Octave gt 251 Noise Transpose 12 i Zone ler 4 e Some pages have no tabs 6 To move to a page with a different P number press the MENU key and continue from step of this procedure 3 Settin
258. h Offset to 02 Chordal pattern Sort Key Sync E Latch O Keyboard Arpeggio Pattern Setu Arpeggio Tone Mode O Normal Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Gate to Legato 2 For Step No 02 do not enter a tone 3 Set Step No to 03 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys 4 Set Step No to 04 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys Step No a1 Tone No a8 For Step No 05 do not enter a tone Pitch Offset 08 Gate 50 Fixed Note No C2 Set Step No to 06 and press the 1 2 3 4 Velocity 864 Flam 80 keys istup J Eai Set Gate to Legato D For Step No 07 do not enter a tone Set Step No to 08 and press the 1 2 3 4 keys Let s input the following rhythm pattern 136 4 Make settings for Tone No and Fixed Note No Select Tone No and set Fixed Note No to the note number that will be sounded by that tone For each horizontal line Tone in the screen you will spec ify the drumsample note number of the drum kit Each Tone will be displayed as a small circle For this example set Tone No and Fixed Note No as follows Fixed Note No o few Fa eraro F 3 closed hi hat A 3 open hi hat The drumsamples that correspond to each note num ber will differ depending on the drum kit It is conve nien
259. hat include rate convert down sampling and reverse playback Start loop start and end addresses can be specified in units of a single sample Loop tune reverse playback and loop lock functions are also supported The Use Zero function automatically searches for zero cross points making it easy to find the beginning or end of the waveform or locations that will not produce noise when the sample is played back The grid function displays a BPM based grid on the waveform display helping you to create loops or make waveform edits that match the desired BPM Each multisample allows you to create up to 128 indices Each index consists of a sample assignment a key zone an original key a playback pitch and settings such as level The Keyboard amp Index display lets you edit a multisample while viewing the assignments and zones of each sample Sample names and multisample names of up to 16 characters can be assigned Sample names and multisample names can also be viewed in Disk mode PG p 157 Translation The Time Slice function automatically detects the attack portions of a kick or snare etc in a rhythm loop sample a looped pattern of drums etc and divides it into separate rhythm instrument sounds A pattern corresponding to the divided samples is created automatically so that you can immediately use the Sequencer mode RPPR function to play the pattern and adjust the tempo without changing the pitch You can also
260. hat you will input next press the PAUSE key In this state playing a key will produce sound but will not input a note Press the PAUSE key once again to cancel the record pause state and resume input WA To input a chord simultaneously press the notes of the desired chord Even if you do not press them simultaneously notes that were pressed before you took your hand off of all keys will be input at the same location However in the above example the program of track 8 will not sound chords This is because the program is set to mono mode and the song follows the setting of the program D When you are finished inputting press the Done but ton Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back amp When you begin step recording all data that follows the measure where you began recording will be erased from that track You need to be aware of this if you begin step record ing from a measure mid way through the song If you want to re input data into a measure that already contains data perform step recording in another un recorded track and execute Move Mea sure or Copy Measure PG p 72 If you want to edit or add to the recorded data you can use the Event Edit function PG p 69 7 Using controllers to record tonal changes Let s try using the realtime controllers and the joystick to add effects to the performance that we just step recorded on track 8 Press the EXIT key and
261. he COM PARE key again In Sequencer mode you can use the COMPARE key to make before and after comparisons immediately after using realtime recording or step recording to record a song or after performing a track edit operation For example this can be used effectively when realtime recording a track for a song Q Realtime record a track Take 1 2 Once again realtime record on the same track Take 2 3 Press the COMPARE key The LED will light and take 1 will be recalled 4 Press the COMPARE key once again The LED will go dark and take 2 will be recalled 6 If at step G you once again realtime record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will now be take 1 If at step you once again real time record on the same track take 3 the object of the Compare function will be take 2 In this way the Compare function lets you recall the pre vious recording or the previous state of event editing amp The Compare function is not available Sampling Song Play Global or Disk modes Basics 17 18 Popup buttons and popup menus You can press a popup button to access a popup menu and then set parameter values 1 p 8 Keyboard input When inputting a note number or a specific velocity as the value of a parameter you can use the keyboard to input the setting Hold down the ENTER key and play the note that you wish to enter as a value The note number or vel
262. he output will not be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO R or to INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 4 After passing through the master effects it will be out put from AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN Select this when you wish to connect the output to the master effects in a series connection at the send levels specified by Send 1 MFX1 and Send 2 MFX2 OSC MFX Send specifies the send level from each oscillator to the master effects This can be set only when BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is either L R or Off If BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign is set to IFX1 5 the send level to the master effects is set by Send 1 and Send 2 Insert FX page after the signal passes through the insert effects 140 Insert effects 4 Select the Insert FX page PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect Insert FX AA Chain Insert Effect PantCC S BUS Sel Sendi Send2 z f en g Ps Bel Be 5 5 i oN oN fa fa auc s mi s a IFX1 D HG2 Stereo Compressor _ IFX2 ERE D 998 St Graphic 7EQ IFX3 om D 920 Stereo Flange IFx4 i gt 823 Stereo Phaser ee IFX5 gt 259 5t BPM Delay S Fx 1 2 3 d 5 6 For IFX1 5 select the effect type for each insert effect iS When you press the popup button all effects will be displayed organized into six categories Use the pages located at the left to select a category and select an effect from that category on the LCD screen amp Effects 00
263. he page menu command Load Selected to load the data If program bank I F is selected the Load Program Bank F dialog box will appear Press the OK button to load the data If combination bank I B is selected the Load Combi nation Bank I B will appear Set To to Bank I E and press the OK button to load the data amp If you want to keep the data that is currently in the internal memory area use Save All or Save PCG to save the current data before you perform the pro cedure described here To load the demo song data for the MOSS tone generator select MOSS SNG and use Load Selected to load it For details on Select SNG Allocation refer to the note at the end of step 4 of the preceding section Program settings Program editing is performed in Program mode just as programs can be selected and played in Program mode Program mode consists of the PO Play P9 Edit Master Effect pages In PO Play you can select and play programs You can also perform simple editing of the program make arpeg giator settings and make settings for audio input and sampling p 22 34 45 In P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect you can edit the parameters of the program you selected in PO Play When shipped the TRITON STUDIO contains numerous preloaded programs You can edit the settings of these preloaded programs to create your own original pro grams You can also create original programs
264. he program that will use the samples and multisample and for the perfor mance data track or pattern that will be used in Sequencer mode to recreate the rhythm loop sample e If you want to create the performance data in a track Turn Program and Seq Event On checked Program I E101 Track On Song 000 Track 01 Meter 4 4 Start Measure 001 Time 008 Save Samples amp MS Beat 864 Source BPM 126 reeTime Stretch Ratio 100 00 New BPM 120 2 v Program D E1 1 InitialProglE161 VY Seq Event Track C Pattern Song 00G Track 61 Meter 4 4 Start Measure 661 Press the Save button to save the data You will return to the dialog box of step e If you want to create the performance data in a pattern In order to audition the performance data as it would be if created as a pattern press the Save button once again to access the Save Samples amp MS dialog box Turn Program and Seq Event On checked Program I E102 Pattern On Song 001 Pattern U00 Meter 4 4 RPPR On checked Key C 2 Track 01 Save Samples amp MS Beat 004 Source BPM 120_ Time Stretch Ratio 100 00 New BPM 120_ Save with h Program gt 1 E102 InitialProglE 102 VJ Seq Event C Track Pattern Song EEX Pattern UBG Meter 4 4 VRPPR Key C 2 Track 01 Press the Save button to save the data You will return to the dialog box of step D Press the Exit button t
265. hen the power is turned off If you want to keep this data you must save it In the Save page select the directory in which you want to save the track list 2 Select the page menu command Save Audio CD Track List to access the dialog box 3 Press the OK button to save the data or press the Cancel button to cancel without saving Creating a CD 119 SMF Standard MIDI File playback In Song Play mode you can play back Standard MIDI Files SMF directly from media such as floppy disk or hard disk You can select this mode if you simply want to play back the SMF without editing it amp If the EXB MOSS is installed the special bank INT F can be used in Song Play mode as well For details on the bank INT F parameters refer to the EXB MOSS owner s manual amp The parameter settings of Song Play mode are not backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to save the program track parameter and effect set tings of the song use the page menu command Save Template Song to save them amp While playing back data from a disc inserted in the CDRW 1 option do not subject the TRITON STUDIO to physical shock or vibration If you play the keyboard or controllers the data may not play back correctly The structure of Song Play mode As shown in the diagram below Song Play mode consists of tracks 1 16 effects and arpeggiator About SMF SMF data in format 0 or format 1 can be
266. hen you modify the parameters in Global mode the data in the memory area will be modified If you wish to save this modified data in internal memory you must Write it When you write the data in the memory area will be writ ten into the global settings drum kits and arpeggio pat terns of internal memory If you turn off the power without writing the modified data in the memory area will be lost Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area lt Edit Memory Area When you Write the various When the power is turned Global mode settings will be Write Power On on the settings are called saved in internal memory into the memory area Internal Memory Global Setting Pa Saving on media For details on the data that can be saved on storage media Types of data that can be saved 1 p 55 amp Song data and cue lists in the TRITON STUDIO s Sequencer mode as well as multisamples and sam ples cannot be written into internal memory This data will disappear when the power is turned off If you want to keep this data you must save it on a floppy disk the internal hard drive the CDRW 1 option or an externally connected SCSI CD R RW or other storage device hard disk removable disk etc Other types of data can also be saved on storage media Even if you later modify this data you will always be able to reload the original settings It is a good idea to save your setting
267. hich produce time varying changes in pitch tone and volume respectively ne off note on Attack Level y Release Level Time TORN Time s Time Attack Time Slope Time Start Level LFO Low Frequency Oscillator For each oscillator TRITON STUDIO provides two LFO s that can be used to apply cyclical change in pitch tone and volume Examples of this are vibrato cyclical change in pitch wah cyclical change in tone and tremolo or auto pan cyclical change in volume Filter settings P3 Edit Filter The filter allows you to diminish or emphasize specified frequency areas of the multisample selected for the oscil lator The tone of the sound will depend significantly on the filter settings TRITON STUDIO provides Filter 1 for OSC1 and Filter 2 for OSC2 For each of these filters you can select from two types Low Pass Resonance or Low Pass amp High Pass Filter 2 can be used if Oscillator Mode is set to Double Filter characteristics This area of 2 overtones will be diminished Overtones after passing through the filter Level Level pirer Overtones included in the original multisample Frequency pitch gt Frequency pitch Filterl page PROGRAM P3 Edit Fi Filter Type Low Pass Resonance O Low Pass amp High Pass Trim B Intensity 00 Fiter Filter 1 Filter 1 bd Filter2 jg Filter2 Da Mod Mfo Mod Ifo Mod Filter Type Filter A F
268. ill be recorded Play the keyboard for about 16 measures and record your performance Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop recording Song If you made a mistake or would like to re record you can use the Compare function press the COMPARE key to re record as many times as you wish WA The note data that was generated by the arpeggio pattern will be recorded If you change the ARPEG GIATOR GATE or ARPEGGIATOR VELOCITY knob settings while recording an arpeggio pattern this data will also be recorded but it will not be possi ble to add changes by overdubbing GATE or VELOCITY data afterward for those notes 51 52 5 Recording other tracks As described in Recording the bass track use Track Select to select Track03 Elec Piano and record about 16 measures 6 Step recording The TRITON STUDIO provides two main methods of recording a song The first is realtime recording in which your performance on the keyboard and operation of the joystick and other controllers are recorded in realtime This is how we recorded the bass and electric piano tracks in the preceding sections The second method is step recording in which you can specify the timing note length and velocity of each note in the LCD screen and use the keyboard to input the pitch of the note Only the note on off data is recorded Step recording is suitable when you want to create a distinctive mechanical feel or whe
269. ill not start an arpeggio Although preset arpeggio patterns P000 P004 can be selected they cannot be edited amp When you edit a user arpeggio pattern the changes will have an effect anytime that this pattern is used in Program Combination Song or Song Play modes 6 In Length specify the length of the pattern After the pattern has played for the length specified it will return to the beginning This setting can also be changed during or after editing For this example set it to 08 WA For the preload arpeggio patterns U000 I A B U199 1 A B simply changing the Length can sig nificantly change the character of the pattern Try changing the length and listening to the result T Make settings for the A Tempo Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Key board parameters These are program parameters but can be set from here as well amp If after moving here from Program mode you modify these parameters and wish to keep your changes return to Program mode and write the program These parameters are not saved by Write Arpeggio Pattern For this example make the settings shown in the LCD screen on step 8 In Arpeggio Pattern Setup specify how the arpeggio will be developed These settings can be changed during or after editing PG p 152 9 Select the Pattern Edit page Pattern Edit 6 GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio A pattern consi
270. ilt in patterns to create the drum part but if you want to input the drum part yourself it will be convenient to set Recording Mode to Over Dub for recording p 84 It is best to use realtime recording 3 Recording the bass track 1 p 50 to record the rhythm instruments in the order of bass drum snare and hi hat Quick Start Naming the song and tracks It s a good idea to assign a name to each song and track so that they can be easily identified Naming a song Press the EXIT key to access P0 Play REC The Rename Song page menu command can also be selected from P2 P3 P4 or P7 as well as from PO 2 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Rename Song 3 A dialog box will appear Press the text edit button and input the desired song name For the procedure of inputting a name refer to p 40 56 4 When you are finished inputting the name press the OK button twice to finish the procedure p 40 Naming a track 4 Press the MENU key to select P5 Track Edit and press the Track Name tab The P5 Track Edit Track Name page will appear 2 Press the text edit button for the track whose name you want to edit and input the desired name for that track For the procedure of inputting a name refer to p 40 56 3 When you are finished inputting the name s press the OK button fe You can also assign a name to each cue list and user pattern
271. ilter B Selects the type of filter and specify the Frequency cut off frequency and Resonance resonance level e Low Pass Resonance 24 dB oct low pass filter with resonance Make settings for filter A e Low Pass amp High Pass 12 dB oct low pass filter and 12 dB oct high pass filter in series connection Make low pass filter settings in filter A and high pass filter settings in filter B Low pass filter This is the most common type of filter which allows the low frequency range to pass and cuts the high frequency range When the overtones of the high range are cut a bright sound will become darker more mellow 24 dB oct and 12 dB oct refer to the steepness of the cut 24 dB oct means that the gain will decrease 24 dB in one octave i e as the frequency doubles A 12 dB oct filter would decrease the gain 12 dB in one octave The 24 dB oct filter produces a steeper cut Low Pass Level 12dB oct 24dB oct Frequency 71 Basic functions Program settings 72 High pass filter This type of filter allows the high frequency range to pass and cuts the low frequency range Use this when you wish to make the sound thinner However if the cutoff fre quency Frequency is raised excessively high the volume will become very low High Pass Level 12dB oct Frequency Resonance When Resonance is set to a higher value the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequenc
272. in parentheses Slot EXB6 Slot EXB7 19 Power on off Quick Start Listening to a demo song Here s how to listen to demo songs on the TRITON STU DIO This section explains how the demo song data can be loaded from the internal hard drive using the Disk mode and played back in Sequencer mode We will explain how to play back songs individually or consecutively using the Cue List function 1 Loading the demo song data in Disk mode 1 Press the DISK key the LED will light You will enter Disk mode 2 Press the Load tab The Disk Load page will appear 3 Press the drive select popup button and select HDD internal hard drive which is the second from the bottom in the popup menu File information for the internal hard disk will be dis played 4 Press the FACTORY directory and then press the Open button You will move to the next lower directory 5 Press PRELOAD SNG The display will be highlighted This is the demo song data fFACTORYS l PRELOAD PCG 6 Fa Pretoao sn 643K 15 82 2002 87 88 08 PRELOAD E SC 222 1502 2002 7 66 66 516K 15 02 2002 87 66 66 1502 2002 87 66 86 OA Drive Select 6 Press the page menu button The page menu commands will be displayed 7 Press Load selected A dialog box will appear Check the data that you want to load along with the song In this case make the settings shown below
273. in the center area to select a program The selected program will be highlighted es If you wish to change a program to be in a different category you can choose the new category in the dia log box when writing the program p 56 Category names can be changed in Category Name Global P4 4 When you are satisfied with the selected program y prog press the OK button to close the popup menu If you press the Cancel button the selection you made here will be discarded and you will return to the pro gram that had been selected before you opened the popup menu Selecting programs from the Program Select popup menu You can select programs from a list organized by program bank Press the Program Select popup button A tabbed Bank Program Select popup menu will appear Bank Program Select bank a 6061 Acoustic Piano Bank INT B Bank _ INT C In the graphic bank G is selected The center area shows the programs contained in that bank WA The Variation button will be displayed only when bank G is selected Each time you press this button the bank will change in the order of G gt g 1 gt g 2 g 8 gt g 9 gt G 2 Press the tabs located at the left and right to select banks 3 Press program names in the center area to select pro grams The selected program will be highlighted 4 When you are satisfied with the selected program bi prog press the O
274. ing Recording page 2 Select Index and use the A V keys to select the sample to which you want to assign a name For this example select Index 001 SAMPLING P Recording Ms AAA SMPL Demo Recording Aa index ERM gas P saga NewSample_aaaa igkey C2 Topkey Sample Time A min 16 616 sec Sample Mode gt Stereo Record Input Prefe Memory ing Setup Jl rence Jl Status amp It is also possible to select a sample in Sample Sam ple Select but since the sample assigned to each index can change you should use Index to select a sample 3 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Rename Sample When the dialog box appears press the text edit but ton to access the text dialog box and assign the desired sample name Example Its Refer to step of Naming a multisample 4 Select Index select the next sample that you want to name and use the page menu command Rename Sample to assign a name to that sample Saving sample data Here s how to save a sample or multisample that you cre ated amp All samples and multisamples in the TRITON STU DIO will be lost when the power is turned off Sample data can be saved on a floppy disk the internal hard drive the CDRW 1 option or external SCSI storage media hard disk MO Zip Jaz ORB CD R RW etc 4 Insert the media and or make the a
275. ing modulating Set Song Length Length EEE Here s how to change the key of a song 1 Select song S002 CHORUS Input the number of measures for the song For this 2 Select the Sequencer P5 Track Edit page example select 008 8 measures and press the OK but Use Track Select to select T02 as the track whose ton pitch will be changed The performance data from measures 1 8 will remain and the data of subsequent measures will be deleted Specify the measures for which the key will be When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key changed to play the song playback will stop at the end of the Select From Measure and use the VALUE controllers 8th measure to set this to 001 Next select To End of Measure and specify 008 amp If you are using Track Play Loop check whether the measures specified for Loop Start Measure and 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 188 P Man Loop End Measure would be deleted If they HS 002 CHORUS ag would be deleted use Move Measure PG p 72 P Tracko2 Bass Reso P Hi C RPPR etc to move the data into the playback area before you execute this operation SEQUENCER P5 Track Edit Track Edit E 4 Mute tracks Press the EXIT key to select PO Play REC and access the Program T01 08 T09 16 page From Measure 1_ To End of Measure os Mute all tracks other than tracks 3 and 4 When you play back you will hear only the electric piano and guitar pe
276. initialized condition Edited user arpeggio patterns can be written to internal memory areas U000 I1 A B U506 User p 58 In Disk mode user arpeggio patterns can also saved to media such as a floppy disk or the internal hard drive Editing a user arpeggio pattern amp If you want to edit a user arpeggio pattern you must first make sure that memory protect is unchecked p 57 If you enter this mode from the Program mode your edit ing will apply to the arpeggio pattern specified for the selected program In Program mode select a program for which the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit is selected or a pro gram that you wish to use as a basis for editing the arpeggio pattern 2 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn the arpeggiator on the LED will light Even if you moved to Global mode from a program in which the arpeggiator was turned off you can use the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key to turn it on 3 Select the Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup page GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup A Key Sync UO Keyboard Octave gt 1 Sort Resolution gt Pi O Latch attern Set Edit 134 4 Arpeggiator Select will automatically be set to A when you move here from Program mode 6 In Pattern select the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit For this example select an empty user arpeggio pat tern amp If a blank pattern is selected playing the keyboard w
277. instrument as a 16 track multi timbral tone generator select INT or BTH PG p 62 Status Synchronizing the sequencer with an external MIDI device The record playback tempo of TRITON STUDIO s sequencer can be synchronized to an external MIDI device such as a sequencer or rhythm machine PG p 266 Sampling settings Features of sampling on the TRITON STUDIO e You can perform 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono or stereo sampling e The TRITON STUDIO is shipped with 16 Mbytes of sample memory RAM and an internal hard drive When sampling data is written into either sample memory or the internal hard drive The 16 Mbyte sample memory RAM allows approxi mately 2 minutes 54 seconds of mono sampling or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds of stereo sam pling By installing 72 pin SIMM boards you can expand sample memory to a maximum of 96 Mbytes three 32 Mbyte SIMM boards replacing the factory installed 16 Mbyte SIMM with a 32 Mbyte SIMM In this case you can record up to six samples of approxi mately 2 minutes 54 seconds each mono or approxi mately 1 minute 27 seconds each stereo for a total 17 minutes 28 seconds of monaural sampling time approximately 8 minutes 44 seconds of stereo Sam ples you record into sample memory RAM can be used as tone generator waveforms However this data will be lost when the power of the TRITON STUDIO is turned off so you must save any sample data that you want to keep
278. internal L and R channels will be sampled in stereo The recording level and Auto 12 dB On When you resample the playback of a song or your key board performance using a program combination or sample or if you mix your performance with an external audio source and sample the result you should normally set Recording Level to 12 0 dB If you resample at 12 0 dB the sample data will be recorded at the opti mum level but the playback level will be lower than the level during sampling if 12 dB is off In such cases you can check Auto 12 dB On when you resample so that 12 dB Sampling mode Loop Edit page will auto matically be turned on and the recorded sample will play back at the same level at during resampling When you sample an external audio source you should normally set Recording Level to 0 0 dB The sample data will be recorded at the optimum level If you sample with Auto 12 dB On turned off at this time 12 dB Sampling mode Loop Edit page will be off and the sample will play back at the same level at which it was sampled When the power is turned on Recording Level and Auto 12 dB On will default to the following settings Program Combination Sequencer modes Recording Level 12 0 dB Auto 12 dB On on Sampling mode Recording Level 0 0 dB Auto 12 dB On off These settings assume that you will mainl
279. is a method of recording where you specify the note timing note length and velocity etc in the LCD screen and use the keyboard to input the pitches p 52 Only note on off data can be recorded with this method Event Edit and Create Control Data Note data is the only type of data that can be recorded in step recording However there are ways to record other types of data aside from the realtime mode You can use the Event Edit and Create Control Data functions Event Edit is intended as a way to edit previously recorded data but you can also use it to modify program numbers or insert control changes Create Control Data is a function that lets you create and insert controller data that changes smoothly between two specified values over the specified length of time This is used to input bend after touch and control change data etc Realtime recording to a pattern Here s how you can use realtime recording to create a pat tern User patterns can be accessed by the RPPR function in the same way as preset patterns and can be copied to or placed in a song Playback data from a track can also be copied to a pattern amp Before you begin recording a pattern turn off the memory protect setting in Global mode p 57 When realtime recording a pattern a pattern of the speci fied number of measures will playback repeatedly allow ing you to continue adding musical data to it 1 Create a new song and as described in
280. ising the LFO speed for a specific song We recommend this method if you will be using a cue list to construct the song When you execute the page menu command Convert to Song the effect settings of the Step 01 song will be specified for the song that results from the conversion Even if FX is not checked there may be cases in which a time lag in the transition between songs depending on the musical data of the song Also there may be cases in which the musical data is not played at the correct timing at the transition between songs If this occurs you can edit the musical data of the song or convert the cue list to a song for playback If you use Convert to Song to con vert the cue list to a song there will be no time lag during playback at the transition between songs and the musical data will be played at the correct timing Creating multiple songs for use in a cue list If you want to create multiple songs for use in a cue list it is a good idea to make the various necessary settings pro gram and other settings for each track effect settings etc for one song e g S000 and then use the page menu com mand Copy From Song in SEQ 1 1 etc to copy it to other songs so that the settings will be consistent Copy Song S G INTRO Without Track Pattern Events Call amp After your cue list is finished and you convert it into a song the track settings program pan volume etc
281. itch 68 70 124 Combination 77 Controller 25 70 Drum kit 128 150 EG 70 71 LFO 70 71 Sampling 38 112 Place Sequencer 83 Polyphonic 68 77 Popup button 8 18 Popup menu 8 18 Portamento 70 77 78 Power 6 11 19 125 Recalling the last selected mode 125 Preload data 56 PRELOAD KSC 21 PRELOAD PCG 21 63 PRELOAD SNG 21 Program 1 13 22 29 34 45 46 56 67 102 130 139 140 Combination 35 76 Sampling 41 112 Sequencer 82 Q Quantize 51 R Radio button 9 REALTIME CONTROLS 3 26 34 145 Realtime Quantize 51 Realtime recording Pattern 86 Track 83 REC key 5 103 104 REC WRITE key 5 51 57 59 84 Recording Level 37 43 45 47 103 148 150 Rename 40 43 53 57 Resampling 45 48 107 116 Resonance 26 71 72 RESONANCE HPF 26 Restoring the factory settings 63 Ribbon controller 3 25 Lock function 26 Pitch bend 70 Routing 129 140 141 142 143 RPPR 33 92 113 Create 92 Play 33 93 Realtime recording 94 Shutdown Key RPPR stop 33 Index S S P DIF 7 11 102 142 143 148 Sample 37 39 40 43 45 47 78 99 101 107 108 111 Sample memory RAM 2 5 19 104 105 Sampling 2 5 14 16 37 39 41 46 48 100 102 106 115 139 142 Sampling frequency 100 118 148 Save 55 60 61 Data Filer function 146 Jukebox list 122 Media 59 Sample data 41 111 Song 54 Track list 119 Scale 78 126 Scroll bar 8 SCSI 7 12 41 59 105 108 151 157 Send AUDIOINPUT 143 Combinati
282. ited data is preserved When you are completely fin ished with your editing you can use the page menu com mand Delete Sample to delete unneeded samples amp In Sampling mode there is no Compare function that lets you compare the data before and after editing If you wish to preserve the unedited state of the mul tisample or sample use Copy Sample or Copy MS PG p 92 93 to copy the multisample or sam ple before you begin editing it For some page menu commands in P1 Sample Edit or P2 Loop Edit you can execute without checking the Overwrite setting in the dialog box so that the sample data previous to editing will be preserved Multisample editing Editing a multisample is accomplished with a number of operations i e creating indexes for the multisample and assigning a sample to each index editing operations such as deleting copying and inserting indexes and detailed settings such as sample level and pitch for each index Multisample editing is performed in P3 Multisample ZS Basic settings such as creating indexes and assigning samples can also be made in the PO Recording Recording page Editing the indices To change the number or order of the indexes use the Insert Cut Copy and Create buttons 111 Basic functions Sampling settings 1 Select the P3 Multisample SAMPLING P3 Multisample Multisample MS DERE aoa Meee eTT TT TTUT TTTUTUTTTTU TITTIE Multisamp
283. k you specified in Select Bank amp Smpl No Press the LOCATE key to return to the beginning of the song and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Notice that the sampled audio is played back along with the song Resampling the song playback to create a WAVE file on the hard drive Here s how you can play back a song you created and sample it to the hard drive When you sample to the hard disk a WAVE file will be created note If you want to sample to an external SCSI hard disk make connections as described on PG p 298 C In Sequencer mode select the song from which you want to create a WAVE file Either create a song or use Disk mode to load a previ ously created song amp A maximum of 80 minutes for either mono or stereo can be written to hard disk in one sampling operation monaural approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 880 Mbytes 2 Access the Sequencer P0 Play REC Sampling page SEQUENCER P Play REC Sampling aa z Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK a Input1 Level 127 _ BUSCIFX Indiv Select off Pan LOBB Send1 MFX1 G88 Send2 MFX2 900 Input2 Level 127_ BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 888 Send2 MFX2 990 Sampling Setul a Source BUS gt L R Save t PE gt Stereo Sample Time min 66 376 sec rer Use Ue Us Per ee ae Specify the sampling method Source BUS L R Trigger Sequencer START SW Save to DISK
284. k as a source for alternate mod ulation or effect dynamic modulation to control pro gram parameters or effect parameters Ribbon controller Move your finger to the left and right on the ribbon con troller to apply an effect Normally this is used to control pitch volume or filter etc note You can use the Lock function of SW1 or SW2 keys to hold the effect even after you release your finger from the ribbon controller For the procedure refer to The Lock function on the following page WA You can use the ribbon controller as a source for alter nate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to control program parameters or effect parameters SW1 SW2 You can use these keys as sources for alternate modulation or effect dynamic modulation to control program parame ters or effect parameters These switches can also be used to switch the octave to turn portamento on off or to lock the position of the rib bon controller or after touch lock function p 26 You can specify the way in which the SW1 and SW2 keys will operate either Toggle when the assigned func tion will be switched between on and off each time the key is pressed or Momentary when the assigned function will be active on only as long as you hold down the switch note In Program mode the function of the SW1 and SW2 keys can be checked in the PO Play Perfor mance Edit page p 27 When you write a program or combinatio
285. k the MFX1 Off check box To turn off master effect 2 check the MFX2 Off check box Recalling the last selected mode and page at power on GLOBAL P8 Basic Setup System Preference EEk i System Preference Bank Map b emia Power On Mode gt Reset gt Internal P 48kHz System Clock S P DIF Sample Rate Beep Enable Memory Protect O Program UO Combination __ Song Input mLAN mLAN f NSampling l Output Jl Input The state of TRITON STUDIO when the power is turned on will depend on the setting of Power On Mode Glo bal P0 System Preference page If Power On Mode is Reset factory setting TRITON STUDIO will automatically selects the Combination mode PO Play If Power On Mode is Memorize TRITON STUDIO will be in the mode and page that were last selected when the power was turned off The Memorize setting will remember the mode and page that were last selected the combination number that was last selected in Combination mode and the program number that was last selected in Program mode If another mode is selected when the power is turned on you can press the COMBI key or PROG key to select the PO Play page with the last selected combination num ber or program number _ Drum ki __ Arpeggio User Pattern Specifying the function of the ASSIGNABLE Switch and ASSIGNABLE Pedal GLOBAL P2 Controller Damper Assignable Foot Switch Pedal
286. knob min 42 dBu LEVEL knob max Source impedance 600 Q S P DIF Connector optical Format 24 bit S P DIF IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 Sample rate 48 kHz 96 kHz selectable DAMPER half damper supported ASSIGNABLE SWITCH PEDAL Internal hard drive 5 Gbyte e MIDI IN OUT THRU SCSI connector D sub half pitch 50 pin LCD contrast knob 3 5 inch floppy disk drive AC power inlet power switch Calendar backup battery Support for options EXB PCM series PCM expansion board 16 Mbytes ROM slots x 7 88Keys 1475 x 440 x 146 mm Inches 58 07 x 17 32 x 5 75 76Keys 1311 x 382 x 129 mm Inches 51 61 x 15 04 x 5 08 61Keys 1104 x 382 x 129 mm Inches 43 46 x 15 04 x 5 08 88 Keys 29 7 kg 65 48lbs 76 Keys 19 6 kg 43 21lbs 61 Keys 17 2 kg 37 92lbs Power supply AC Local Voltage Included items AC cable Preloaded program disks TNSFD OOP Installation plate for EXB mLAN Dimensions W x D x H O ptions Expansion boards EXB PCM06 07 Orchestral Collection EXB MOSS DSP Synthesizer Board EXB PCMO08 Piano The multisamples of the EXB PCM08 are built into the TRI EXB DI Digital Interface Board esac aad a AEDU NO ne TON STUDIO E E vol dal XVP 10 EXB PCM01 Piano Classic Keyboards P SA SA EXB PCM02 Studio Essentials Foot controller EXP 2 EXB PCMO03 Future Loop Construction Damper pedal DS 1H EXB PCM04 Dance Extreme EXB PCM05 Vintage Archives Pedal switch PS 1 Other MIDI
287. ks or noise in the loop e Loop _ Rew LJ t2de Loops gagagaa _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 ifa zoora m End 0120135 _ use Zero gri ing LL TIT TTT TT ttt Teri ttt titre ee For this example set LoopS Loop Start and Start to the same value WA If desired you can make a dotted vertical line appear in the sample waveform display to indicate the BPM If you use this function with waveforms that have a specific BPM it will be easier to make accurate set tings for End Select the page menu command Grid to access the dialog box On O Off Resolution gt J Check Grid set Resolution to J and press the OK button Set Grid to 140 With these settings vertical dotted lines will be displayed at 140 BPM quarter note inter ve Set End When Loop is On the dotted vertical Grid lines will start at LoopS Loop Start If you want to set End at the end of one 4 4 measure the fourth verti cal line from the LoopS Loop Start line will be the end of the first measure Place End at this vertical ae Start G26697 y Loop J Rev LJ 1208 Loop 26697 a Lock Loop Tune 8 ae 2 4 Use Truncate to delete the unwanted data that is outside of the start or loop start and end addresses Select the page menu command Truncate to access the dialog box Truncate Sample 66886 Stereo
288. l be assigned to that note number Normally you will check this If this is not checked no drum sample will be assigned to that note number That note number will sound the drum sample assigned at its right but a semitone lower Use this setting when you want only to change the pitch such as with tom or cymbal sounds 128 If you uncheck the Assign check box so that the drum sample at the right will be played at a pitch one semitone lower access the Program P2 Edit Pitch OSC1 Pitch Mod page and set Pitch Slope to 1 0 before you enter Global mode 6 Use High Drumsample Bank High Drumsam ple Low Drumsample Bank and Low Drumsam ple to specify the drum sample that will be assigned to this note number If you have selected a Low Drumsample use Velocity Sample SW Lo Hi to specify how velocity will switch between the High Drumsample and Low Drumsample amp ROM drumsamples can be selected if High Low Drumsample Bank is set to ROM samples you recorded on the TRITON STUDIO or loaded in Disk mode can be selected if you set this to RAM and drum samples from a EXB PCM option if installed can be selected if you set this to EXB amp Some of the EXB PCM series options do not contain drum samples About the ROM drum samples The TRITON STUDIO contains 417 different drum sam ples in ROM When you press the popup button you will be able to select ROM drum sample
289. lay indicates ADC OVER LOAD AD converter input overload ZS The best audio quality will be obtained at a level immediately below the point where ADC OVER LOAD is displayed i e the highest level that does not produce an overload 2 Press the SAMPLING REC key Produce sound at the volume that you want to record Watch the level meters to check the input volume Use the Recording Level slider to adjust the record ing level amp The output volume will not change at this time but your adjustment will affect the data that will be sam pled If CLIP is displayed lower the Recording Level located at the right of the display to an appropriate level SAMPLING P Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input 1 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select gt LZR Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select P MEE Pan R127 Recording Setup input Setup MA Input Setup We recommend that you set the Recording Level as shown below depending on whether you are sampling only an external input source or resampling the play back of a song or a performance played on a program combination or sample At this time you can also set Auto 12 dB On t p 105 so that the recorded sample will play back at an appropriate level When sampling only an external input source Recording Level 0 0 dB Auto 12 dB On off unchecked When resampling sampling th
290. le Edit Use Zero ii Sampling START plays edit range rni 3724 BPM ii If you wish to hear the sound of the selected range press the SAMPLING START STOP key The selected range will play back at the pitch of the base key the key shown in gray on the keyboard display You can select the base key by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on keyboard When you play a key to which the sample is assigned the highlighted range of the keyboard displayed in Keyboard amp Index the sample will be played back according to its loop settings note The procedure for using the ZOOM and Use Zero check boxes is the same as for P2 Loop Edit 4 From the list of page menu select the desired editing command Make the appropriate settings in the dia log box and press the OK button to execute For details on each command PG p 101 A note on saving samples In the dialog boxes of some page menu there is a Save to No setting that lets you specify the sample number to which the edited sample will be saved At this time a vacant sample number will be selected automatically so you will change the setting only if you want to specify the save destination number If you check Overwrite in the dialog box of the com mand the data prior to editing will be deleted and will be overwritten by the edited data Normally you will exe cute the Write operation without checking this so that the uned
291. le Setup z Index G01 82 __ Constant Pitch Sample gt 8661 One Two 8661 Orig Key C2 Top Key B2 Range C 1 B2 86 Pitch 66 06 BPM Adj in Page Menu 2 Use Multisample MS to select the multisample that you wish to edit 3 Select the Index You can also select an index by holding down the ENTER key and playing a note on the keyboard 4 Press the buttons to modify the number or order of the indices and edit them To delete the selected index press the Cut button The Insert button is used in conjunction with the Cut and Copy buttons The contents of the index that was Cut or Copied will be inserted The Create button has the same function as the Create button in P0 Recording Creating multisample indexes and sampling p 106 Modifying the settings of an index M Make the settings described in steps O of Edit ing the indexes 2 Set parameters for the selected index PG p 117 e Changing the Top Key will change the upper limit of the zone Simultaneously the lower limit of the next numbered index will also change e If you check Constant Pitch all notes in the index zone will sound the sample at its original pitch e Pitch adjusts the sample pitch for each index You can use the Pitch BPM Adjust page menu command to set the loop interval to a desired BPM value PG p 118 Converting a multisample to a program In pages PO Re
292. lect End Then press the Insert button To delete a WAVE file from the track list select the WAVE file that you want to delete and press the Cut button Subsequent tracks will be moved forward in the list ZS For details on editing operations such as Clear and Swap Track refer to PG p 173 3 Insert a blank CD R or CD RW disk into the drive Use the Make Audio CD page drive select area to select your CD R RW drive If you are using the CDRW 1 option the drive select area will indicate CDD Blank Disc If you are using a SCSI connected CD R RW drive the display will indicate ID Blank Disc will be the SCSI ID number amp An audio CD cannot be created on a disc that con tains data other than audio e g files In this case it will not be possible to select the page menu com mands Write to CD or Finalize Audio CD fe Even when the recommended CD R RW media is used some audio CD players may be unable to play back the disc Also since some audio CD players are unable to play back CD RW media we recommend that you use CD R media 4 Select the page menu command Write to CD to access the dialog box and specify how the CD will be written Write to CD Speed Oje Mode P write Execute finalize too Use Speed to set the writing speed This will indicate the speeds supported by the CD R RW drive you are using In this example set Spe
293. lements of sound Sound can be broken down into three elements pitch tone and volume On TRITON STUDIO these elements correspond to the Pitch Filter and Amplifier settings of a program In other words you would adjust the Pitch settings to modify the pitch the Filter settings to modify the tone and the Amplifier settings to modify the volume In Oscillator Oscillator P1 Edit Basic settings you select the waveform multisample that determines the basic sound and specify its pitch This sound is then mod ified by the pitch settings Pitch P2 Edit Pitch filter set tings Filter P3 Edit Filter and amp settings Amplifier P4 Edit Amp to create the basic sound of the program This basic sound can then be modified further by using the insert effects P8 Edit Insert Effect settings master effects and master EQ P9 Edit Master Effect settings to apply finishing touches When arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arppeggiator and controller settings P1 Edit Basic are added to this the final result is called a program fe A program that is usen in the Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes will have insert effect master effect master EQ arpeggiator and controller settings that are separate from those it has in the Pro gram mode The Compare function When P1 P9 are selected pressing the COMPARE key the LED will light will recall the sound that was written before you edited it Pressing COMPA
294. ling START SW Note On Threshold Sequencer START SW Here we will describe the Sampling START SW and Note On that can be used in all modes For details on trigger methods suitable for various purposes refer to the various examples of sampling on p 38 43 45 47 115 or PG p 4 37 56 and 97 Sampling START SW When you press the SAM PLING REC key you will enter sampling standby mode and sampling will begin when you press the SAMPLING START STOP key Note On When you press the SAMPLING REC key and then the SAMPLING START STOP key you will enter sampling standby mode and sampling will begin when you play the keyboard 4 Making settings for the sample to be recorded REC Sample Setup Sampling Setup Next we will specify the location into which the data will be sampled select mono or stereo sampling and specify the sampling time REC Sample Setup settings are made in Sampling mode and Sampling Setup settings are made in Combination Program or Sequencer mode These settings are main tained independently for each mode 104 Use the following pages to set them Moe Page O Sampling Sampling PO Recording Recording Combination PO Play Sampling Program PO Play Sampling Sequencer PO Play REC Sampling e Sampling mode SAMPLING P Recording Recording Aa pi Save to gt Ga Bank gt R Sample Time min 10 923 sec Sample Mode gt Stereo ing Setup Jl rence M Status
295. ll automatically be assigned to the index you created in step Q Repeat steps and This is an efficient way to record multiple samples p 39 SAMPLING P8 Recording Input Analog SAMPLING Input1 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan LOGO Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup Source BUS gt L R Trigger Sampling START Sw Metronome Precount Off J 126 Resample Auto Recording Level d6 Applying an insert effect to a sample and resampling it 4 In the P8 Insert Effect Routing page set BUS IFX Select to IFX1 SAMPLING P86 Insert Effect The process of applying an insert effect etc to a sampled sound and then sampling it once again is called resam pling In the PO Recording Recording page assign the sam ple that you want to resample to Sample Select Routing E When the power is first turned on the assigned sample will be set to Orig Key C2 If you want to resample in stereo set Sample Mode to Stereo BUS Select IFX7ZIndiy 0ut Assign BUSCIFX Select gt ay SAMPLING P8 Recording Ms gt AAA NewMS GG L Recording zal Index 001 61 JR OO ES J In the P8 Insert Effect Insert FX page set IFX1 to Stereo 052 Reverb Hall and turn IFX On Off ON Origkey C2 TopKey B2 Range C 1 B2 _ Create EC Sample Setup Save to RAM Bank
296. ll be repeated Press the MENU key The LCD screen will show a list of the pages in Sequencer mode 2 Press either P1 Cue List or numeric key 1 The P1 Cue List page will appear 3 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key 4 To stop playback press the SEQUENCER START STOP key once again If the last step is End playback will stop automatically when it reaches that point If the last step is Continue to Step01 playback will return to the first step and continue SEQUENCER P1 Cue List 6001 61 G0Q Meter 1 4 J 120 Pee Coo All Demo Medley gt Track 16 ThePhone E G2 Phone eal bat maaa1 5000 Bullet Timing paz Imeast P 801 Botanical Da3 Imaas4 P 5092 Two Aspects Da4 92211 P 5093 Da Rhyme Wizard aS mezaz P 5094 Progression ii Contents of the disk The internal hard drive contains the following data The included TNSFD 00P floppy disk contains the same data as the PRELOAD PCG file in the internal hard drive PRELO A D PCG e Preloaded data programs combinations drum kits arpeggio patterns global settings e Program data programs using the sampling function used by the demonstration songs WA When you load PRELOAD PCG it will be written into internal memory This data is preserved even if the power is turned off amp When you load PRELOAD PCG the data existing in the TRITON STUDIO before loading this data will be replaced If you wish to keep
297. ll show how to make settings that allow an assignable switch to change programs or combinations Connect an optional Korg PS 1 to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack 2 Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode 3 After pressing the MENU key and press the P2 Controller 4 Press the Foot Switch Assign popup button and press either Program Up or Program Down Program Up will cause the next higher program num ber to be selected each time you press the foot switch Program Down will cause the next lower program number to be selected each time you press the foot switch 6 Set the Foot Switch Polarity to the polarity of the foot switch you have connected If you have connected a Korg PS 1 pedal switch set this to KORG Standard If the polarity is not set correctly the pedal will not function appropriately 6 Either press the PROG key to enter Program PO Play or press the COMBI key to enter Combination P0 Play When you press the foot switch the pro gram combination will change 125 Basic functions System settings Creating original scales GLOBAL P3 User Scale User Octave Scale gt Tes Octave Scale AA DH FH G At 00 86 00 00 06 CK D E F B 00 00 00 00 G ey User All Notes Scale C 4 D 4 00 00 00 00 00 C4 D4 E4 F4 00 00 00 00 a 00 66 66 You can create your own original scales You can create sixteen different User
298. loppy disk inserted correctly Cover the write protect hole of the floppy disk so that it is in the write permit position Correctly insert a 3 5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk with its write protect hole covered into the disk drive and format it once again Can s save load data to from a floppy disk Is the floppy disk inserted correctly Is the floppy disk formatted Is the write protect hole of the floppy disk covered so that it is in the write permit position Correctly insert a 3 5 inch 2HD or 2DD floppy disk with its write protect hole covered into the disk drive and perform the save or load operation once again Internal hard drive external devices SCSI connected external drive is not recognized Has the drive been formatted PG p 170 L Is the external device connected correctly PG p 298 _ Is the terminator of the external device connected correctly PG p 298 The SCSI device ID settings of two or more drives may be conflicting For details on setting the SCSI device ID refer to the owner s manual for your drive You may have turned on the power of the SCSI device after powering on the TRITON STUDIO Turn off the power of the SCSI device and of the TRITON STUDIO Then turn on the power of the SCSI device and wait at least ten seconds before powering on the TRITON STUDIO Execute the page menu command Scan SCSI devic
299. ly on the track is overwritten by the newly recorded data M Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 84 2 Set the Recording Mode to Manual Punch In See Reco rdi ng Setup eee O Over Write O Auto Punch In Mi C Over Dub O Loop All Tracks iiti ei Manual Punch In Xerssve pata _ Multi REC M 3 In Location specify a location several measures earlier than the point at which you wish to begin recording 4 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin 6 At the point at which you wish to begin recording press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key Recording will begin Play the keyboard and operate controllers such as the joystick to record your perfor mance When you finish recording press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key Recording will end playback will continue RA Instead of pressing the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key in steps and you can use a foot switch con nected to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack Set the Global P2 Controller page Foot SW Assign to Song Punch In Out p 125 7 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will stop and you will return to the location that you specified in step Auto punch in First you must specify the area that will be re recorded Then recording will occur automatically at the speci fied area With this method the musical data previously on the track is overwritten
300. master effects amp For each effect the Wet value of the Wet Dry parameter is the output level at the effect The return value is multiplied with this Return 127 will be x1 0 to determine the actual output level of the mas ter effect Select the MFX1 and MFX2 pages and set the param eters for each selected effect For details on the parameters of each effect 1 PG p 187 Master EQ 5 Use the stereo 3 band master EQ to make final equal izing adjustments immediately before the sound is output to the AUDIO OUTPUT L MONO and R jacks Move the slider for each band to make adjustments You can select the Master EQ page and adjust the band frequency of the master EQ PG p 239 Effect settings in Combination Song and Song Play modes In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes you can specify the routing of each timbre track to the insert effects and master effects These settings are made in the same way in each of these modes We will be using the example of Combination mode in our explanation here Routing 4 In Combination P8 Edit Insert FX select the Routing page COMBINATION oneness ie Routing E Ow HEA Stereo Compressor jon iz IFx2 St Graphic TEQ On rss teres Flanger fon UFxd Stereo Phaser On HFxo St BPM Delay On me234567 6 Timbre Chain Strings Strings Strings Strings iKeyb IFX Indiv Out BUS Select ga Fx4 gt aay 2 Select IFX Indiv Out
301. mber of the drum kit used by each program e The bank of the program used by each track of the song e Ifthe song contains track pattern events the program banks within these events Loading data by individual item or bank The TRITON STUDIO lets you load programs and combi nations individually or by individual banks Drum kits and arpeggio patterns can also be loaded individually or as a group This allows you to restore just an individual item to its factory setting or to rearrange combinations for exam ple in the order in which they will be played during a concert amp Be aware that if you change the order of programs the sounds played by combinations may also be affected p 149 As an example here s how to load the combination INT D024 Rock Organ into INT A000 4 From the Bank I A directory and select Rock Organ PRELOAD PCG Combinations Bank I D The procedure is as follows 1 Perform steps of the preceding procedure press PRELOAD PCG to highlight it and press the Open button 2 Press Combinations to highlight it and press the Open button 3 Press Bank I D to highlight it and press the Open button 4 Press the scroll bar to find Rock Organ and press Rock Organ to highlight it Alternatively you could select any file since the desired file can be selected later from the dialog box 21 26 16 E Rock Organ 448 F Indian Ocean 448 29
302. mory boards for sample data Basic concepts The following multisamples are available for the oscil Overview of the modes lator e 429 internal multisamples ROM Piano The TRITON STUDIO has a large number of functions e Expanded multisamples when one or more EXB that let you play and edit programs and combinations PCM series board are installed record and play sequence data record and play back sam e Multisamples RAM that you sampled on the ples and manage data on disk The largest unit used to TRITON STUDIO or loaded in from media organize these functions is called a mode e Create drum programs using a drum kit created in The TRITON STUDIO has seven modes Global mode Program mode Combination mode e Select and play programs e Select and play combinations You can choose programs from rewritable banks INT A combination is a set of two or more programs a A INT F and EXB A EXB G which contain a total of maximum of eight and allows you to produce com 1 664 programs and non rewritable bank INT G 256 plex sounds that could not be created by an individual programs compatible with the GM2 standard and nine program drum programs You can choose combinations from rewritable banks The 128 programs of bank INT F can be selected only INT A INT E and EXB A EXB G which contain a total if the EXB MOSS option has been installed of 1 536 combinations Sample or resample e Sample or resample For example you can sample an ex
303. mory protect in Global mode and write the combination p 57 The Status MIDI Channel and Assign settings shown in the LCD screen of steps and 3 can be made so that certain timbres will sound only when the arpeggiator is On and will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing technique we will describe the settings of one of the preset combinations as an example Combination INT D080 Old Vox Organ Select combination INT D080 Old Vox Organ and play it Before you play make sure that the global MIDI channel Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel is set to 01 e Arpeggiator A is assigned to T timbre 7 and 8 When you play the keyboard the arpeggio pattern U396 User Dr Jump Up DnB will sound only the T7 program INT A068 HipHop Kit e The arpeggio pattern uses Fixed Note mode which is suitable for playing drums from the arpeggiator Global P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup page Arpeggio Tone Mode Fixed Note With this setting the arpeggio pattern will always play the specified pitches regardless of the note numbers received from the keyboard PG p 152 e The A Bottom Key and Top Key Combination P7 Edit Arp Scan Zone A B page are set so that arpeggiator A will operate only for notes B3 and lower e Arpeggiator A is also assigned to T8 but this is so that the T7 program INT A068 HipHop Kit will sound only when the
304. mples and samples used by the program Playback does not start when you press the SEQ UEN CER START STO P key in Sequencer mode L Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal PG p 143 Can t record in Sequencer mode Is the Memory Protect Song check box Global PO unchecked PG p 139 _ Is the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI set to Internal PG p 143 The arpeggiator settings that were copied from a combination using Copy From Combi cannot be recorded in the same way as when they were played Have you checked Multi REC Sequencer PO Play REC Preference p 85 L Depending on the settings of the combination it may be necessary to adjust settings such as Track Select MIDI Channel Status and Arpeggiator Assign p 96 In the Copy from Combi dialog box check the Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC option before you execute the copy This will cause the set tings to be adjusted automatically p 95 The settings that are made automatically by Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC will be executed according to the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key set ting of the combination If you want to turn on the arpeggiator in Sequencer mode and record the per formance of a combination make sure that the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is turned on for the combination when you write it in Combination mode Then execute the Copy From Combi p 95
305. n p 125 ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob GATE knob VELOCITY knob These knobs control the arpeggiator in realtime For details on operation refer to the following page Using the arpeggiator while you play The arpeggiator is a function that automatically generates arpeggios broken chords Most arpeggiators produce an arpeggio when you play a chord on the keyboard The chord you played on the keyboard is sounded as an arpeggio broken chord In addition to this the TRITON STUDIO s arpeggiator is a polyphonic arpeggiator that is able to produce a variety of chordal transformations or phrases based on the pitch or timing of the notes you play on the keyboard These func tions let you use the arpeggiator to play a wide range of patterns including drum or bass phrases and guitar or keyboard backing riffs It is also effective to use the arpeg giator as part of the sound creating process when creating subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects The TRITON STUDIO features a Dual Arpeggiator that lets you simultaneously use two arpeggio patterns in Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode You can take advantage of this in many ways such as applying separate arpeggio patterns to a drums pro gram and a bass program or using a keyboard split or velocity to switch between two arpeggio patterns The TRITON STUDIO provides five preset arpeggio pat terns the standard UP DOWN ALT1 ALT2 and RAN
306. n the on off status of the SW1 and SW2 keys is saved WA For details on making these settings refer to Setting the function of SW1 and SW2 p 145 25 Quick Start Playing Using controllers The Lock function Joystick Select program bank INT A001 Acoustic Piano and play the keyboard To select a program make sure that you are in Program mode and press the BANK INT A key numeric key 1 and then the ENTER key 2 Move the joystick toward yourself the Y direction The modulation will deepen and at the same time res onance will be applied to give a unique character to the sound 3 While holding the joystick toward yourself press the SW2 switch The SW2 key LED will light The modulation effect at this point will be maintained Lock function SWI SW2 i a 4 Release the joystick and play the keyboard The modulation will stay the same as it was when the SW2 key was pressed Moving the joystick toward yourself will not affect the sound Press the SW2 key once again to release the Lock function Ribbon controller Make sure that the INT A001 Acoustic Piano program is selected 1 Press the SW2 key The SW2 key LED will light 2 Touch the ribbon controller and move your finger to left and right Movement in the X direction will brighten the tone and movement in the X direction will darken the tone 3 Take your
307. n that you are currently editing with the un edited sound already in memory You can also use this key to make before and after comparisons when recording or editing in Sequencer mode p 17 8 VALUE controllers The following VALUE controllers are used to set the value of the selected parameter p 17 VALUE slider VALUE Use this to modify the value of a parame ter This controller is convenient when A you wish to make large changes in the A This slider can also be used as a modula tion source Z A V keys These are used to increase or decrease the parameter value in steps of one It is convenient to use these to make fine adjustments EXIT MENU 0 10 s HOLD ENTER C Jt J J VALUE dial Use this dial to modify the value of the parameter Numeric keys 0 9 EN TER key key 10 s HOLD key Use these keys to numerically input a parameter value Use numeric keys 0 9 the key and the 10 s HOLD key to enter the value and press the ENTER key to confirm it The 10 s HOLD key lets you input a value with a decimal point The key inverts the sign of the parameter value The 10 s HOLD key is also used when you wish to hold the 10 s place while selecting programs or combina tions By holding down the ENTER key and pressing a numeric key 0 9 you can select up to ten page menu commands in the current page 9 LCD screen The TRITON STU
308. n you want to record phrases that would be impossible or too rapid to play live WA Rapid phrases can also be recorded in realtime by temporarily slowing down the sequencer tempo Here s the procedure for step recording Press the MENU key to access the Jump menu and press P5 Track Edit The P5 Track Edit Track Edit page will appear SEQUENCER P5 Track Edit 661 61 000 Meter 4 4 gt S000 Acid Jazz P Trackas Lead Synth J 108 gt Manu Reso b Hi _ RPPR To End of Measure 681 From Measure iag 2 Set Track Select to Track 08 Lead Synth For this example we will input a lead performance using an analog synthesizer sound 3 Set From Measure to 001 With this setting step recording will begin from mea sure 1 4 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Step Recording A dialog box will appear Step Recording Track 48 M661 61 666 Meter Step Time P gt Note Duration 085 Note velocity 64 Memory 898 Free M i Meter 4 4 liccacn 6 Set Step Time to specify the basic timing value at which you will input notes and rests In the popup menu at left you can specify a value in the range of o whole note 32nd note For this example select 16th note If you want to input triplets or dotted notes use the popup menu at the right to select 3 for triplets or for dotted not
309. nation to which the ripped sample will be written Select RAM if you want to rip the sample into sample memory RAM In this case you can also set Sample No L R to specify the sample number that will be written Normally you can leave this unchanged Ripping To gt GE Sample No L P saga Sample No R 0001 Select DISK if you want to rip the sample to hard disk Use drive select to select the drive and use the Open and Up buttons to select the directory in which the data will be saved Also specify a name for the WAVE file that will be saved To gt DISK NEWFILE WAVES P HOD INTERNAL HD 9 Press the OK button to execute ripping or press the Cancel button to cancel without executing amp When you press the OK button the Obey Copyright Rules dialog box will appear Carefully read About copyright p iii and if you consent to the terms press the OK button to begin ripping If you do not consent to the terms press the Cancel button to cancel the operation Obey Copyright Rules Are you sure Reading the analog audio output of an audio CD into a sample Here s how analog audio data from an audio CD track can be loaded into a sample In the same way as when you send the audio output of a CD player to the TRITON STUDIO s AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 use audio cables to connect the audio outputs of your SCSI connected CD ROM or CD R RW drive to the TRITON S
310. nces to the keys dials and knobs on the TRI TON STUDIO s panel are enclosed in square brackets References to buttons or tabs indicate objects in the LCD display screen Parameters in the LCD display screen Parameters displayed in the LCD screen are enclosed in double quotation marks Boldface type Parameter values are printed in boldface type Content that is of particular importance is also printed in boldface type Procedure steps 1 D Steps in a procedure are listed as ts p m These indicate pages or parameter numbers to which you can refer Symbols 4 W 0 These symbols respectively indicate cautions advice and MIDI related explanations Example screen displays The values of the parameters shown in the example screens of this manual are only for explanatory pur poses and may not necessary match the values that appear in the LCD screen of your instrument MIDI related explanations CC is an abbreviation for Control Change Number In explanations of MIDI messages numbers in square brackets always indicate hexadecimal numbers Table of Contents Data handing anna araci rer a SE een iii Handling of the internal hard drive iii COPYRIGHT WARNING 1 cece n iii POUT EIS manual ecerseo n e A eens iv INtFOGUCTION cccccececeesucees 1 Maim tearUre Sorire e a T Er enue 1 Front and rear panel cccccsceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 Pront paneldir
311. ncy and bit resolution As shown in the diagram sampling reads the level of the analog signal at fixed intervals along the time axis and stores the levels in memory as digital data Level Analog waveform Time 48kHz 48 000 times every second 0 0208 mS cycle 16bit 65 536 levels of data Sampled digital waveform Time The fixed intervals mentioned above are generally expressed as the sampling frequency 48 kHz kilohertz means that sampling is performed 48 000 times each sec ond and that the interval is 1 second 48 000 times approximately 0 00002083 seconds approximately 0 02083 mS millisecond The higher the sampling frequency is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be Each level is read and converted into digital data The accuracy at this time is determined by the bit resolution This process converts an analog signal with infinite reso lution into a digital signal with finite resolution With 16 bit resolution each level is indicated in 65 536 steps the sixteenth power of two The greater the bit resolution is the closer to the original analog signal the waveform in memory will be 48 kHz 16 bit sampling is the same quality as in audio devices such as DAT A CD uses 44 1 kHz 16 bit sampling which is a slightly lower sampling frequency Samples and Multisamples Samples The data that is recorded sampled into internal memory or l
312. nd musical data within the track Setup parameters Tracks 1 16 Bank Program No PLAY MUTE REC Pan Vol ume Track Play Loop Loop Start Measure Loop End Measure Play Intro Status MIDI Channel Bank Select When Status EX2 Force OSC Mode OSC Select Por tamento Transpose Detune Bend Range Delay Use Program s Scale MIDI Filter Key Zone Velocity Zone Track Name Arpeggiator Assign IFX Indiv Out BUS Select Send1 MFX1 Send2 MFX2 Master track Time signature Tempo Musical data Tracks 1 16 Note On Off Program Change including Bank Select Pitch Bend After Touch Poly After Control Change Pattern No When you change the setting during realtime recording this will be recorded as musical data This allows the starting settings to be modified dur ing the playback Musical data MIDI RPN data can be used to change the starting settings during playback For details on control changes and RPN refer to PG p 260 263 Track 1 Parameter settings Musical data Track 2 Parameter settings Musical data Track 3 Parameter settings Musical data Routing P8 1 Musical data Patterns There are two types of patterns preset patterns and user patterns e Preset patterns Patterns suitable for drum tracks are preset in internal memory and can be selected for any song e User patterns Each song can have up to 100 patterns When using a pattern in a dif
313. ndar will be initialized and the date and time will not be recorded correctly You can replace the calendar backup battery by your self Refer to PG p 286 for details 146 Shortcuts MENU key numeric keys 0 9 e Accesses the pages within a mode EN TER key numeric keys 0 9 e Accesses the page menu commands in each page up to ten items EN TER key keyboard e Inputs note number values or velocity values e Selects KEY in Global P5 Drum Kit Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page e Selects base key and index in Sampling mode EN TER key LOCATE key e In Sequencer mode and Song Play mode sets the current location as the Location equivalent to the Set Location page menu command Troubleshooting If you experience problems refer to the relevant item and take the appropriate measures Power supply Power does not turn on _ Is the power cable connected to an outlet p 11 L Is the POWER switch turned on Turn on the rear panel POWER switch p 19 LCD screen The power is turned on but nothing is shown in the LCD screen The TRITON STUDIO functions normally when you play the keyboard or perform other operations L Use the rear panel Contrast adjustment knob to adjust the contrast of the LCD screen p 7 The power is turned on but the LCD screen does not display normally or an error message is dis played There is no sound when
314. ner bent over By pressing one of the pages shown you can move to that page You can also move to the corresponding page by pressing a numeric key 0 9 When you press the EXIT key PO will be displayed Other objects To modify the parameter value of an object shaped like a slider or knob press it to move the edit cell to that object and use the VALUE controllers to modify the value In addition there are also buttons similar to the OK button and Cancel button explained in dialog box which exe cute an operation when they are pressed and released such as the Done button Copy button and Insert button Toggle buttons This type of button will change its function or switch on off each time it is pressed PLAY MUTE REC button in Sequencer TEN Mute and Song Play mode EH ee SOLO ON OFF button in Sequencer and Es Song Play mode ON OFF button for Insert Effect and Mas ter Effect D P Play LCD screen Connections amp Connections must be made with the power turned off Please be aware that careless operation may dam age your speaker system or cause malfunctions If a passive type guitar a guitar without an internal preamp is connected it will not be possible is F to sample at an appropriate level 3 Analog audio input connections due to the impedance mismatch CD player Such instruments must be analog record player etc connected via a preamp or effect uni
315. ng multiple tracks of MIDI data from an external sequencer 1 Make sure that the TRITON STUDIO s MIDI IN and the external sequencer s MIDI OUT are connected by a MIDI cable If they are not connected turn off the power make the connection and then turn the power back on again t PG p 258 M If the EXB mLAN option is installed MIDI data can be received from an mLAN device PG p 141 2 Set the MIDI Clock Global P1 MIDI page MIDI Clock to External so that TRITON STUDIO will synchronize to the MIDI clock of the external sequencer Make sure that Receive Ext Realtime Commands is checked GLOBAL P1 MIDI MIDI Setup MIDI Channel Dji Local Control On Convert Position PreMIDI Note Receive gt All MIDI Clock O Internal External MIDI C External mLAN Receive Ext Realtime Commands MIDI Filter Enable Program Change Bank Change Combination Change Enable After Touch Enable Control Change UO Enable Exclusive 3 Create a new song and in the Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page check the Multi REC check box Set the Recording Mode to Over Write sissies R ecor di n g S e t u p eee ed Over Write C Auto Punch In os tt Yess pingat ud O Over Dub Fifa ah Trave ighi e MAgT ase O Manual Punch In j Remove Pht Multi EC 4 Select the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 T09 16 page For the tracks that you are not recording set PLAY M
316. nnector An external hard disk drive can be connected here and used to sample or to save load data in the same way as the internal hard disk drive A CD R RW can also be con nected here to create an audio CD or to save load data p 59 118 7 MIDI MIDI THRU connector Musical data and sound settings etc that are received at the MIDI IN connector are re transmitted without change from the MIDI THRU connector You can use this to connect multiple MIDI devices PG p 258 MIDI OUT connector Musical data and sound settings etc are transmitted from this connector Use this to control another MIDI device connected via this port to the TRITON STUDIO amp PG p 258 MIDI IN connector Musical data and sound settings etc are received at this connector Use this to play the TRITON STUDIO from another MIDI device connected to this port PG p 258 8 DAMPER jack An optional switch type pedal such as the Korg DS 1H damper pedal can be connected here If a DS 1H is connected it will function as a half damper pedal If another switch type pedal is connected it will function as a damper switch In order to ensure that the pedal functions correctly please adjust the polarity and the half damper sensitivity p 11 PG p 137 146 9 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack An optional on off foot switch such as the Korg PS 1 foot switch can be connected here p 11 Its function can be assigned in Global mode allowing you to use th
317. nput Analog Input1 Level 127 Pan L000 BUS Select 1 2 SEQUENCER P Play REC Sampling ail z Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK a inputi Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select P 1 2 Pan CO64 tadi MPAi BYA Gir MERD Bue Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Sendi MFX1 00 Send2 MFX2 900 Save to gt RAM Mode gt Stereo Sample Time min 14 925 sec k_1 3 3 16 1 8 3 16 1 8 3 16 rence J 6 Set the recording level Play your guitar at the volume at which you will record If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload adjust the rear panel LEVEL knob toward MIN until the level is appropri ate Press the SAMPLING REC key When you play your guitar the level meter will indi cate the volume at which the guitar will be sampled If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE con trollers to lower the Recording Level slider in the right of the display below 0 0 to an appropriate level This adjustment will not affect the output volume but will affect the data that will be sampled When you have finished making adjustments press the SAMPLING REC key 6 Set the various Sampling Setup parameters Make the following settings Source BUS Indiv 1 2 Trigger Threshold Level as desired Save to RAM Mode Mono Sample Time as desired D Select the page menu command Sele
318. ns can also be set independently for the entire mode in Sampling mode and Song Play mode These settings are made in Realtime Control Knobs B Assign of the respective page Specifying the function of SW1 and SW2 note You can use these knobs as sources for alternate mod ulation or effect dynamic modulation and control program parameters or effect parameters In this case you will normally select Knob Mod 1 CC 17 Knob Mod 2 CC 19 Knob Mod 3 CC 20 and Knob Mod 4 CC 21 Here we will give an example of how knob 1 can be used to control the filter and amp EG attack of a program Press the PROG key to enter Program mode 2 After pressing the MENU key and press the P1 Edit Basic 3 Press the Controller tab 4 Press the Realtime Control Knob B Assign Knob 1 B popup button and select F A Attack 6 Press the REALTIME CONTROLS key to select B mode and rotate knob 1 The EG attack of the filter and amp will change is if you wish to keep these settings after the power is turned off you must save them p 56 However the settings of Sampling mode cannot be saved Adjusting the contrast brightness of the LCD screen Use the rear panel contrast knob to make adjustments 145 Effects settings Other functions Basic functions Sounding a beep when the LCD screen is pressed If the Global PO Basic Setup System Preference page Beep Enable check box is turned on
319. nsity is used by most programs to decrease the volume of softly played notes and increase the volume of strongly played notes and the Amp Modulation parame ter adjusts the depth of this control Normally you will set Amp Modulation to positive values As this setting is increased there will be greater volume difference between softly played and strongly played notes LFO 1 2 Specifies how the LFO s will produce cyclic changes in volume tremolo effect The volume will be affected by the LFO s for which you set an LFO1 Intensity LFO2 Intensity value Intensity AMS Intensity adjusts the depth by which the tremolo effect produced by the LFO will be affected when you assign an AMS LFO1 AMS LFO2 AMS For example if you set AMS to JS Y 02 tremolo will be applied when you move the joystick of TRITON STU DIO toward yourself or when CC 02 is received Amp1 EG page Here you can make settings for the amp EG which changes the volume over time Every instrument has its own characteristic curve of vol ume change This is part of what gives each instrument its identifiable character Conversely by applying a strings type Amp EG curve to an organ type multisample you can produce a sound with a character unlike a typical organ Piano 73 Basic functions Program settings 74 LFO settings P5 Edit Common LFO For each oscillator you can use two LFO Low Frequency Oscilla
320. o a positive value For even numbered steps set Flam to a negative value Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 Drum pattern 2 Set Step No to 02 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 10 You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern by using Fixed Note with a drum program 3 Set Step No to 03 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 4 In Program mode select a drum kit program Set Step No to 04 and press the 0 key For this example select the preset program INT A036 Set Pitch Offset to 00 Standard Kit 1 Set Step No to 05 and press the 0 key 2 In Global P6 User Arpeggio select the Pattern Setup Set Pitch Offset io 12 page and make Arpeggio Pattern Setup settings Arpeggio Tone Mode Set this to Fixed Note This will cause the tone to always sound at the specified pitch Fixed Note Mode If you set this to Trigger All Tones playing a single note on the keyboard will sound all tones If you set this to Trigger As Played the tones will be sounded according to the notes you play on the key board PG p 152 GLOBAL P6 User Arpeggio Pattern Setup 6 For Step No 06 do not enter a tone T Set Step No to 07 and press the 0 key Set Pitch Offset to 00 Set Step No to 08 and press the 0 key Set Pitc
321. o possible to set PCG Con tents to specify an individual bank to load and set the To field to select the bank into which that data will be loaded When you execute loading only the programs combina tions drum kits and user arpeggio pattern data of the selected bank will be loaded into the load destination bank you specify Global setting data will not be loaded If you set PCG Contents to Bank I A and To to Bank I A data will be loaded as follows Load PRELOAD PCG O Load PRELOAD SNG too _ Load PRELOAD KSC too PCG Contents gt Bank l 4 To Bank l 4 Programs e Bank I A file loaded into bank INT A Combinations e Bank I A file loaded into bank INT A Drum Kits e 00 15 I A B file loaded into bank I A B Arpeggio Patterns e 000 199 I A B file loaded into bank I A B When data is loaded into a bank that is different than its original bank the data bank program pattern and kit numbers etc will automatically be reconfigured so that after loading the various types of data will corre spond correctly in each mode The following data will also be reconfigured automati cally if you have checked Load SNG too so that song data is loaded at the same time in order to ensure that the song data plays back correctly e The bank of each program used by combinations e The pattern number of each user arpeggio pattern used by the combinations programs songs e The kit nu
322. o providing conventional arpeggiator functions the polyphonic arpeggiator of the TRITON STUDIO can respond to the pitches or timing at which you play the keyboard and produce a diverse range of chords or phrases This can be used to play a variety of drum phrases using the Fixed Note Mode that is ideal for drums bass phrases or guitar and keyboard backing riffs The arpeggiator is also effective for use with subtly moving pads synth sounds or sound effects In Combination mode Sequencer mode and Song Play mode the TRITON STUDIO provides dual arpeggia tors that can simultaneously play two arpeggio pat terns You can apply separate arpeggio patterns to drum and bass programs or use keyboard splits or velocity to switch between arpeggio patterns for an even more dynamic performance RPPR The TRITON STUDIO features Korg s RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function In Sequencer mode this function allows you to assign pre set patterns or user patterns with a specified playback track to individual notes of the keyboard and playback that pattern in realtime simply by pressing the assigned note Numerous preset patterns including patterns ideal for drum tracks are built into the internal memory 6 channel audio input 6 channel audio output e Both analog 2 channel and digital 2 channel audio inputs are standard allowing you to record stereo samples If the EXB mLAN option is installed two more input ch
323. o return to the screen of step Press the SEQ key to enter Sequencer mode and select 000 for Song Select SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 001 01 00O Meter 444 J 120 b Man S000 NEW SONG Track 1 TRACK 61 Reso Hi RPPR P pz C r ik aa iNewMS_ Noisy St iNoisy St iNoisy St Noisy St Hois St iNoisy St peau Sti The following song data has been set created automat ically as you specified in step 113 Basic functions Sampling settings P0 Play REC page Song 000 Meter 4 4 Tempo 120 PO Play REC Program T01 08 page Track01 Program INT E101 P5 Track Edit Track Edit page Track01 track data 8 measures D2 Event Edit Track 41 Measure up Index HAHAH BT 1 900 PROG Bank I E P 101 BT 01 000 D2 127 L 000094 BT 01 094 D 2 V 127 000 097 BT 01 191 E2 V 127 L 000094 BT 02 093 F2 V 127 L 000098 BT 02191 F 2 V127 L 000 094 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback As an example set J Tempo to 100 Notice that the pitch does not change when you play back at a differ ent tempo 5 If the beat of the original rhythm loop sample is not reproduced correctly when you change the tempo or if obtrusive noise is heard this is because the sample was not sliced appropriately in step The way in which the percussion instrument sounds were divided will have a major impact on the quality of the playback when th
324. oaded from a file is referred to as a sample or sample file Samples consist of the actual waveform data and parameters that specify how the data will be played back such as Start Loop Start and End Address Samples can be used in multisamples and drum kits The TRITON STUDIO can hold a maximum of 4 000 sam ples in its internal memory i The TRITON STUDIO can share a single waveform among multiple samples This allows you to create multiple samples with different playback addresses from the same waveform without wasting internal memory For example suppose that you have wave form data that records a voice saying One Two Three This single piece of waveform data could be shared by three samples with the playback of sample A producing One Two Three sample B producing One Two and sample C producing Two Three PG p 92 Multisamples A multisample consists of settings that make one or more samples sound in different areas of the keyboard A multi sample consist of between one and 128 indexes Each index contains parameters that specify the sample that will playback the zone in which it will playback the orig inal pitch key the playback pitch and level etc Using multisamples When sampling an instrument that is able to produce a wide range of pitches such as a piano recording just one sample and applying it playing it back over the entire pitch range will not produce a natural sounding
325. ocity value will be input When the Global P5 Drum Kit page is displayed you can hold down the ENTER key and play a note to recall the settings that have been assigned to that note In Sampling mode you can hold down the ENTER key and play a note to recall the index that is assigned to that note Turning the power on off amp Before you turn on the power make sure that the desired connections have been made as described in Connections p 10 1 Turning the power on 1 Press the rear panel POWER switch to turn on the power The LCD screen will display the name of your model and the software version The following graphic shows the factory set LCD screen The version number is subject to change with TRITON STUDIO MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER OPTIONS EXB PCM Yersion Slot1 6 6 8 Sleot2 Slots 2 Turn on your powered monitors or stereo amp Slot4 SIMM Slot5 Slot 16MB Slot6 Slot 3 Raise the TRITON STUDIO s VOLUME slider to an appropriate level and adjust the volume of your powered monitors or stereo amp 2 Slot Slots amp If an external SCSI device is connected turn on the power of the external SCSI device and then wait ten seconds or longer before you turn on the power of the TRITON STUDIO 2 Turning the power off Set the front panel VOLUME slider and the volume of your powered monitor or st
326. of timbre 2 Set the P3 Edit MIDI Filter 1 Enable Damper parameter Timbre 1 Enable Damper unchecked Timbre 2 Enable Damper checked Layer split and velocity switch settings Controller settings P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone page Key zone settings Indicates settings such as layer split and keyboard cross fade Specifies the range of notes that will be sounded by each timbre Each area that sounds a timbre is referred to as a Key Zone By setting key zones you can create a combi nation in which different programs sound in different areas of the keyboard By combining key zones specified for each timbre you can create layered or split combinations The upper and lower limits for the key zone of each tim bre are set by the Top Key and Bottom Key respec tively For example in the following diagram timbres 1 3 are set to create a layered and split combination This is specified by the key zone settings Timbres 2 and 3 create a layer Timbre 1 and timbres 2 3 are split between the B3 and C4 note numbers Timbre 1 Timbre 2 Timbre 3 miii As an example here we will explain how to create a com bination like the one shown above 1 In the PO Play Program Select page or the P1 Edit Program Mixer page use the Program Select area to select the program that will be used for each timbre 1 3 Select a piano program for timbre 1 Select a brass program for timbre 2 Sele
327. oise or distortion in the audio input or in the sampled sound If you are inputting to the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks are the AUDIO INPUT LEVEL knob and Recording Level setting appropriate If Recording Level indicates ADC OVER LOAD adjust the LEVEL knob If CLIP is displayed adjust the Recording Level slider Adjusting the Recording Level will not affect the level of the output sound but will affect the level that is sampled While watching the level meter adjust Recording Level as high as possible with out allowing CLIP to appear p 116 _ If you are inputting to the S P DIF IN jack or mLAN connector if the EXB mLAN option is installed are the level of the output device and the Recording Level set appropriately If CLIP appears adjust the Recording Level slider _ Is the system clock set correctly If cyclic click noise is occurring check that you have selected the System Clock that is being input t PG p 138 Noise or oscillation is heard L When using an effect on the external audio source being input from AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 oscillation may occur depending on the type of effect or on the parameter settings Please adjust the input level output level and effect parameters You need to be particularly careful when using a high gain effect After a sample edit has been executed or after a stereo sample has
328. on Sequencer Song Play 141 Drum kit 129 Program 140 Sequencer 5 14 16 21 33 49 80 81 99 102 112 115 138 139 Shortcut 146 SIMM 5 19 SNG file 55 61 Solo 82 121 Song 21 33 49 80 81 Convert a cue list 92 Copy 88 Createa WAVE file 116 Edit 88 In Track Sampling 115 Naming 53 88 Save 54 Setting the number of measures 88 Song Play 14 16 102 120 138 139 149 Song Play Sequencer 141 Sounding abeep 146 Specifications 153 Split 76 77 Standard MIDI File SMF 80 97 120 Status 77 98 120 Step Cue List 21 90 User arpeggio pattern 134 Step recording 52 86 Step Arpeggiator 135 Stereo 111 SW1 SW2 3 25 27 144 145 Synchronization 138 Song Play 120 Synchronize 144 T Tab 9 16 Template song 49 120 Tempo 5 29 50 74 82 91 110 112 130 132 144 Text edit button 9 40 56 57 Timbre 35 76 Time signature 80 82 86 TNSFD 00P 65 Toggle button 9 Tone 26 27 68 71 124 User arpeggio pattern 135 Tone Generator 15 Tone Arpeggiator 135 TouchView 2 158 Track 83 Musical data 81 113 Setup parameters 81 Track edit 90 Track Play Loop 50 Track list 119 Transpose 77 124 Tremolo 71 73 74 Tune 34 Tuning 124 U Use DKit Setting 73 Use Zero 111 User arpeggio pattern 130 User pattern 81 86 User Scale 126 User template song 55 V VALUE controller 4 17 VALUE dial 4 VALUE slider 4 27 Velocity 27 52 70 72 146 Arpeggiator 5 131 Velocity crossfa
329. on is installed Connect the audio source that you want to input e Input from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks Connect a mic guitar or CD player etc to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks Set the AUDIO INPUT MIC LINE switch as appro priate for the device you are inputting If a mic is connected set this to the MIC position If a guitar or analog audio device is connected set this to the LINE position W Guitars with active pickups can be input directly However if your guitar has a passive type pickup i e without a built in preamp the mismatch in impedance levels will make it difficult to sample at an appropriate level Such instruments should be routed through a preamp or effect unit before they are con nected MAX MIN O OOS EL bes AUDIO INPUT m e Input from the S P DIF IN jack Connect the optical digital output jack of your DAT etc to the rear panel S P DIF IN jack PG p 138 OUT MAIN IN S P DIF e Input from the mLAN connector if the EXB mLAN option is installed Connect the IEEE 1394 connector FireWire style of your mLAN device or computer to the rear panel mLAN connector t Refer to the owner s manual of the EXB mLAN option 102 Input settings One set of Input settings are maintained by Sampling mode and a different set of Input settings are shared by Combination Program Sequencer Song Play and Disk mode This latter set is saved as Global mode pa
330. oopoooooop 0 127 Oe Oe Song Position Song Select Tune 7 System Clock O O 4 Real Time Command O O a Local On Off Aux All Notes Off O 123 127 Messages Active Sense o Reset x O O O COO O O O x O x O O x When cue list is selected corresponds to cue list 1 System ast When cue list is selected corresponds to cue lists 0 19 1 Common Notes P A C E Transmitted received when Global P1 MIDI Filter Program Change After Touch Control Change Exclusive is Enable respectively 1 When Global mode P1 MIDI Clock is Internal transmitted but not received The opposite for External MIDI or mLAN 2 LSB MSB 02 00 Arpeggiator ON OFF 0A 00 Arpeggiator Gate control 0B 00 Arpeggiator Velocity control 3 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch bend range 01 00 Fine tune 02 00 Coarse tune 4 In addition to Korg exclusive messages Inquiry GM System On Master Volume Master Balance Master Fine Tune and Master Coarse Tune are supported Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION 155 Appendices Specifications MIDI implementation amp options chart Index N umerics 10 s Hold 4 23 24 24 dB oct low pass filter with resonance 71 A After Touch 26 27 124 Allocation 2
331. or insert effects or master effects Effect dynamic modulation function Combinations 1 536 user memory combinations 512 presets Programs 1 536 user memory programs 128 more when EXB MOSS is installed 512 presets 256 9 drum ROM programs GM2 sound map compatible 144 user drum kits 20 presets 9 ROM GM drum kits GM2 sound map compatible Dual polypnonic Use two arpeggiators simultaneously Combination Sequencer Song Play modes arpeggiator 5 preset arpeggio patterns 507 user arpeggio patterns 367 presets Sequencer 16 timbres 16 tracks 1 master track Maximum capacity 200 000 notes Resolution J 192 200 songs 20 cue lists 150 preset patterns 100 user patterns for each song 16 preset 16 user template songs Supports TRITON format and SMF formats 0 and 1 RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function One set is available for each one song Song play 16 timbres 16 tracks SMF formats 0 and 1 supported Disk mode Load save utility Audio CD writing playback Data filer function save load MIDI exclusive data CD ROM R RW read and write UDF format CD R RW record and play CD DA load ISO9660 level 1 data sup ported 88 keys RH2 76 keys 61 keys The 88 keys model features an RH2 Real Weighted Hammer Action 2 keyboard which provides a differing key weight in each of four keyboard ranges just as on a grand piano VALUE slider ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO GATE VELOCITY knobs and ON OFF
332. ording Level d6 Input Prefe Memory Setup Jl rence Jl Status 4 Set the various parameters so that the signal from the AUDIO INPUT jacks will be input to the TRITON STUDIO Set the following parameters as shown Input 1 Level 127 Pan L000 BUS L R Input 2 Level 127 Pan R127 BUS L R amp When you change the Bus setting from Off to L R or IFX the volume level of the AUDIO OUT L MONO and R jacks or the headphone volume may rise abruptly Please use caution 2 Set the recording level Recording Level dB Play back the audio source that you want to record If the display indicates ADC OVERLOAD AD converter input overload lower the level by turning the rear panel LEVEL knob to an appropriate posi tion Alternatively lower the level of the output source WA The best audio quality will be obtained at a level slightly lower than when the ADC OVERLOAD indication appears i e the highest level that does not cause an input overload 2 Press the SAMPLING REC key The level meter allows you to check the volume of the input If the display indicates CLIP use the VALUE con troller to lower the Recording Level slider located in the right of the display from the 0 0 position to an appropriate level 3 When you have finished making adjustments once again press the SAMPLING REC key Also stop the playback of your audio sour
333. ording to the settings being edited In the following pages we will explain how to edit some of the major parameters and explain their functions For a more detailed explanation of the parameters refer to PG p 33 and following Combinations that you edit or create from scratch can be written into the 1 536 combination memory areas internal memory of banks INT A INT E and EXB A EXB G They can also be stored and managed on various types of media p 59 Suggestions for editing procedure The parameters of each timbre are set in P1 Edit Pro eram Mixer P9 Edit Master FX This is where you create the basic combination consisting of the programs you select here First use P1 Edit Program Mixer to select the program for each timbre and then use P4 Edit Zone Ctrl to spec ify the range in which each program will sound layer split velocity switch etc Then adjust the volume of each timbre and set various other parameters To add finishing touches to the sound you can assign insert effect settings in P8 Edit Insert FX and master effect and master EQ settings in P9 Edit Master FX that are different from the effect settings of Program mode In addition you can make arpeggiator settings in P7 Edit Arp and controller settings in P4 Edit Zone Ctrl to create the finished combination es By using the page menu command Solo Selected Timbre you can listen only to the selected timbre This is a convenient
334. out put level or effect parameters Please be aware of this particularly when using an effect that has a high gain 139 Effects Basic functions settings Routing settings and effect set tings The insert effects master effects and master EQ have the same structure in all modes but the routing settings will determine how the oscillators of a program or the timbres of a combination or track of a song will be sent to each insert effect or master effect In the pages that follow we will explain how you can make routing settings and effect settings in each mode Effect settings for a program Routing 4 In Program P8 Edit Insert Effect select the Routing page PROGRAM P8 Edit Insert Effect Routing aa IFx1 Stereo Compressor On HFX2 No Effect SOF FX3 INo Effect OF No Effect OF HFXS No Effect Off Chain H ae BUS Select IF X Indi Out Assign All OSCs t H Fx 2 Use BUS Select IFX Indiv Out Assign to specify the bus insertion effect to which the output of the oscillator will be sent L R The output will not be sent to the insert effects After passing through the master EQ the sound will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT MAIN L MONO and R IFX1 5 The output will be sent to insert effect IFX 1 2 3 4 or 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 The output will be sent to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 2 3 or 4 It will not be sent to the insert effects the master effects or the master EQ Off T
335. page select a jukebox list filename extension JKB 2 Press the Load Jukebox List page menu command The jukebox list will be loaded into the TRITON STU DIO Playing along with SMF data amp Do not subject the TRITON STUDIO to physical shock or vibration while playing back data from a disc in the CDRW 1 drive if installed If you perform on the keyboard or controllers at this time the data may not play back correctly Minus one play You can enjoy minus one play by playing back SMF data muting a specific part and playing that part your self Playback the SMF data identify the track whose part you wish to play and stop playback p 121 2 In PO Prog Mix select the Prog 1 8 tab or Prog 9 16 tab 3 Use Play Track Select to select the track for the part that you want to play from the keyboard When you play the keyboard the program of the selected track will be heard SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 68 A 961 61 00 Meter 474 J 129 C Jukebox File gt 290 SONGGI Name SONG_ 1 ee gt EEE at h4 GHG1 Acoustic Piano p H Katoa Kestoa k Progra at 12 a4 bes be TA ae D Acou 4 Press the PLAY MUTE button to set the track selected in step 3 to MUTE If you want the musical data of the track to playback in addition to your own playing on the keyboard set Play Mute to PLAY 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to begin playback an
336. parameters can be synchronized to an external MIDI clock You can also synchronize sounds and effects to the tempo of the internal sequencer or the arpeggiator Programs and combinations e In preset ROM the TRITON STUDIO provides 1 536 user programs and 256 programs 9 drumsets for GM2 compatibility When shipped from the factory it contains high quality preload programs 512 that cover a wide range of musical needs The 1 536 user programs can be modified by adjusting the numerous editing parameters the effects and the arpeggiator to create your own original programs When the EXB MOSS option is installed 128 programs for use with the Korg MOSS tone generator will also be available e The TRITON STUDIO provides 144 user drum kits as well as 9 ROM drum kits compatible with GM2 The factory settings contain 20 preloaded drum kits that cover a wide range of musical styles You can create your own drum kits by assigning each key to any one of the 417 drum samples or to an origi nal sample that you sampled or loaded in from media For the sound assigned to each key you can make filter and amp settings and even route the sound to effects or individual audio outputs e A multisample or sample that was sampled or resampled in Sampling mode or other modes or loaded in from media using the Disk mode can be easily used to create a program These programs can also be used in a combination or song Samples can also be used as drum instr
337. played back in Song Play mode The TRITON STUDIO recognizes only files with an exten sion of MID as SMF data Be sure that the filename exten sion is MID Track 1 Setup parameters Musical data Track 2 Setup parameters Musical data Htp Routing P8 1 Track 3 Setup parameters Musical data About MIDI Track status settings in Song Play mode You can select whether the musical data played by a track or the data produced by operating the TRITON STUDIO s keyboard and controllers will sound the TRITON STU DIO s internal tone generator and or will sound an exter nal tone generator When the Status of a track is set to INT the data played back by that track and the data produced by operating the keyboard or controllers of the TRITON STUDIO will play and control the TRITON STUDIO s internal tone genera tor When the Status of a track is set to EXT or BTH the data played back by that track and the data produced by operating the keyboard or controllers of the TRITON STU DIO will play and control an external tone generator The MIDI channel of the external tone generator must match the MIDI channel of the TRITON STUDIO track that is set to EXT or BTH With a setting of BTH the external tone generator and the TRITON STUDIO s own tone gen erator will be played and controlled simultaneously PG p 126 E E 14 E 16 Keyboar Drums Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar Keyboar
338. ppropriate set tings for the connected external SCSI device so that it is ready to save data 2 Press the DISK key to select Disk mode 3 Press the Save tab EaHDD INTERNAL HD AudioCD AudioCD Info A 4 If you want to save to a different device use the drive select setting to select the device on which you want to save the data Drive select 6 Press the page menu button to access the page menu and press Save Sampling Data 6 When the dialog box appears press the text edit but ton to access the text dialog box assign a filename of SMPL_DM1 and press the OK button 7 Make sure that the All radio button is selected and press the OK button to save the data Save Multisamples and Samples Data SMPL_DM1 O All Multisamples C All Samples oO One Multisample gt ee EMPL eiro One Sample plates is When saving is completed a file with an extension of KSC together with the KMP and KSF files in folders will be saved For details on each file refer to PG p 162 About Korg format PCM data files Converting a multisample into a program A multisample you create can be converted into a pro gram If a sample or multisample is converted into a pro gram it can be played in Program mode or used in Combination mode and Sequencer mode 4 Press the SAMPLING key to enter Sampling mode 2 Create a multisample Quick Start Refer to Sampling a vocal from a mi
339. r arpeggio pattern to an unused num ber About drum kits A drum kit consists of drum samples PCM drum wave form data assigned to individual notes with individual adjustments for pitch and level etc The TRITON STUDIO has 144 drum kit memory areas When shipped from the factory some of the 000 I A B 015 A B and 128 User 143 User areas contain pre loaded drum kits suitable for various musical styles In Global P5 Drum Kit you can edit these drum kits to create your own original drum kits You can also create original drum kits using sample waveforms that you sam pled on the TRITON STUDIO or loaded into sample memory RAM in Disk mode A drum kit that you edited or created can be written into one of the user drum kit memory areas 000 I A B 143 User Drum kits can also be saved to various types of media in Disk mode 144 GM 152 GM contain nine different preset drum kits that are compatible with the GM2 sound map 1 For details on the factory set drum kits refer to VNL Multisample programs and drum kit programs There are two types of programs those whose oscillator uses a multisample and those whose oscillator uses a drum kit This selection is made by the Program P1 Edit Basic Pro gram Basic page Oscillator Mode setting To use a mul tisample for the program set Oscillator Mode to Single or Double To use a drum kit set Oscillator Mode to Drums About
340. r performance on the TRITON STUDIO as well as controller and sequencer data can be sent to a computer connected via MIDI interface and the tone generator of TRITON STUDIO can be played from the computer Use a MIDI interface to connect the MIDI connectors of TRITON STUDIO to the MIDI connectors of your computer t PG p 258 MIDI applications Connecting MIDI deveices computers amp Some USB MIDI interfaces may not be able to trans mit or receive the TRITON STUDIO s MIDI exclusive messages M If the EXB mLAN option is installed MIDI messages can be exchanged via the mLAN connector between the TRITON STUDIO and an external mLAN com patible MIDI device or a FireWire capable Macintosh computer For details on connections refer to the EXB mLAN owner s manual included with the EXB mLAN option amp At present a TRITON STUDIO MIDI data dump sent via the EXB mLAN option to a computer cannot be recorded or played back by an OMS compatible application The same applies to the TRITON Rack 8 Installing options The functionality of the TRITON STUDIO can be extended by installing option boards and or sample memory The following six types of options can be installed For details on installation refer to PG p 286 e EXB MOSS DSP synthesizer board e EXB DI Digital interface board e EXB mLAN mLAN interface board e CDRW 1 CD R RW drive e EXB PCM series PCM expansion boards e DRAM SIMM Me
341. rack Play Loop i Loop Start Measure i opt i fy i 4 Quick Start ojoro E Se eae enee When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key repeated playback will begin note After you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback we recommend that you press the LOCATE key to return to the beginning of the song After recording you will automatically return to the measure at which recording began 4 Recording arpeggio patterns The performance of an arpeggio pattern can be recorded into a song With the settings of this template song the arpeggiator will function on track 4 1 In Track Select choose Track04 Guitar SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 661 61 000 Meter 4 44 J 198 gt Manu P5000 Acid Jazz gt Track 4 Guitar Reso P 2 O RPPR 2 Press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key 3 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key and play single notes or chords Verify that arpeggios are sounded in synchronization with the tempo of the drum and bass performance and rehearse your performance 4 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback Then press the LOCATE key to move the location to the beginning of the song 6 Start recording Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If you play notes on the keyboard during the count in the arpeggio will begin at the same time that recording begins and then that pattern w
342. rameters Normally you will set these in Global mode however these same settings can also be made from the other modes These settings can be made in the following pages Mode Page Sampling Sampling PO Recording Input Setup Combination Combination PO Play Sampling note Sampling can be performed in Sampling Combina tion Program and Sequencer modes Program Sequencer 2 Select the page for making Input settings As an example here s how to make settings in Sam pling mode and in Program mode e Sampling mode Press the SAMPLING key to enter Sampling mode Press the Input Setup tab to access the P0 Recording Input Setup page SAMPLING P Recording Input gt BUEN SAMPLING Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Recording Setup Source BUS L R Trigger Sampling START Sw Metronome Precount Off J 126 Resample gt Manual Input Prefe Memory Setup Jl rence Jl Status Titty ww Recording Level dB e Program mode Press the PROG key to enter Program mode Press the Sampling tab to access the P0 Play Sampling page PROGRAM P8 Play Sampling Aaa e Input gt EEE COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK 3 Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select Off Pan L GG Send1 MFX1 00 Send2 MFX2 000 Input2 Level 127 BUSCIFX Indiv Select Off Pan R127 Send1 MFX1 G88 Send
343. rd your performance 6 When you finish playing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Recording will end and the location will return to the point at which you begin recording If you press the PAUSE key instead of the SEQUENCER START STOP key recording will pause When you press the PAUSE once again recording will resume When you are finished press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop record ing e Overdub With this method the newly recorded musical data is added to the existing data When you perform overdub recording on a previously recorded track the newly recorded data will be added to the previously recorded data It is best to select this mode if you will be recording additional control data recording a drum pattern or recording the tempo in the master track With this mode data can be added without erasing the existing performance data M Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record 2 Set the Recording Mode to Over Dub pas Reco rding Setup SESS TT O CTT COT CTT EE my C Over Write C Auto Punch In Over Dub C Loop All Tracks iipti Ma poeeee Rereweye Data For the rest of the procedure refer to steps of Overwrite Manual punch in While the song is playing you can press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key or a connected pedal switch at the desired location to start or stop recording With this method the musical data previous
344. re function When you perform realtime recording step recording or track editing this function allows you to make before and after comparisons amp If you continue editing when the COMPARE key is lit the key will go dark This now becomes the musi cal data that will be selected when the COMPARE key is dark Operations for which Compare is available e Recording to a track e Track Edit All commands except for the Utility menu commands Memory Status and Rename Track of the Sequencer P5 Track Edit page e Recording to a pattern e Pattern Edit All commands except for the page menu commands Memory Status Rename Pattern FF REW Speed and Rename Track of the Pattern Sequencer P6 RPPR Pattern Edit page e Song Edit Sequencer P0 P4 and P7 P9 pages Page menu com mands Delete Song and Copy From Song Sequencer P1 Cue List page Page menu commands Convert to Song and Copy Song In general track and pattern event data can not be returned to its original state Comparing song parameters is possible only during song editing when executing a page menu command 97 Basic functions Producing songs 98 Operations for which Compare is not available e Editing song parameters e Page menu commands other than those listed above in Operations for which Compare is available Memory Protect Before you record a track or pattern or edit the musical d
345. red out Level Cutoff frequency lt gt Knob 3 EG IN TEN SITY Adjust the filter EG intensity the depth at which the filter EG is applied Rotating the knob will affect the depth of the filter EG Normally rotating the knob toward the left will make the filter EG apply less deeply and rotating it toward the right will make the filter EG apply more deeply Since the filter EG will operate based on the cutoff frequency of the filter knobs 1 and 3 will work together to control the tonal changes produced by the filter Level Time Knob 4 EG RELEASE Adjusts the release times of the filter EG and the amp EG This will determine the amount of time from note off until the sound disappears When you adjust the knob the release times of the filter EG and the amp EG will change Normally rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the release time and rotating it toward the right will lengthen the release time Level y Break Level Y Release Level Sustain Level PEES Time Decay Time Slope Time Release Time Attack Time Start Level B mode controls Using these knobs you can control parameters such as volume portamento time pan or filter and amp EG pitch LFO and master effect send levels etc The B mode function settings are made for each individ ual program combination or song In Sampling mode and Song Play mode the B mode func tions are set for the entire mode 1 p 145 Vi
346. reo Piano peeeoeseseecesesecoseoseeoseeseeoseesscoseoseeoeesssesseeseeosesogp eeeeeseesessseoeecsesosesesesecesesesesosesesosesosesseesseosesosesesessessessceseeossesse Resa Ma Ye te Timbre Assign Arpeggiator Run Arpeggiator A EEE Pat gt U4S58 User Dr Easy Rider _ Sort _ Key Sune Latch E Keyboard aeee a Select the arpeggiator s that will run Use the Arpeggiator Run check boxes to specify the arpeggiator s that you want to have running The arpeg giator s that are checked here will operate when the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is on However the arpeggiator will play a timbre only if the table displayed next to the check boxes assigns arpeggiator A or B toa T timbre 1 8 These settings are made in Combination P7 Edit Arp Setup page Arpeggiator Assign p 132 Arpeggiator A Arpeggiator B For each arpeggiator A and B you can make settings for Pat Pattern Select Reso Resolution Octave Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard p 130 31 Arpeggiator Quick Start 32 Checking the structure of a user arpeggio pattern Let s see how combination INT B097 Try Some Tekno is constructed Select combination INT B097 Try Some Tekno and look at the Arpeggio Play A page and Arpeggio Play B page COMBINATION P Play Arpeggio Play A EMEA Bank INT B Lea M097 Try Some Tekno Arpeggiator Run Puna Ma We tee e
347. rformances 6 Select the page menu command Shift Erase Note SEQUENCER P Play REC_ Program 161 65 naam A dialog box will appear If you did not specify the OG1 01 G00 eter 4i4 d 128 Ane range of measures in step set From Measure To 17 5000 INTRO Measure to specify the range that will be edited Track Lead Synth Reso Hi RPPR gt Pli Turn on the Replace radio button and set Shift So Note to 003 PG p 74 Guiard Ss Shift Erase Note in Track 62 a Di Dsl aie te a a ae Standarc Fretless Pro Dym Funkin tStereo Percussi Tsunami Espress 1G MUTE From Measure 061 To Measure 698 Beat Tick 61 000 Beat Tick 44 191 Note Range Bottom C 1 Top G9 As described in steps 1 set song S001 VERSE to Shift Note EM Replace C Create 008 8 measures making it an eight measure song Erase note Then mute all tracks other than tracks 1 3 When you play back you will hear only the drums bass and elec tric piano 6 As described in steps 1 set song S002 CHORUS to 008 8 measures making it an eight measure song Press the OK button The pitch of track 2 will be raised three semitones 6 Use the same procedure to raise the pitch three semi tones for each track on which performance data is recorded However do not change the key of track 1 which uses a drum kit amp If you change the key of a track that is using a drum kit
348. rogram To Program before executing the conver sion Sampling D As necessary press the text edit button to access the text dialog box and assign a program name Press the OK button A dialog box will ask you for conformation Press the OK button once again and the conversion will begin 9 Listen to the converted program Switch to Program mode select the program INT E100 in the above example and play the keyboard to hear the sound 41 The converted program settings will automatically be stored in the internal memory but the sample data you created will be lost when the power is turned off In order to reproduce the sound of the program after the power is turned on again you must first load the previ ously saved sample data back into the TRITON STU DIO using the Disk mode When loading it is best to set KSC Allocation to Clear When saving it is a good idea to execute Save All PG p 166 to save the samples and multisamples along with the converted program and then load all of this data together PG p 157 162 Sampling and looping a drum phrase Here s how you can sample a drum phrase or similar phrase from an audio CD and loop the playback You will need to provide a drum rhythm loop sample Ini tially it is a good idea to begin with a rhythm loop sample that has a fairly simple beat As an example we will sample one measure of a 140 BPM drum phrase in a 4 4 time sign
349. s the SAMPLING START STOP key to stop sampling 109 Basic functions Sampling settings Loop settings Using the default settings after the TRITON STUDIO is first turned on the sounds you sample will automatically be looped P0 Recording Preference page Auto Loop On On To edit the loop and other playback address settings for the sample use the P2 Loop Edit page Select the sample for which you wish to make loop settings To select the sample use the Sample Select or Index parameters of P2 Loop Edit page or of the PO Recording Recording page p 106 amp If you use Sample Select to select the sample be aware that the assignment to the index will also change 2 In the P2 Loop Edit page use the Loop check box to turn loop playback on off for the sample Looping will be turned on if the box is checked This will operate between the addresses you specify in step 8 Loop On Start gt End LoopS End LoopS End is repeated Loop Off Start gt End SAMPLING P2 Loop Edit MS 99 NewMs Start LoopS 0024952 _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 00 K3 Z00M gt End 6656606 _ Use Zero ri 24 RPM K A D gt To play the sample press the key to which the sample is assigned the key range that is highlighted in Key board amp Index is A sample waveform that was sampled with Sample Mode set to Stereo will be displayed in two levels The upper le
350. s 1 5 If you decide to cancel the Save operation press the Cancel button The dialog box of step 2 will appear Press the Can cel button again The display will ask Are you sure Press the OK button This will cancel the Save operation 7 When saving is complete you will return to the Save page When saving ends and you return to the Save page the LCD screen will show the file that was saved The data will be saved to the media and you will return to the Save page The amount of time required will depend on the amount of data If a file with the same name already exists on the floppy disk you will be asked whether you want to overwrite If you wish to overwrite press the OK but ton If you wish to save without overwriting press the Cancel button re do the operation from step and rename the data in step before saving it The LCD screen will show the files that were saved The various types of data are saved as the following files PCG file Programs combinations user drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global settings that were saved in inter nal memory SNG file Sequencer songs and cue lists KSC file A file which lists the multisamples and samples used Directory A directory containing the multisamples KMP files and samples KSF files that are listed in the KSC file Other ways to save In addition to Save All the page menu commands include a Save PCG
351. s Q and of the procedure given earlier try actually copying this to see for yourself For the arpeggiator settings of this combination refer to p 130 Taking this setting as an example determine whether cor rection is necessary and if necessary what needs to be cor rected Arpeggiator Run A and B are checked and MIDI Channel 01 and 02 are selected Corrections must be made Correction is necessary for one of the arpeggiators If you perform multi track recording with these settings the MIDI channels of T01 02 03 04 05 and 06 are the same so the low register bass T01 and T02 the high reg ister synth brass pad T03 T04 and T06 and the synth mallet played by arpeggiator B T05 will have their per formance data combined into one stream and the perfor mance will not be reproduced at playback T08 is a dummy track used to trigger arpeggiator A 1 So that the synth mallet played by arpeggiator B can be recorded separately change the MIDI channel of T05 Select the Sequencer P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch T01 08 page and change the T05 MIDI Channel to 03 2 Add settings for triggering arpeggiator B Select the Sequencer P2 Trk Param MIDI Ch T09 10 page and for track 9 or any unused track turn Sta tus Off and set the MIDI Channel to 01 T09 will be a dummy track used to trigger arpeggiator B 3 Select the Sequencer P7 Arpeggiator Setup T09 16 page Set the track 9 Assign
352. s from 15 categories For a list of the drum sample names refer to VNL D Use Velocity Sample SW Lo Hi to specify how velocity will switch between drumsamples The drumsample that sounds when you perform will depend on the velocity keyboard playing strength of the incoming note This is called velocity drumsample switching If you set this to 001 only the High Drumsample will sound t This is the same type of function as the Velocity Multi sample Switching in a program High Multisample and Low Multisample p 69 Set the parameters of the drumsamples that you assigned Set the parameters for the High Drumsample and Low Drumsample You can set parameters such as volume level Level pitch Transpose Tune and tone Cutoff Res onance For details on each parameter refer to PG p 148 9 As necessary repeat steps 4 8 to set drumsample parameters for each note number If you wish to use the settings of another KEY select the page menu command Copy Key Setup Select the Voice Mixer page in Global P5 Drum Kit GLOBAL P5 Drum Kit Yoice Mixer EEk A DrumKit gt 143 User Standard Kit 1 _ Single Trigger Exclusive Group 661 Enable Note On Receive UO Enable Note Off Receive BUS Select IF X7 Indiv Out Assign P L R Pan R084 Sendi to MFX1 908 Send2 to MFX2 617 dt Set the Exclusive Group The Exclusiv
353. s the C 2 key The assigned pattern will play Take your finger off the C 2 key and press the D2 key The pattern will change and playback will begin At this time the pattern operation will depend on the Sync and Mode setting Set KEY to C 2 and set Sync to Measure Make the same setting for D2 Now press the notes consecutively Notice that the patterns operate in a different way With the Measure setting patterns will be handled in one measure units The second and subsequent pat terns will start in sync with the end of previously played pattern If you change the Mode setting to Once the entire pattern will playback to the end even if you release your finger from the keyboard immedi ately E To stop playback either press the same key once again or press the C2 or lower key For details on Sync Mode and Shift refer to PG p 80 The assigned keys will be shown as a keyboard graphic in the LCD screen note Unassigned keys can be used for normal keyboard performance Use Track Select to select the track that will be played from the keyboard For example you might assign backing patterns such as drums and bass to the C 2 B2 keys and use these keys to control pattern playback and use keys C3 and above to play solos in realtime It is a good idea to keep the assigned keys together in this way RPPR Setup KEYRA J assign i Mode Manua Shift 00
354. s timbres in a combination then these keys will select the program bank In this case the LED of the program bank selected for the timbre will light In Sequencer and Song Play modes when the edit cell highlighted area is located at the program of each track these keys select the program bank just as in Combination mode If you repeatedly press the INT G key when selecting a program the bank selection will cycle through all of the GM 2 banks and drum banks in the order of G g 1 g 2 2 8 2 9 g d G each time you press the key The INT F bank can be selected in Program mode only if the EXB MOSS option is installed 13 SEQUENCER SEQUENCER PAUSE lt lt REW FF gt gt CIC ot LOCATE REC WRITE START STOP PAUSE key In Sequencer mode this key pauses the playback of the song or cue list In Song Play mode this key pauses SMF playback When paused the LED will light Press PAUSE once again to resume playback the LED will turn off lt lt REW key In Sequencer mode this key will rewind the song or cue list When you press and hold this key the LED will light and the playback will rewind This key will not function during recording FF gt gt key In Sequencer mode this key will fast forward the song or cue list When you press and hold this key the LED will light and the playback will fast forward This key will not function during recording LO CATE key In Sequen
355. s whenever you have created something that you like Types of media that can be used Floppy disks You can use MS DOS format 3 5 inch 2HD and 2DD floppy disks The formatted capacity of a floppy disk is 1 44 MB for a 2HD disk 18 sectors track and 720 KB for a 2DD disk 9 sectors track Internal hard drive This supports MS DOS format FAT16 and FAT32 CDRW 1 option CD R RW This supports UDF format UDF format CD R RW discs can be written or read Packet writing is supported PG p 299 You can also record play CD DA audio CD and load ISO 9660 level 1 format data External SCSI storage media Data can be stored on external SCSI storage media such as a hard disk MO Zip JAZ or ORB disk For details on CD R RW refer to the above CDRW 1 option CD R RW WA When you insert media for the first time after turning on the power or when you exchange disks touch the LCD screen so that the TRITON STUDIO will detect the media When the media has been detected the LCD screen will display information for that media es If two or more media are detected use Drive select to switch between media Saving data P i Basic functions 59 60 Formatting media You can format a floppy disk the internal hard drive external SCSI media or CD R RW media Newly purchased media or media that has been used by another device cannot be immediately used by the TRI TON STUDIO In order to use such media on
356. s will be incorrect amp The effects will sound using the settings of the last selected program amp When you edit a drum kit all programs that use that drum kit will be affected 2 Access the Sample Setup page of Global P5 Drum Kit GLOBAL P5 Drum Kit Sample Setup A Drumkit 143 User Standard Kit 1 Key High Drumsample Bank High Drumsample Low Drumsample Bank Low Drumsample Cutoff 00 Resonance 00 Attack Decay 00 k Setup Jl Mizer In Drum Kit select the drum kit that you wish to edit If necessary use the page menu command Copy Drum Kit to copy settings from a preload drum kit or a GM drum kit amp GM drum kits 144 GM 152 GM cannot be selected here It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum kits 144 GM 152 GM you can use Copy Drum Kit to copy it to 000 I A B 143 User and then edit the copy 4 Use Key to select the note number that you wish to edit The drum sample parameters for the selected note number will be displayed in the High Drumsample Low Drumsample and Voice Mixer pages To select a note number you can use the VALUE con trollers or you can hold down the ENTER key and press a note on the keyboard 6 Use the Assign check box to specify whether a drum sample will be assigned to the note number If this is checked a drum sample wil
357. sed In Program Combination and Sequencer modes the master effects can also be used Sampling can be initiated by the SAMPLING START STOP key note on threshold or the SEQUENCER START STOP key The available methods will depend on the mode Threshold allows you to initiate sampling when the input signal exceeds the threshold level you specify In Sampling mode you can also specify a pre trigger setting The analog audio inputs support mic and line level signals Digital audio input via S P DIF IN supports 48 kHz or 96 kHz sampling rates Digital audio input via mLAN when the EXB mLAN option is installed supports a sampling rate of 48 kHz Audio data can be sampled from an audio CD inserted in the CDRW 1 option or a SCSI connected external CD R RW drive Sampling in the digital domain from a CD ripping can also be performed Sampled data can be converted automatically or manually using an easy operation into a program and used with the TRITON STUDIO s HI synthesis system In Sampling mode use Convert MS To Program In Program Combination or Sequencer mode use Select Bank amp Smp No Once a multisample sample has been converted into a program you can make filter amp and effect settings and play it as a program Such a program can also be used in Combination mode or Sequencer mode Samples you record can also be used as drum samples in a drum kit Sampling in Program Combination and Seq
358. select the WAVE file that you want to add to the list If you want to audition the file you can press the SAM PLING START STOP key to play back the sample amp If you have selected a WAVE file of a sampling fre quency other than 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz it will not be possible to press the Insert button amp WAVE files at a sampling frequency of 48 kHz will be converted to 44 1 kHz when they are written to an audio CD when you execute Write to CD 118 To add the file press the Insert button You can continue adding files until you press the Exit button The files will be added to the track list in the order in which you selected them If you want to add all the WAVE files in the directory press the Insert All button When you have finished adding files to the list press the Exit button to close the dialog box Notice that the WAVE files have been added to the track list Make Audio CD EEk 536M 44100Hz i 371M 44100Hz SONGOOOZ WAV 317M 44100Hz ses End P COD Blank Disc D Sampling START plays selected file puat ie In this page as well you can select a WAVE file and press the SAMPLING START STOP key to play back the sample To add other WAVE files to the track list press the Insert button once again If you want to add another track select the WAVE file that follows the track you want to add If you want to add the track to the end of the track list se
359. set Arpeggio Pattern PO 4 User Arpeggio Pattern U00 231 Ripping 9 Arpeggiator B Write Audio CD DISK MODE SEQUENCER SONG PLAY y TRACK 1 PROGRAM TRACK9 PROGRAM Insert Master Effect IFX1 MFX 1 TRACK 2 PROGRAM TRACK 10 PROGRAM C C iFx2 _ MFX2 a TE TRACK 3 mosmi TRACK 11 proce iFx3 _ TRACK 4 pRocRAM TRACK 12 PROGRAM IFX 4 i TRACK 5 PROGRAM TRACK 13 PROGRAM ao CESEN aA TRACK6 PROGRAM TRACK 14 PROGRAM Arpeggiator A TRACK 7 PROGRAM TRACK 15 PROGRAM ETE i m Arpeggiator B TRACK 8 PROGRAM TRACK 16 PROGRAM EEE Resampling Connections Basics 14 Sequencer mode Use the 16 track sequencer to record and playback songs Sample or resample You can sample an external input source while listen ing to the song play back You can also cause a corre sponding note event to automatically be created at this time allowing you to sample an external source just as if you were recording an audio track The In Track Sampling function The playback of a song can also be resampled After resampling one or more songs to the hard disk you can use Disk mode to create an audio CD from those songs Make effect settings for the song You can record a performance that uses the arpeggiator s into a song or pattern You can use a c
360. settings Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres Each timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been assigned to it 6 Make Arpeggiator Run settings Check the arpeggiator s that you want to operate The arpeggiator s checked here will run when the ARPEG GIATOR ON OFF key is turned on With the settings shown in the LCD screen for steps and 3 turning the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key on will cause arpeggiator A to operate for timbres 1 and 2 and arpeggiator B to operate for timbre 3 When the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is turned off timbres 1 4 will sound as a layer If all timbres Assign are Off or if Arpeggiator Run A or B is unchecked the arpeggiator will not function D In the Arpeggiator A and Arpeggiator B pages set the parameters for arpeggiators A and B The parameters for A and B are the same as for a pro gram p 130 In the Scan Zone A B page specify the range in which arpeggiators A and B will operate The parameters for A and B are the same as for a pro gram p 130 You can use keyboard ranges or playing velocity to operate the arpeggiator or to switch between arpeggia tors A and B By using the Combination P4 Edit Zone Ctrl Key Zone page and Vel Zone page to set key board ranges and velocity ranges in conjunction with each other you can create even more variations 9 If you wish to save the edited combination settings in internal memory turn off me
361. so in an efficient way You can also use this as a jukebox function that will play back completed songs in the order you specify Cue List Step Song 01 S000 Intro intro Intro A A B Chorus Chorus A A B Chorus Chorus 03 s002 B 04 S003 Chorus 02 07 S003 Chorus 02 08 S001 A Solo 01 09 S003 Chorus 03 S004 Ending 02 Each unit in a cue list is called a step and each step con tains a song number and the number of repeats Here we will use a cue list to combine the previously cre ated songs S000 INTRO S001 VERSE and S002 CHO RUS 1 Select Sequencer P1 Cue List With the default settings song S000 will be selected for Step 01 and End will be selected for Step 02 SEQUENCER P1 Cue List 9001 61 G68 Meter 44 J 120 icoo NEW CUELIST 00 P Trackas Lead Synth I 4124 Espress Lead bat maag saga INTRO paz imaaes P End bas D gt a4 bas 2 Add a song to the Step area Select the Song for Step 02 and press the Insert but ton A song will be added to step 02 Use the VALUE controller to select S001 VERSE In the same way select the Step 03 Song and press the Insert button to add a song to Step 03 Set this to S002 CHORUS If you press Cut button the selected step will be deleted If you press the Insert button key the deleted step will be inserted If yo
362. sts of Steps and Tones e Step A user arpeggio pattern can have a maximum of 48 steps The arpeggiator will play from the first step in steps equal to the timing value specified by Resolution The vertical lines of the grid shown in the center of the LCD screen indicate the steps Use Step No to select the step For each step specify Pitch Offset Gate Velocity and Flam e Tone At each step a chord consisting of up to 12 tones Tone No 00 11 can be sounded To input tones select Step No and then use numeric keys 0 9 and 10 s HOLD to input tones The Tone No corresponds to the 0 9 and 10 s HOLD keys as shown below Each time you press a 0 9 or HOLD key the corresponding tone will be turned on off The horizontal lines of the grid shown in the center of the LCD screen indicate the tones Tone00 09 0 9 keys Tone10 key Tone11 10 s HOLD key Tone No Length 8 Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key 2 Set Step No to 02 and press the 1 key 3 Set Step No to 03 and press the 2 key 4 Set Step No to 04 and press the 1 key 6 Set Step No to 05 and press the 3 key 6 Set Step No to 06 and press the 1 key T Set Step No to 07 and press the 2 key Set Step No to 08 and press the 1 key ded d d 3
363. t AUDIO OUTPUT i AUX OUT etc 8 Installing options EXB mLAN Option ASSIGNABLE Power Switch SWITCH DAMPER PEDAL oi m al Cm o m U gt Cc oO 2 ge Cc pur pw f ECTO ORO i i MAN STUDIO MUSIC WORKSTATION SAMPLER o TRITON S INDIVIDUAL t B ADO OUTPUT AC power supply MIDI OUT a S P DIF 4 SCSI AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL MAIN OUT MAIN IN 4 3 2 1 R LIMONO 1 Connecting the power cable i i i i i EXB DI o Power cable Option Option to an AC outlet Hard disk Removable disk CD R RW etc 7 Connections to I devi nnection MIDI equipment computers aie E 6 SCSI device connections Bc of ana E ce DIGITAL OUT MIDI cable INPUT 4 Digital audio input output connections PEE A 2 pu outp 2 Analog audio output Mixer connections PTN i MIDI IN i ITO Monitor KORG OUTPUT Powered monitors INPUT etc T PO pO 10 1 Connecting the power cable
364. t PLAY MUTE REC to PLAY or MUTE for all tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 which we will be recording Make sure that Track Select is set to Track02 Bass Your keyboard playing on keys not assigned to the RPPR function can be recorded on the track specified by Track Select SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 R A 001 01 00O Meter 4 4 J aga P Man OjS004 Hip Hop Rap P Tracka2 Bass Reso P Hi V wala Multi REC BUS Output Select Di Sji Ai A a pis ji A fiet Ki Dark R amp E R amp B E PiiFu Dark Jaz Arco Stri setor Li Techno Make sure that the RPPR check box is checked 6 Press the LOCATE key to set the location to 001 01 000 D Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Press a key that plays an RPPR pattern and one or more keys that play the arpeggiator If you press a key during the pre count before record ing the pattern playback and arpeggio performance will begin simultaneously when recording begins and will be recorded Record the RPPR pattern playback and arpeggio per formance amp When recording the playback of patterns triggered by RPPR the timing of the recorded events may be slightly skewed If this occurs try setting Reso Realtime Quantize Resolution to a setting other than Hi When you are finished performing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Recording will end and the s
365. t ting will be ignored and the LFO will synchronize to the tempo of the sequencer and arpeggiator This lets you pro duce vibrato wah auto pan or tremolo effects that are synchronized to the playback speed of the sequencer or arpeggiator Arpeggiator settings P7 Edit Arpeggiator Here you can make arpeggiator settings p 130 Insert Effect settings P8 Edit Insert Effect Here you can select insert effects and make settings for them You can also specify the oscillator routing the sig nal sent to the insert effects master effects and indepen dent outputs p 140 Master Effect settings P9 Edit Master Effect Here you can select master effects and make settings for them The master EQ is also set here p 141 More about Alternate Modulation Alternate Modulation is a type of modulation that can be used to control various aspects of the sound AMS Alternate Modulation Source refers to any of the numerous sources that can provide alternate modulation and includes controllers that you operate physically such as the joystick and realtime controllers incoming MIDI data as well as modulators such as the EG or LFO Since TRITON STUDIO allows you to apply modulation to a modulator this type of control is referred to as alter nate modulation Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree speed or depth to which AMS will control alternate modulation Combinations of modulations that are frequently use
366. t a high volume the instant you play the note and then decreases gradually The volume of an organ note remains constant as long as you continue pressing the key The volume of a note on a violin or wind instrument can be varied during the note by the musician i e by regulating the amount of pressure on the bow or the force of the breath Volume Piano Volume Organ Volume remains constant Volume decays gradually until note is released Time Time Amp1 Level Pan page PROGRAM P4 Edit Amp Amp Level Amp1 Level Pan i Amp Level ee AMS D Note Number Intensity 00 Ampi Ampi Amp 1 Amp2 Amp2 Amp2 Mod EG vi Pa Mod EG Amp Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Pan Specifies the pan stereo position after the signal has passed through the oscillator filter and amp Normally you will set this to C064 If Oscillator Mode is Double and you wish to create a sense of stereo set the Amp1 Level Pan page and Amp2 Level Pan page parameter Pan to left and right for oscillators 1 and 2 respectively With a setting of Random the pan will change randomly each time you play a note on TRITON STUDIO produc ing an interesting effect AMS Pan AMS Intensity Intensity specifies the depth of the panning effect that will occur when AMS Pan AMS is in use If you set AMS Pan AMS to Note Number the pan will change accor
367. t to audition the drum sounds from the keyboard and then input Fixed Note No by holding down the ENTER key and playing the desired key Input the kick Tone00 Set Step No to 01 and press the 0 key Then set Step No to 05 and press the 0 key Input the snare Tone01 Set Step No to 03 and press the 1 key Then set Step No to 07 and press the 1 key 7 Input the closed hi hat Tone02 Set Step No to 01 02 03 05 06 and 07 and press the 2 key for each Input the open hi hat Tone03 Set Step No to 04 and press the 3 key Then set Step No to 08 and press the 3 key If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger All Tones play ing a single note on the keyboard will cause the rhythm pattern to play If Fixed Note Mode is set to Trigger As Played play ing a single note on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 to play Playing two notes on the keyboard will cause only the kick Tone00 and snare Tone01 to play In this way the number of keys that you play will be played by the same number of tones 9 Set the parameters for each step Use Velocity etc to add accents to the rhythm pat tern amp The Gate and Velocity settings you make here will be valid if the Gate and Velocity parameters Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page of the program selected in Program mode are s
368. ta e g a drum fill in in that track you will need to expand the pattern into actual performance data Use the page menu command Repeat Mea sure P5 Edit Track Edit page to specify the number of playback repetitions and expand the pattern as playback data In the sample illustration below per formance data will be created to play measures 1 8 of track 1 for four times i e 32 measures Repeat Measure of Track 81 From Measure 1 To End of Measure 668 O All Tracks Times HEI 3 Recording the bass track If playback is occurring press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback Press the LOCATE key to return to the beginning of the song The location will indicate 001 01 000 2 Press the EXIT key and then press the Prog 1 8 tab to access the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page 3 Use Track Select to select the track that you want to record In this example select Track02 Bass SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 63 A 001 01 00O Meter 4 74 J 108 gt Maw gt S 000 Acid Jazz Reso Hi O RPPR Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback and practice playing the phrase that you want to record When you are finished rehearsing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback Press the LOCATE key WA When the power is turned on the Recording Setup of the TRITON STUDIO will be set to Over Write recording in which newly recorded data will b
369. te the pitch a vibrato effect LFO 1 2 Intensity sets the depth to which the LFO spec ified in P5 Edit Common LFO will affect the pitch With a setting of 12 00 vibrato will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change JS Y Int specifies the amount of vibrato that the LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed away from your self Intensity AMS Intensity specifies the depth of vibrato that will be applied by the LFO when an AMS Alternate Modulation Source is used For example if AMS LFO1 AMS is set to After Touch and you set an appropriate value for Intensity AMS Intensity vibrato will be applied when you apply pressure to the keyboard or when MIDI aftertouch messages are received Pitch EG page Here you can adjust the settings for the pitch EG When you wish to create sound effects etc set the pitch EG to make major changes in pitch over time To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch that occurs when a string is plucked or at the attack of a brass or vocal sound you can use the EG to create a subtle change in pitch at the attack PG p 12 EG and LFO By using an EG envelope generator to apply time vary ing change or by using an LFO Low Frequency Oscilla tor to apply cyclic change to pitch filter or amp you can create changes in the pitch tone or volume EG Envelope Generator TRITON STUDIO provides a Pitch EG Filter EG and Amplifier EG w
370. te the program amp p 57 Linking the arpeggiator to a program If you want the arpeggiator settings written in a program to be selected when that program is selected check Pro gram for Auto Arpeggiator Global P0 Basic Setup Basic page 131 Basic functions Arpeggiator settings Arpeggiator settings in Combina tion and Sequencer modes In Combination Sequencer and Song Play modes the TRITON STUDIO provides dual arpeggiator functionality that lets you use two arpeggio patterns simultaneously The settings in each of these modes are made in the simi lar way As an example the following explanation shows how to make settings in Combination mode For a detailed expla nation and example settings PG p 45 81 129 The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the follow ing things e Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre Choose from Off arpeggiator A or arpeggiator B step e Independently specify whether A and B will operate t step e Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters independently for A and B step e Make Scan Zone page settings so that you can use keyboard range or playing velocity to switch between normal playing and arpeggiated playing or to switch between arpeggiators A and B t step s e Make settings for timbres that will be silent when the arpeggiator is Off and will sound only when the arpeggiator is On t step 0d Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the AR
371. ternal audio source For example you can sample an external audio source while listening to the performance of the arpeggiator while listening to the performance of the arpeggiators or resample a performance you play using a program or resample a performance you play using a combina e Edit a program tion Make settings for the oscillator filter amp EG LFO e Edit a combination effects and arpeggiator Make settings for volume pan layer split etc for each timbre program and make settings for effects and the two arpeggiators SAMPLING MODE S P DIF IN S P DIF IN L R mLAN IN mLAN IN 1 2 PROGRAM Multisample H Insert Master Effect i i Drum Kit Cixi C mFxi Insert Effect A Multisample L IFX 1 IFX 4 i E IFX2__ __IFX5_ i Fx3 _ IFx4 MEQ IFX 3 z IFX 5 Multisample H Multisample L Arpeggiator Prrcnz fure rai AMP2 COMBINATION eee PROGRAM Insert Master Effect CiFx1 _MFX1_ TIMBRE 2 PROGRAM IFX 2 MFX2_ TIMBRE3 PROGRAM IFX 3 TIMBRE4 PROGRAM IFEX 4 MEQ TIMBRE5 PROGRAM re TIMBRE6 PROGRAM Arpeggiator A TIMBRE7 PROGRAM TIMBRE8 PROGRAM GLOBAL MODE DRUM KIT _ _ ee ee ee Key Assion Drumsample Sample H Drumsample Sample L Analog Audio ARPEGGIATOR PATTERN Pre
372. tes e 16 Mbytes of RAM is standard expandable to a maximum of 96 Mbytes Samples or multisamples that you sampled or resampled in Sampling mode or other modes or that you loaded in Disk mode can be used as sound sources e The sampling frequency is 48 kHz and the maximum polyphony is 60 voices a maximum of 120 voices can be used depending on the PCM sounds you use p 15 Filter synthesis section e Either a 24 dB oct Resonant Low Pass or a 12 dB oct Low Pass amp High Pass type filter can be used A wide variety of filter effects can be achieved from active sounds with aggressive resonance to subtle tones using a high pass filter e A broad range of editing parameters gives you precise control over every aspect of the sound Effect section e Five insert effects stereo in stereo out two master effects mono in stereo out and a three band master EQ stereo in stereo out can all be used simultaneously You can select and edit any of 102 types of effect algorithms e The effect routing is highly flexible Effects can be routed freely to the individual inputs and outputs Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic Modula tion e The synthesis section filter etc provides Alternate Modulation capabilities and the effect section provides Effect Dynamic Modulation This allows you to freely apply modulation to parameters that affect the pitch filter amp EG LFO and effects etc e LFO delay time and other effect
373. that features the HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system as its tone generator It provides high quality preset multisamples programs combinations and an effect section and functions such as sampling sequencer song play dual polyphonic arpeg giator RPPR six audio outputs and can support up to six audio inputs A rich array of controllers such as the joystick ribbon con troller assignable switches SW1 amp SW2 assignable preset knobs REALTIME CONTROLS 1 4 ARPEG GIATOR TEMPO GATE VELOCITY knobs and a variety of optional pedals can be used to modify the sound while you play You can further expand the potential of the TRITON STU DIO by installing options such as a MOSS tone generator PCM expansion boards additional sampling memory ADAT digital output mLAN interface board and a CD R RW drive PG p 286 The TRITON STUDIO music workstation is a powerful tool for music production or live performance HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system The HI Hyper Integrated synthesis system is a PCM tone generator system with full digital signal processing that guarantees pristine sound and featuring enormous flexi bility in musical expression modulation and effect rout ing Tone generator section e 48 Mbytes of preset PCM ROM contains 429 multisamples and 417 drumsamples By installing optional EXB PCM series PCM expansion boards 16 Mbytes PCM ROM you can expand the PCM data to a maximum of 112 Mby
374. that use sampled waveforms and multisamples that you sampled on the TRITON STUDIO or loaded into the internal sam ple memory RAM in Disk mode WA You can perform sampling resampling in Program mode p 45 You can also apply the TRITON STU DIO s effects to an external audio input for a wide range of possibilities p 143 note All transmission and reception of MIDI data in Pro gram mode is performed on the global MIDI channel The global MIDI channel is set in Global P1 MIDI MIDI Channel How a program is organized A program consists of the many parameters of P1 Edit Basic P9 Edit Master Effect The diagram below shows the structure of a program Program Basic P1 1 OSC1 LFO1 P5 1 OSC1 LFO2 P5 2 OSC Basic P1 2 3 Filter1 A B P3 1 Amp1 Level Pan P4 1 OSC1 Pitch Mod P2 if Filter1 Mod P3 2 t Amp1 Mod P4 2 Filter1 LFO Mod P3 3 Filter1 EG P3 4 Amp1 EG P4 3 Pitch EG P2 3 Basic program editing You can edit the preloaded programs banks INT A INT D that the TRITON STUDIO is shipped with or you can start with an initialized program banks INT E EXB A EXB G to create an original program The P1 Edit Basic P5 Edit Common LFO parame ters which are set independently for oscillators 1 and 2 can be copied usin
375. the EXB PCM series and EXB MOSS options The floppy disk included with each EXB PCM series option and the EXB MOSS option contains PCG files and SNG files that match the bank structure of the TRITON TRITONpro TRITONprox As of March 2002 EXB PCM series EXB PCM01 05 In each disk C_BANK PCG SNG and D_BANK PCG SNG contain the same data but use different banks EXB PCM08 The data contained on the EXB PCM08 is already included in the TRITON STUDIO s Piano PCM ROM EXB PCM06 07 C_BANK PCG and D_BANK PCG contain different pro grams combinations drum kits and arpeggio patterns When loading these TRITON TRITONpro TRITONproxX format files from the EXB PCM series disks into the TRI TON STUDIO you should load bank I C of C BANK PCG or bank I D of D_BANK PCG and not load banks I A and I B We also recommend that you select EXB A EXB G as the bank into which this data will be loaded Here is an example of how various files from the floppy disks included with the EXB PCM0O1 07 can be loaded into banks EXB A EXB G of the TRITON STUDIO EXB PCMO1 1 file for bank C gt load to bank EXB A EXB PCM02 file for bank C gt load to bank EXB B EXB PCMO03 file for bank C load to bank EXB C EXB PCMO04 file for bank C load to bank EXB D EXB PCM05 file for bank C load to bank EXB E EXB PCM06 07 file for bank C gt load to bank EXB F EXB PCM06 07 file for bank D gt load to bank EXB G Loading data W
376. the TRITON STUDIO s internal memory will be overwritten by the data from the PCG file programs combinations drum kits user arpeggio patterns and global set tings If you want to keep the data that is currently in internal memory you must first use Save All or Save PCG to save the current data 4 Insert the TNSFD 00P floppy disk into the TRI TON STUDIO s floppy disk drive amp For details on floppy disk handling please be sure to read Cautions when handling floppy disks p 62 E ae ae Q fe a D 3 AKAI format 1 program bank I A I F E A E G E program file ag 1 combination 2 MID fi i AKAI format sample file E 2 Q 3 a E 1 user arpeggio pattern Loading data Saving data P i Basic functions Track EJ 1 user pattern 00 99 D e 63 64 2 Enter Disk mode and touch the LCD screen to make the TRITON STUDIO detect the disk frm PRELC I4D PCG 48K 16 16 2661 12 00 00 DJF TNSFD 0 P Save Utility Make Gapi Media AudiolD pudiotD Info 3 Press the Load tab to access the Load page The LCD screen will display file information 4 Use Drive select to select the FDD 5 Select the PRELOAD PCG file The selected file will be highlighted 6 Select the page menu command Load Selected A dialog box will appear Load PRELOAD PCG UO Load PRELOAD SNG too _ Load PRELOAD KSC too
377. the TRITON STUDIO you must first format it For the formatting procedure refer to Format PG p 170 amp The internal hard drive has already been formatted when it is shipped from the factory amp It is not necessary to format a CD R RW disc that you will use to create an audio CD amp Media must be formatted by the TRITON STUDIO It may not be possible to recognize media that was for matted on a device other than the TRITON STUDIO How to save data As an example we will explain how to save the following data e Internal memory programs combinations global settings user drum kits user arpeggio patterns e Songs cue lists e Multisamples and samples created in Sampling mode etc amp If you are saving this data on floppy disk more than one disk may be necessary Prepare the media on which you want to save the data If you want to save data on a floppy disk insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the TRITON STUDIO For details on handling floppy disks please be sure to read Cautions when handling floppy disks p 62 If you want to use the CDRW 1 option to save data on a CD R RW disc insert a CD R RW disc into the drive For details on handling CD R RW discs please be sure to read Cautions when handling CD R RW discs If you will be using the disc to save data it must be for matted PG p 170 295 If you want to save data on external media such as a SCSI conne
378. the edited settings into internal memory you must write them Use the Global mode page menu command Write Global Settings Program Combination PO Play Sampling page Global PO Basic Setup Input Sampling page ZB Input related settings are shared between all of the above modes For each input source that you select in Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK a rout ing can be specified independently If desired you may input simultaneously from all input sources amp If you want to make these settings in Global mode move to Global mode from the mode other than Sampling mode in which you will be inputting the external audio signals If you move from Sampling mode to Global mode the Input SAMPLING settings of Sampling mode will be maintained and it will not be possible to view the settings of this page These settings are ignored in Sampling mode Audio input settings for Sampling mode are made in a simi lar way in Sampling PO Recording Input Setup page Input SAMPLING amp When you apply effects to external input signals from the AUDIO IN 1 2 S P DIF IN and mLAN inputs oscillation may be heard depending on the type of effect and the parameter settings of the effect If this occurs adjust the input level output level and effect parameters Particular care should be taken when using high gain effects 2 Set the parameters for Input and 2 Input1 and 2 correspond to the following inpu
379. then press the Preference button to move to the P0 Play REC Preference page 2 Set the Recording Mode to Over Dub Over Dub allows you to add to a previously recorded track SEQUENCER P Play REC 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 J 108 Ph Maw CS000 Acid Jazz P TrackG8 Lead Synth Reso b Hi _ RPPR O Over Write O Auto Punch In Over Dub C Loop All Tracks igi Magi C Manual Punch In Rs _ Mutti REC Metronome Setup Sound Only REC BUS Output Select L R Level 127 Precount Measure 2_ k_1 3 3 16 1 3 3 16 1 3 3 16 rence J 3 For Track Select make sure that Track08 Lead Synth is selected Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to start playback and operate the realtime controllers and joy stick to rehearse When you are finished rehearsing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop Press the LOCATE key 4 Start recording Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key and then press the SEQUENCER START STOP key After a two measure count in recording will begin Operate the LFO CUTOFF or RESONANCE HPF real time controllers or the joystick Y axis to record their movements When you are finished performing press the SEQUENCER START STOP key If you make a mistake or want to re record press the COMPARE key to execute the Compare function and then re record Preference i Recording the drum part In this explanation we used the TRITON STUDIO s bu
380. tings specify the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when MIDI pitch bend messages are received or when the joystick is moved to left or right A setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave upward a setting of 12 allows the pitch to be controlled a maximum of one octave downward Ribbon specifies the amount of pitch change in semi tones that will occur when MIDI control change CC 16 messages are received or when the ribbon controller of a TRITON STUDIO or other MIDI connected instrument is moved to left or right With a setting of 12 the pitch will be raised one octave at the far right of the ribbon control ler and will be lowered by one octave at the far left of the ribbon controller Pitch EG When the Intensity value is set to 12 00 the pitch EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a maximum of 1 octave of pitch change Portamento If Enable is checked portamento will be applied Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly when you play the next note before releasing the previous note The Time parameter specifies the portamento time As this value is increased the pitch will change over a longer time With a value of 000 there will be no portamento WA If Porta SW CC 65 is assigned as the function of SW1 or SW2 key the portamento effect can be switched on off by SW1 or SW2 key LFO 1 2 An LFO can be used to cyclically modula
381. to B This will produce the following settings Pack Tor r02 703 4 05 Toe T07 Toe T00 Peson on for ow or Je or a a te Staus ir inr int nT NT NT WT Ow OM fmioich or or or or os or oe or or This completes the corrections In the Sequencer P0 Play REC Preference page set Track Select to any track whose MIDI channel is 01 Check the Multi REC check box and perform multi track recording Caution and other functions in Sequencer mode TRITON STUDIO song data and its compat bility The following two types of song data can be loaded from Media into TRITON STUDIO s sequencer e Song data saved in TRITON STUDIO s own format This data is only for this instrument However it is partially compatible with the TRITON TRITONpro TRITONproX TRITON Rack Multi PG p 279 It cannot be loaded into other instru ments Since the performance will be faithfully reproduced including detailed settings of this instrument you should use this format to save song data that is intended for playback on this instrument e Standard MIDI Files This format is not able to provide a totally faithful reproduction of the performance on TRITON STUDIO in the way that TRITON STUDIO s own format does although there will be no problem for normal play back but does provide compatibility with other SMF compatible devices To load or save song data etc use Disk mode p 59 63 PG p 155 The Compa
382. to L R If you wish to send the sound that has passed through the insert effects to AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1 4 select 1 4 1 2 or 3 4 Send 1 Send 2 Sets the send levels to the master effects For this example set this to 127 9 Select the IFX1 5 pages and set the parameters for each of the selected effects For details on the parameters of each effect PG p 187 Master effects The input levels to the master effects are set by the Send 1 2 levels step or If Send 1 2 are zero the mas ter effects will not apply Send 1 corresponds to MFX1 and Send 2 corresponds to MFX2 In Program P9 Edit Master Effect select the Master FX page PROGRAM P9 Edit Master Effect Master FX IME MFX1 gt 16 Stereo Chorus i ond Chain Direction Db MFxiomrx2 di In MFX1 and MFX2 select the type of each master effect The procedure is the same as when selecting an inser tion effect amp The master effects cannot use double size effects amp The master effects are mono in stereo out Even if a stereo input effect is selected it will function as mono input 2 Press the ON OFF button to turn on the master effect Each time you press the button the master effect will be switched on off When OFF the output of the mas ter effect will be muted 3 Use Return 1 and Return 2 to adjust the output levels of the
383. to PG p 286 For details on SCSI connections refer to PG p 298 If you are using a SCSI connected CD ROM or CD R RW drive use audio cables to connect the audio outputs of the drive to the TRITON STUDIO s AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 Ripping digital data from an audio CD asa sample Here s how digital data from an audio CD track can be captured as a sample Insert an audio CD into the CDRW 1 option or a SCSI connected CD ROM or CD R RW drive 2 In the Sampling mode P0 Recording Input Setup page make Input settings so that you can monitor the audio that you want to rip Input Analog Input1 BUS IFX Indiv L R Level 127 Pan L000 Input2 BUS IFX Indiv L R Level 127 Pan R127 8 Ripping will not be affected by these inputs 3 Access the Sampling mode P5 Audio CD Ripping page 4 In Drive drive select select the drive that contains the audio CD and use Track to select the track that you want to rip Raise the Volume SAMPLING P5 Audio CD Drive P CDD Audio CD Ripping B Track 91 83 00 0 index gt 91 01 00 0 Sequencer START plays selected track Range Start Range End Duration 108 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to play back the audio CD track 6 During playback press the ENTER key at the points where you want ripping to begin and end This will set Range Start and Range End If
384. to automatically play sound effects or spoken samples Index002 Top Key AMMAN Index 001 Index001 Top Key Index003 Top Key Index004 Top Key Index 002 Index 003 Index 004 0000 0001 0002 0003 Sample A Sample B Sample C Sample D Multisample Program OSC Single Double Sample ___ DrumKit Program OSC Drums RAM SIMM memory 16 MB expandable to 64 MB Digital analog AUDIO OUTPUT convertor jack Digital signal Analog signal Floppy disk Internal hard disk CDRW 1 SCSI media Disk mode RAM internal memory WAVE File 101 Basic functions Sampling settings Preparations for sampling amp The multisample and sample data in the sample memory RAM is not backed up when the power is turned off If you wish to keep this data you must save it onto a floppy disk internal hard drive or external SCSI device before turning off the power When the power is first turned on memory will not contain any multisample or sample data You must first load previously saved data before you can play back or edit any sample data p 37 1 Connecting an input device and making Input settings Connecting an input device Here s how to connect an external audio source On the TRITON STUDIO you can input audio signals from the AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks the S P DIF IN jack or the mLAN jack if the EXB mLAN opti
385. tor units LFO1 and LFO2 You are free to select the type of each LFO and set its speed The depth of the LFO1 and LFO2 that you specify here is adjusted by the settings of the P2 Edit Pitch P3 Edit Fil ter and P4 Edit Amp pages PROGRAM P5 Edit Common LFO OSC1 LFO1 MERZ OSC1 LFO1 Waveform Triangle Frequency 70 Delay 6 amp 6 Key Sync Fade Le Offset 66 Frequency Modulation AMS1 Note Number AMS2 p uS cc at Intensity 00 Intensity 00 Frequency MIDI 7Tempo Sync _ MIDI Tempo Syne Base Note p 4 Times 81 osci Osct1 Osct2 Oste k LFOL LFO2 LFO1 Jl LFO2 OSC1 LFO1 OSC1 LFO2 OSC2 LFO1 OSC2 LFO2 Waveform selects the type of LFO You can choose from a variety of waveforms including standard waveforms such as Triangle Saw Square and Sine as well as Step or Random PG waveforms that produce a sample and hold effect PG p 25 You can create a wide variety of effects by adjusting the Offset Fade and Delay settings and by changing the sign of the Intensity setting in the P2 Edit Pitch P3 Edit Filter and P4 Edit Amp pages Fre quency specifies the speed of the LFO Frequency Modulation AMS can be used to vary the LFO speed This lets you change the LFO speed by operating a controller or by the EG or Keyboard Track settings Frequency MIDI Tempo Sync If MIDI Tempo Sync is checked the Frequency se
386. ts Analog AUDIO INPUT 1 Input1 2 Input2 Input1 Input2 S P DIF S P DIF Lch Rch mLAN mLAN 1 Input1 Input2 2 Inputt Input2 Level Sets the level of the input signal that you selected in Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK Normally you will set this to 127 If the sound is distorted even though you lower this setting signifi cantly it is possible that the sound is distorting before the AD converter Adjust the LEVEL knob or the out put level of the external audio source Pan Sets the pan of the input signal that you selected in Input When inputting a stereo audio source you will normally set Input1 to L000 and Input2 to R127 or Input1 to R127 and Input2 to L000 When inputting a mono audio source you will nor mally set this to C064 BUS IFX Indiv Select In the same way as when making settings for the oscillator s of a program Spec ifies the bus to which each external audio input will be sent p 140 Send1 to MFX1 Send2 to MFX2 In the same way as when making settings for the oscillator s of a program sets the master effect send levels for each external audio input This can be set only if BUS IFX Indiv Select is set to L R or Off p 141 If BUS IFX Indiv Select is set to IFX1 5 the master effect send levels are set by the Send1 and Send2 parameters following the insert effect in each Insert FX page amp If BUS IFX Indi
387. ts the timing of the even num bered notes in the arpeggio counting from the first note to give the pattern a sense of swing Sort If this is checked the arpeggio will be sounded in order of pitch regardless of the order in which notes were played on keyboard On If this is unchecked the arpeggio will be sounded in the order in which the notes were played on keyboard Off Sort Latch If this is checked the arpeggio will continue playing even after you take your hand off the key board If this is unchecked the arpeggio will stop play ing when you take your hand off the keyboard Key Sync If this is checked the arpeggio pattern will start from the beginning when you play a note after having released all notes This setting is suitable when you are playing in realtime and want the arpeg gio to start at the beginning of the measure If this is unchecked the arpeggio pattern will always be syn chronized to the tempo of the MIDI clock For details on synchronization refer to Synchronizing the arpeg giator p 138 Keyboard If this is checked the notes you play on the keyboard will be heard as well as the arpeggiated notes If this is unchecked only the arpeggiated notes will be heard The same setting can be made by editing the parameter of the same name or abbreviation in the Program PO Play Arpeggio page WA You can use the page menu command
388. tton to access the dialog box and use the check boxes to uncheck any items that you do not need to save Select Save Items Program Bank I A I B C J D E I F E A E B E C E D E E E F E 6 In order to accurately reproduce the data you created we recommend that you check all of the boxes 9 Press the OK button to execute the Save operation If the data fits on one volume of media The data will be saved on the specified media and you will return to the Save page If the data does not fit on one volume of media floppy disk The No space available on medium dialog box will appear PG p 166 No space available on medium Do you want to make a divided file You can divide the file and save the data on multiple volumes of media If you do not want to divide the data press the Cancel button and re save the data on media that has more free area or on a different drive 1 Make sure that you have a sufficient number of floppy disks and press the OK button Saving will begin 2 When the disk is full the following dialog box will appear Select other medium i NEWFILE PCG 1 3M 61712 2001 15 66 06 t 3 Insert the next floppy disk into the TRITON STU DIO s floppy disk drive 4 Press a function key etc to make the TRITON STU DIO detect the next floppy disk 5 Press the Select button Saving will begin 6 If the No Space available on medium dialog box appears again repeat step
389. u or when you press the EXIT key Dialog box The dialog box that appears will depend on the currently selected page menu command When selecting a program or combination number in a dialog box use the VALUE controllers p 17 to input the number To execute press the OK button To cancel without execut ing press the Cancel button The operation will occur when you press and release the button The dialog box will close The EXIT key corresponds to the Cancel but ton Done button and Exit button Tet edit buton Write Combination l 4000 T Stereo Piano Category P Be Keyboard Combination b l A Stereo Piano Cancel button OK button amp After some commands are executed the previously locked page menu will be unlocked automatically and the page menu will be closed Text edit button When you press this button a text edit dialog box will appear Here you can rename text such as the name of a program combination or song etc p 40 57 Page jump menu COMBINATION Jump a 2 P1 P2 P3 Edit Prog Mixer Edit Trk Param Edit MIDI Filter P4 Edit Zone Ctr P P8 P9 Edit Arpeggiator Edit Insert Effect Edit Master Effect In Combination Program Sequencer Sampling Song Play or Global modes you can press the front panel MENU key to view a list of the pages in that mode As a reminder the page you were in before you pressed the MENU key will have its top right cor
390. u press the Copy button the selected step will be copied If you press the Insert button the copied step will be inserted 3 Set the last step to End If you set this to Continue to Step01 the cue list will play back repeatedly 4 In Repeat specify the number of times that the song for that step will be repeated For this example set Step 02 S001 VERSE to 02 6 Specify whether effect settings will also be switched when the song at each step is played back If you want to effect settings to change check the FX check box For this example check the FX check box for Step 01 which loads the effects 6 To play back at the tempo that was specified for each song set Tempo Mode to Auto If this is set to Manu Manual playback will use the tempo specified by J SEQUENCER P1 Cue List 0001 01 00O Meter 4 4 108 bICOO NEW CUELIST 00 P TrackG8 Lead Synth l 4124 Espress Lead Length G88 Repeat Load FR a Mit Step Measure ol maoni gt Saga INTRO paz maees P 001 YERSE bas maa25 P S002 CHORUS bad moos P End bas Current Step 01 When you press the SEQUENCER START STOP key playback will begin from the step that is speci fied as the Current Step SEQUENCER P1 Cue List 0010 01 Meter 4 4 J 108 C00 NEW CUELIST 00 P Track 3 Elec Piano I B126 Pro Dyno EP gt Auto ol paz pas pad pas e Step
391. u select a program or combination settings will be combination its data is called from saved in internal memory Write Select internal memory into the edit buffer Internal Memory Program Program Combination Combination Bank INT A 0 127 Bank EXB A 0 127 Bank INT A 0 127 Bank EXB A 0 127 NSS S 58 Writing global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns The settings you edit in Global mode can be written into internal memory This is done using the operations Write Global Setting Write User Drum Kits and Write User Arpeggio Patterns If you wish to use these edited set tings after you turn the power off be sure to write the data first There are two ways to write global settings user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns amp Before you write a user drum kit or user arpeggio pattern the Global mode memory protect setting must be turned off Memory protect amp The user arpeggio pattern parameter settings Tempo Pattern Octave Resolution Sort Latch Key Sync and Keyboard are set inde pendently in the Program Combination and Song modes These settings are not saved when you per form the Write operation described here If you have edited these parameters in Program or Combination mode you must return to that mode to write them Using a page menu command to write 4 To write global settings the various settings in
392. ue list to create an arrangement using individual songs for each verse chorus bridge etc and specify the number of repeats for each song You can use a maximum of 20 cue lists 200 songs and 100 preset patterns One song can use as many as 100 patterns The TRITON STUDIO can be used as a 16 track multitimbral tone generator Record patterns and assign them to individual keys using the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function Perform using the RPPR Realtime Pattern Play Recording function and adjust the various settings Song Play mode SME Standard MIDI File data can be played back from a floppy disk the internal hard drive or an external SCSI device and you can perform along with the playback Make effect settings for use in Song Play mode The arpeggiator can be used while you play along with the SMF playback SME songs can be played back in succession You can use the jukebox function to playback songs in any specified order Sampling mode Sample external audio sources i e record samples Insert effects can be applied to the external input sound while you sample Edit the waveform data you sampled or waveform data that you loaded in from media and set loop points etc Edit multisamples consisting of two or more samples A multisample can be converted into a program so that a multisample created in Sampling mode can be used in the Program Combination Sequencer or Song Play modes
393. uencer modes A performance in Program Combination or Sequencer modes can be resampled internally with all audio remaining in digital form This lets you resample a performance that uses the TRITON STUDIO s filters effects arpeggiator and sequencer etc External audio sources from the various input jacks can be sampled A performance played on the TRITON STUDIO can be mixed with the external audio source and sampled or you can sample just the external audio source while monitoring the performance played on the TRITON STUDIO The master effects can also be applied to the signal being sampled In Sequencer mode when you sample an external audio source while listening to the playback of the song note data can be automatically created in a track This In Track Sampling function lets you sample vocals or guitar while you play the sequencer just as if you were recording on a multi track recorder The song playback in Sequencer mode can be resampled to the hard disk Then in Disk mode you can edit the order of songs and use the CDRW 1 option to write them as an audio CD Editing in Sampling mode In Sampling mode the sample data you sampled or loaded from various media including WAVE and AIFF formats can be assigned to an index zone to create a multisample 99 Basic functions Sampling Settings 100 The waveform can be viewed in the LCD screen and edited by a variety of waveform editing commands t
394. ular function on the TRITON STUDIO you must first select the appropriate mode Press one of the front panel mode keys ICOMBI key DISK key to enter the corresponding mode COMBI key Combination mode PROG key Program mode SEQ key Sequencer mode SAMPLING key Sampling mode S PLAY key Song Play mode GLOBAL key Global mode DISK key Disk mode COMBI PROG SEQ SAMPLING S PLAY GLOBAL DISK 2 Selecting pages Each mode has a large number of parameters which are grouped into pages These are further subdivided by tabs into up to eight tab pages 1 Make sure that the desired mode is selected To select a mode press the appropriate mode key COMB key DISK key Here we will use Program mode as an example for our explanation Press the PROG key PROGRAM P Play Performance Edit Cat Bank INT A b 10 FastSunth J 128 P 000 Noisy Stabber iSW1 Porta SwW CCHES iSW2 JS Y amp Ribbon Lo IFX1008 St Graphic TEQ Knob1B Attack IFX2823 Stereo Phaser Knob2B Decay IFX3053 Reverb SmoothHall Knob3B Sust iMFX1 020 Stereo Flanger IF Xd B88 No Effect KnobdB KModd iMFX2 Gd3 L C R BPM Delay 1FX5 G80 No Effect i Performance Editor Octave Pitch Osc Amp Attack Decay IFX MFX Stretch Balance Level Time Time Balance Balance 5 a Fa Press the MENU key ee aa EXIT MENU The page jump menu will appear WA In Disk mode there is only one page so the pa
395. uments in a drum kit e The TRITON STUDIO provides 1 536 user combinations With the factory settings these contain a wide variety of preload combinations 512 A combination allows you to use layers splits or velocity switches to combine up to eight programs together with effects and two arpeggiators in order to create complex sounds that could not be produced by a single program You can also make settings that include external tone generators Features Sampling The TRITON STUDIO features an Open Sampling System that allows sampling and resampling to be performed not only in Sampling mode but also in Program Combina tion or Sequencer modes You can perform 48 kHz 16 bit linear mono or stereo sam pling 16 Mbytes of sample memory RAM as well as a hard drive are factory installed For the capacity of the hard drive refer to p 154 Sample memory RAM of 16 Mbytes is factory installed allowing approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds of mono sampling or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds of stereo sampling Sample memory can be expanded to a maxi mum of 96 Mbytes which allows you to record up to six samples of approximately 2 minutes 54 seconds each mono or approximately 1 minute 27 seconds each ste reo for a total 17 minutes 28 seconds of sampling time The hard drive lets you record up to 80 minutes as a sin gle sample file in either mono or stereo monaural approximately 440 Mbytes stereo approximately 879 M
396. ums the polyphony is normally 60 notes Depending on the multisamples that are selected for each oscillator the maximum polyphony can be up to 120 notes for Single up to 60 notes for Double and up to 120 notes for Drums p 15 Voice Assign Mode Select whether the program will sound in Poly polyphon ically or Mono monophonically If this is set to Poly you will be able to play chords using the program If this is set to Mono only one note will sound even if you play a chord Normally you will set this to Poly but it is effective to use Mono when you are playing sounds such as a solo instrument an analog synth bass or a synth lead Try switching between Poly and Mono and listen to the results OSC Basic page 16 Transpose 00 Low p ROM _ S 0ffset _ Rev Lvl 127 Tune 5000 D aaa A Piano Delay BGBGms OSC2 Multisample 7 T reei O Rev Lvl 127 Octave 1 4 gt 251 Noise Transpose 12 In this page you can select the multisample for each oscil lator The TRITON STUDIO provides 429 multisamples in its internal ROM memory VNL Additional multisamples can be added by installing EXB PCM series options Data sampled on the TRITON STU DIO can also be used as a multisample Selecting a multisample The multisample will determine the basic character of the program Use High MS Bank to select the multisample bank and use High Multisample to select the multisam ple
397. us during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped 15 Do not install this equipment on the far position from wall outlet and or convenience receptacle 16 Do not install this equipment in a confined space such as a box for the conveyance or similar unit 17 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with this apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over 10 Nr 11 Nr L R WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR RBOENHDY HrERYy henltoe The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
398. uses this drum kit PG p 28 5 Use the page menu command Write Drum Kits to save the data If you wish to change the name of the drum kit before you save it use the page menu command Rename Drum Kit p 57 amp If you turn off the power before writing the data into memory your edits will be lost Memory in Global mode p 59 129 Basic functions Drum kit settings Arpeggiator settings This chapter describes the procedure for making arpeg giator settings in each mode For details on the arpeggia tor function refer to Using the arpeggiator while you play p 29 Arpeggiator settings for a pro gram Arpeggiator on off Each time you press the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key the arpeggiator will be switched on or off When on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key LED will light When you play the keyboard an arpeggio will play according to the selected arpeggio pattern WA The on off setting is stored when the program is written CHOHOOCHCHCHOCHCOCOCHOOCOOCHOOO COE OEEEE Arpeggiator settings 4 Select the Program P7 Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup page PROGRAM P Edit Arpeggiator Arpeg Setup EEE A Arpeggiator Tempo J Arpeggiator Setup Pattern Octave O Key Sync _ Latch _ Keyboard 000 Use J Tempo to set the tempo You can adjust the tempo by rotating ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO knob The LED will blink at the specified tempo M If MID
399. ut from each AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN and mLAN if the EXB mLAN option is installed jack can be made in Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK Normally you will make these settings in the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Input Sampling page but you can also make them in Combination Program Sequencer or Disk modes In these modes you can apply the TRITON STUDIO s effects to the external audio signals from each jack and sample the result or use the TRITON STUDIO as a 6 in AUDIO INPUT 1 2 S P DIF IN L R mLAN 1 2 6 out effect processor You can also use it as a vocoder effect 093 Vocoder in which internal sounds are controlled by an external mic input GLOBAL P Basic Setup Input Sampling Aa E Input Analog COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK 3 Input Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select D L R Pan Sendi to MFX1 000 2 Send2 to MFX2 000 Input2 Level 127 BUS IFX Indiv Select P EZ Send1 to MFX1 606 Pan R127 Send2 to MFX2 000 Sampling UO Auto Optimize RAM s Pref I ingl Output M Input Routing In Program Combination Sequencer Song Play and Disk modes i e in other than Sampling mode the routing of the external audio input signals from the various jacks is specified by BUS IFX Indiv Select Use Input COMBI PROG SEQ S PLAY DISK to select the source that you want to input This setting can be made in any of the following pages If you want to save
400. v Select has a setting other than Off and you raise the Level value the external audio source will be input to the TRITON STUDIO At this time if audio cables are connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks noise may be input to the TRITON STUDIO via the AD converter even if no audio input is actually present and depending on the settings may be output from AUDIO OUTPUT L R 1 2 3 or 4 If you will not be using an external audio source but are using only the internal sounds of a program combination or song set BUS IFX Indiv Select to Off or set Level to 0 Similarly if you will not be using the S P DIF IN con nector or MLAN connector set these inputs to BUS IFX Indiv Select Off or set their Level to 0 If no audio cables are connected to the rear panel AUDIO INPUT 1 and 2 jacks the data that is input to the TRITON STUDIO from the AD converter will be set to zero and no noise will be output 143 Effects Basic functions settings About dynamic modulation Dmod D22 Dynamic modulation Dmod is a function that lets you use MIDI messages or the TRITON STUDIO s controllers to control specific effect parameters in realtime BPM MIDI Sync is another function that controls effect parameters and is used to synchronize the LFO speed of modulation type effects or the delay time etc of delay type effects to the tempo of the arpeggiator or an external sequ
401. ved Intensity to A LFO1 AMS Int to A and Intensity to B LFO1 AMS Int to B specify the depth of the wah effect that will be produced by the LFO when AMS LFO1 AMS is used For example if AMS LFO1 AMS is set to After Touch applying pressure to the keyboard of the TRITON STUDIO will produce a wah effect Filterl EG page Indicates settings for the filter EG which controls time variant changes in tone Make settings for the EG here and set the depth of its effect in the Filter1 Mod page Fil ter EG parameter PG p 19 Filter EG and Amplifier EG When the Filter EG changes the cutoff frequency the tone will change However depending on the volume changes produced by the Amplifier EG this can be heard in differ ent ways For example by changing the speed at which the tone and volume begin attack or decay you can signifi cantly vary the character of the tonal change It is a good idea to adjust the changes of both the Filter EG tone and the Amplifier EG volume as you proceed with editing Amp1 EG page Amplifier settings P4 Edit Amp These settings affect the volume Here you can adjust the way in which the Amp EG and LFO produce time varying and cyclic changes in volume and how the controllers etc will affect the volume Amp 1 applies to OSC1 and Amp2 applies to OSC2 Amp2 can be used if Oscillator Mode is set to Double For example the volume of a piano note begins a
402. vel is the L channel and the lower level is the R channel 3 Specify the start address in Start the loop start address in LoopS Loop Start and the end address in End Select Start highlighted and use the VALUE dial or other VALUE controllers to modify the value The corresponding vertical line will move Set LoopS Loop Start and End in the same way In the exam ple shown below Start is set immediately before the first waveform LoopS Loop Start is set immedi ately before the second waveform and End is set as desired Start LoopS Loop Start End note By using the ZOOM button you can change the range that is displayed When S Start is highlighted zoom will be performed from the start address PG p 100 110 AaaZ2HaS J Loop _ Rev LJ 1208 ai a e i LoopS 0024952 _ Loop Lock Loop Tune 88 fe 200M gt End 6850006 v use Zero rd ita gem A K Di sreesesesesesesssesseese anannnaasassaanaancaaasasnaaanaaaal is If the Use Zero check box is checked only those addresses where the waveform data crosses the zero level will be found automatically when searching and can be set This lets you easily make address set tings where noise is less likely to occur when looping 4 If necessary use the page menu command Truncate to delete unwanted data that falls outside the start or loop start and end addresses Truncate
403. will light You will enter Sequencer mode Song SEQUENCER P Play REC Program 161 68 aa Select 001 01 000 Meter 1 4 J 120 P Auto Popup 1 S000 Bullet Timing button Ma Mia ThePhone Reso es Mila BE ao Boe 68 A pas aztea Progra a Dy Sia Sil ae Die DSi Dial 1e iUGLY Hol iTrance T mB Gai Distortec amet Tr y Grand Analog Y House Bz 2 Access the P0 Play REC Program T01 08 page If this is not already displayed press the EXIT key and then press the Prog 1 8 tab 3 Select the demonstration song that you want to play back Press the Song Select area to highlight the song name Use the numeric keys to input a song number and press the ENTER key For example to select the second song press numeric key 1 and then press the ENTER key Song S001 will be selected Alternatively you can select a song from the popup menu Press the Song Select popup button to access the popup menu In the popup menu press the song that you want to play back The popup menu will close and the selected song will be displayed 4 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key The LED will blink and the selected song will play 6 If you wish to stop playback press the SEQUENCER START STOP key once again Playing a cue list Here s how to playback the demonstration cue list A cue list allows you to playback multiple songs in succession and specify the number of times that each song wi
404. x check box 4 Press the File Select popup button From the file list choose the filename that you wish to play back SONG PLAY P Prog Mix Program 161 65 061 61 00O Meter 474 J 129 Jukebox File gt EEE SONG_ a1 Name SONG_A 1 ma oe chat File Select GAB Acoustic Piano ER Ha ean esa Ha ean EA Ha Keshoad Resoaf Resboay Katoa fetal Resboay Pesboad Resboal k Progra be Daa ai AEM sen Baha pjg pjg Aco tic tol Ac stic im tol im tic im tol E aeee ee 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin At this time all songs displayed in the File Select popup button will playback consecu tively if Auto Start is checked 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key once again to stop playback Starting stopping playback for each song In the PO Prog Mix Preference page uncheck Chain to next file or Auto Start and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key Playback will begin and will stop when each song ends For details on these settings PG p 125 Chain to next file _ Auto Start Mute Solo function In PO Prog Mix the Program T01 08 and T09 16 pages provide PLAY MUTE buttons and SOLO ON OFF but tons that allow you to play and mute tracks 1 16 in the same way as in Sequencer mode You can use these when you wish to mute the melody track and play the part yourself on the keyboard minus one play or when you wish to
405. xit the text edit box press the Cancel button Cursor buttons Move the cursor to left or right Clear button Delete all characters of the text Space button Insert a space at the cursor location Memory protect To prevent programs combinations songs user drum kits and user arpeggio patterns from being overwritten accidentally the TRITON STUDIO provides a Memory Protect setting that prohibits writing to memory Before you save edited data or load data from floppy disk hard disk or other external media use the following pro cedure to turn the memory protect off uncheck the appro priate check box You must also turn memory protect off before loading the above data from media or via a MIDI data dump or before recording in Sequencer mode C Press the GLOBAL key to enter Global mode 2 After pressing the MENU key press either P0 Basic Setup or the 0 key 3 Press the System Pref tab The System Preference page will appear GLOBAL P Basic Setup System Preference Bank Map THaUmusiijgsina Djem gt Memorize gt Internal S P DIF Sample Rate gt 48kHz UO Beep Enable Power On Mode System Clock WAVE File Play Level gt Normal Memory Protect O Drum Kit O Program _ Combination _ Arpeagio User Pattern O Song Input mLAN mLAN Sampling Output M Input 4 Press the Memory Protect check box for the type of data you wish to write to internal memory
406. y be resampling in Program Combination and Sequencer modes listed above and performing conventional sampling in Sam pling mode listed below Optimizing the sample memory RAM If RAM has been specified as the destination to which data will be written during sampling you can specify that sample memory RAM be automatically optimized after the data is written When optimization is performed unused areas that are occupying memory space will be reorganized to increase the available free space In the Global mode P0 Basic Setup Input Sampling page you can check Auto Optimize RAM so that RAM will auto matically be optimized when sampling ends In this case you will always be able to sample without any wasted RAM area but the sound will stop for a time when sam pling ends If a song is being played back in Sequencer mode the playback will stop If you are playing back a song or if you are repeatedly recording multiple samples in various locations while lis tening to audio input from a CD etc you can sample with Auto Optimize RAM unchecked and then execute the page menu command Optimize RAM found in the Sampling page of Program Combination or Sequencer modes and in P0 P4 of Sampling mode to optimize the RAM when the remaining amount of memory begins to decrease The remaining amount of sample memory RAM can be checked in Sampling mode P0 Memory Status 105 Basic functions Sampling s
407. y one track use multi track record ing if you will be selecting another track in Track Select and recording its performance at the same time You should also select multi track recording if you created the RPPR data using multiple tracks rather than just a sin gle track and want to simultaneously record the perfor mance of multiple tracks RA The RPPR pattern will be recorded as performance data on the tracks used by the pattern Here we will explain how you can simultaneously record a performance that uses both RPPR and the arpeggiator For each RPPR pattern set Sync to SEQ With a setting of SEQ patterns played by the RPPR function while the sequencer is playing or recording will start in synchronization with the measures of the sequencer SEQUENCER P6 Pattern RPPR gt S604 Hip Hop Rap pb Tracka Drums RPPR Setup aa J 996 A ES HipHop Kit KEY C 2 Assign Mode gt Manual C 1 to C2 Shutdown Keys Sync Djs Pattern Preset P P121 HipHop 1 HipHop Track 1 ered Drums Pare setup 2 We will use the arpeggiator to play the bass pattern Follow these settings Set Track Select to Track02 Bass Select the Sequencer P7 Arpeggiator Setup T01 08 page and set the track 2 Arpeggiator Assign to A Make sure that A is checked for Arpeggiator Run Shift 88 cto last assigned SEQUENCER P Arpeggiator 001 01 000 Meter 4 4 S004 Hip Hop Rap Poe
408. y to operate this equipment CE mark for European Harmonized Standards CE mark which is attached to our company s products of AC mains operated apparatus until December 31 1996 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC And CE mark which is attached after January 1 1997 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Also CE mark which is attached to our company s products of Battery operated apparatus means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC Data handling Incorrect operation or malfunction may cause the con tents of memory to be lost so we recommend that you save important data on a floppy disk or other media Please be aware that Korg will accept no responsibility for any damages which may result from loss of data Also when digitally recording copyrighted audio material from a DAT or CD etc you must obtain per mission for use Please be aware that Korg will accept no responsibility for any copyright violations which may occur through your use of this product Handling of the internal hard drive Do not apply physical shock to this device In particu lar you must never move this device or apply physical shock while the power is turned on This can cause part or all of the data on disk to be lost or may damage the hard disk or interior components
409. y will be boosted as shown in the diagram below giving a distinctive charac ter to the sound When resonance is applied Low Pass Filter Mod page PROGRAM P3 Edit Filter Keyboard Trackz Key Low RRM Keu High G 1 Intensity to A 49 Filter 1 Mod al Ramp Low 00 Ramp High 16 _ Filter EG velocity to A 37 Intensity to A 00 AMS JS CC H2 Yelgiiy ig Git2 infentity ta E eya InttoA 15 iieis Filter A B Modulation Filter A AMS1 Velocity AMS2 Ribbon Intensity 55 Intensity 49 HE Bic 2 SP i Easg sr EEE HERES OE p PEARS H ejin Filteri Filteri Filteri Filteri Filter2 Filter2 Filter2 Filter2 S Mod Mfo Mod EG Mod Mfo Mod EG A Controllers and the filter EG can be used to modulate the filter cutoff frequency that was specified in the Filter1 page By using a controller to vary the tone or by using an EG to create time varying changes you can add a rich variety of tonal change to the sound targi targi Keyboard Track This varies the cutoff frequency according to the position of the key on the keyboard that you play e When Ramp Low is set to a positive value the cutoff frequency will rise as you play lower on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play lower on the keyboard making the sound darker e When Ramp High is set to a positive value the cutoff frequenc
410. y will rise as you play higher on the keyboard making the sound brighter When set to a negative value the cutoff frequency will fall as you play higher on the keyboard making the sound darker e Intensity to A and Intensity to B adjust the effect that keyboard tracking will have on filters A and B PG p 17 Filter EG Adjusts the effect produced by the filter EG whose set tings are made in the EG page e Use the Velocity to A and Velocity to B settings to specify the effect of velocity on the filter EG e Use the Intensity to A and Intensity to B settings to specify the depth of the filter EG e Into A AMS Int to A and Into B AMS Int to A adjust the effect that AMS will have on the filter EG depth These three settings will determine the depth of the tonal change produced by the filter EG Filter A B Modulation Set this when you wish to produce tonal change by using controllers etc to vary the cutoff frequency Filterl LFO Mod page Indicates settings that allow the LFO to produce cyclic changes in tone a wah effect Intensity to A LFO Int to A and Intensity to B LFO Int to B specify by how much the LFO will change the tone JS Y Intensity to A and JS Y Intensity to B specify the depth of the wah effect that will be produced by the LFO when the joystick of TRITON STUDIO is moved toward yourself or when CC 2 is recei
411. ynchronize to the beats of that pattern e In Sequencer mode if you want RPPR pattern playback to be synchronized to the currently running arpeggiator set Sync to SEQ Sequencer P6 Pattern RPPR RPPR Setup page The pattern playback will synchronize to the a Tempo timing of the arpeggiator When a song is being played or recorded e The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beats based on the timing of the song Synchronization with Song Start e When the arpeggiator is on the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is on and running receiving a Song Start message will reset the arpeggiator to the beginning of the pattern This has no relation to the Key Sync setting e In Sequencer mode when the Key Sync setting is unchecked and the ARPEGGIATOR ON OFF key is on starting the arpeggiator by pressing notes during the pre count before recording will cause the arpeggiator to start and be recorded from the 138 beginning of the arpeggio pattern at the moment that recording begins Synchronization with an external sequencer in Program Combination or Sequencer modes In Program Combination and Sequencer modes when J Tempo is EXT Global P1 MIDI MIDI Clock set to External MIDI or External mLAN the TRITON STUDIO will synchronize to MIDI Clock and Start messages received from an external MIDI sequencer or similar device connected by a MIDI cable Synchronization to external MIDI clock e
412. you set Quantize to a Resolution of J and press the OK button 4 Press the SEQUENCER REC WRITE key You will hear the metronome The TRITON STUDIO will be in record ready mode Refer to PG p 58 for details on metronome settings 6 Press the SEQUENCER START STOP key After a two measure count recording will begin Play the keyboard for about 16 measures and record your performance If you make a mistake or decide to re record press the START STOP key to stop recording and press the COMPARE key When you press the COMPARE key to execute the Compare function you will return to the state prior to recording Refer to p 97 for the content that can be compared in Sequencer mode 6 When you are satisfied with your performance press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop record ing WA For example if your performance in measures 5 8 was the best take you can use the Track Play Loop function to repeatedly play back just this portion In the PO Play REC PlayLoop T01 08 page check Track Play Loop for track 2 set Loop Start Mea sure to 005 and set Loop End Measure to 008 SEQUENCER P Play REC PlayLoop 161 638 Aa 601 61 660 Meter 474 J 108 gt Manu gt S000 Acid Jazz P TrackG2 Bass Reso P 2 _ RPPR T 2 I BG22 Fretless Bass Ch 32 RPPR Nofssign PS aa EEn a ee ee eae 1 E 5 7 E iDrums Bass iKeyboariGuitar PiStrings Organ SlowSyntiLeadSyn i T
413. you are unsure about your rights to a work please consult a copyright attorney KORG TAKES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY INFRINGEMENT COMMITTED THROUGH USE OF KORG PRODUCTS Company names product names and names of for mats etc are the trademarks or registered trade marks of their respective owners Thank you for purchasing the Korg TRITON STUDIO music workstation sampler To ensure trouble free enjoyment please read this manual carefully and use the instru ment as directed About this manual The owner s manuals and how to use them The TRITON STUDIO come with the following owner s manuals e Basic Guide e Parameter Guide e Voice Name List Basic Guide First read this manual carefully to gain a basic under standing of the instrument and to learn basic opera tion Introduction explains the function of each part how to make connections basic operation and gives an overview of each mode Quick Start explains the basics of playing the TRI TON STUDIO how to listen to the demo songs select sounds and use convenient performance functions and describes examples of how to perform sampling and use the sequencer If you wish to begin playing immediately read this sec tion first Basic Functions contains mode by mode explana tions of what you need to know to edit sounds record using the sequencer and to record samples This sec tion also explains how to use the arpeggiator ef
414. you play the key board and the TRITON STUDIO does not function normally L This type of problem may occur if a data writing operation to internal memory was not completed correctly for example if the power of the TRITON STUDIO was turned off while a program or other data was being written If this occurs use the following procedure to initialize the TRITON STUDIO s internal memory 1 Turn off the power 2 Hold down the MENU key and the 9 key and turn on the power The TRITON STUDIO will be initialized and data will be written into internal memory While the data is being written the LCD screen will indicate Now writing into internal memory After initialization you will need to load the pre loaded data Load the data from the included floppy disk or the internal hard drive p 20 63 Can t operate the LCD screen correctly In Global PO Basic Setup execute the Touch Panel Calibration page menu command to adjust the sensitivity of the touch panel PG p 137 _ If it is not possible to select this command from the page menu enter Global mode PO press the MENU key and then press the 0 or EXIT key to access this and then hold down the ENTER key and press numeric key 2 to display the dialog box Can t switch modes or pages Are you recording or playing a song Are you sampling Are you playing a CD Are you playing a WAVE file In Combination Sequencer
415. you press the ENTER key three or more times Range Start and Range End will respectively be set to the next to last point at which you pressed the key and the last point at which you pressed the key The method described above is used when the cursor is located at other than Range Start or Range End If the cursor is located at Range Start or Range End that setting will be re set each time you press the ENTER key ZS If the cursor is located at Range Start or Range End this region will be played back When you finish making settings press the SEQUENCER START STOP key to stop playback of the audio CD D Verify the region that will be ripped Select either Region Start or Region End the dis play will be highlighted and press the SEQUENCER START STOP key The CD will play from Range Start to Range End and then stop 5 If you want to adjust the location use the VALUE controllers to modify the Range Start or Range End settings or move the cursor to a parameter other than Range Start and Range End and repeat step 6 to make the setting once again If you want to move the track playback start location to the beginning of the track press the LOCATE key When you have finished setting Range Start and Range End select the page menu command Desti nation A dialog box will appear Specify the desti

Korg PA50sd Electronic Keyboard User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents